QX50 (2019) - Automotive INFINITI - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	Automobile
Brand	Infiniti
Model	QX50 (2019)
Year	2019
Engine	2.0L turbocharged 4-cylinder (VC-Turbo)
Horsepower	268 hp @ 5,600 rpm
Transmission	CVT (Continuously Variable Transmission)
Drivetrain	Front-wheel drive or Intelligent All-Wheel Drive
Fuel Economy (city/highway)	22 mpg city / 28 mpg highway (FWD)
Seating Capacity	5 passengers
Curb Weight	Approximately 3,800 lbs
Dimensions (L x W x H)	184.7 in x 74.9 in x 66.0 in
Wheelbase	110.2 in
Fuel Tank Capacity	16.0 gallons
Safety Features	Forward emergency braking, blind spot warning, lane departure warning, adaptive cruise control
Infotainment	Dual 8-inch and 7-inch touchscreens, Apple CarPlay, Android Auto, Bose premium audio
Warranty (Basic/Powertrain)	4 years / 60,000 miles; 6 years / 70,000 miles
Manual Language	English
Manual Pages	583

Frequently Asked Questions - QX50 (2019) INFINITI

How do I download the QX50 2019 manual in PDF?

On the notice page, click the Download button to get the PDF version of the owner's manual.

What is the recommended oil type for the 2019 Infiniti QX50?

The QX50 requires 0W-20 synthetic oil meeting API SN or ILSAC GF-5 standards. Check the manual for capacity.

How do I pair my phone via Bluetooth?

Go to Settings > Phone > Bluetooth on the infotainment screen, enable Bluetooth on your phone, and select the vehicle. Confirm pairing code.

What is the towing capacity of the 2019 QX50?

The QX50 can tow up to 3,000 lbs when properly equipped with a hitch and trailer brakes.

How often should I change the engine air filter?

It is recommended to inspect the engine air filter every 15,000 miles and replace if dirty. Generally replace every 30,000 miles.

Does the 2019 QX50 have a spare tire?

No, the QX50 comes with a tire repair kit instead of a spare tire. Inflator sealant is included.

What is the tire pressure recommended?

Recommended tire pressure is 33 psi for both front and rear tires. Check the label on driver's door jamb.

How do I reset the oil life indicator?

Turn ignition on, go to the vehicle information screen, select 'Oil Maintenance', then press and hold reset button until 100% appears.

What type of coolant is used?

Use Nissan Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Do not mix with green coolant.

Is Apple CarPlay compatible with the QX50?

Yes, the 2019 QX50 supports Apple CarPlay and Android Auto via USB connection.

USER MANUAL QX50 (2019) INFINITI

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Owner's Manual Supplement

The information contained within this supplement updates the following information the 2019 INFINITI QX50 Owner's Manual:

- "STEERINGASSIST SWITCH (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) (if so equipped the "Instruments and controls" section of the Owner's Manual

"LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION (LDP) (if so equipped)" and "BLIND SPOT INTERVENTION ® (BSI) (if so equipped)" and "DISTANCECONTROL ASSIST (D (if so equipped)" in the "Starting and driving" section of the Owner's Manual

Read carefully and keep in vehicle.

Printing: November 2017

Publication No. SU19E0 0J55U0

STEERINGASSISTSWITCH(for vehicleswithProPILOTAssist)(ifso equipped)

Simple line drawing of a rectangular device with a circular logo on the top and 'LIC3853' label at bottom (no text or symbols on the device itself)

The Steering Assist switch is used to turn on and off the Steering Assist system that is activated using the settings menu of the vehicle information display.

The Steering Assist system controls the steering system to help keep your vehicle near the center of the lane when driving. For additional information, refer to "ProPILO-T"Assist" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

LANEDEPARTUREPREVENTION (LDP)(ifsoequipped)

1 2 AUDIO MENU CLIMATE 3 4 LSD3140

1. LDP indicator
2. Lower display buttons
3. Dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist)
4. ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist)

The LDP system operates above approximately 37 mph (60 km/h). When the vehicle systems approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDP indicator (orange) on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver. Then, the LDP system will automatically apply the brakes for a short period of time to help assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane.

To turn on the LDP system, push the dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel after starting the engine. The LDP indicator (green) on the instrument panel will illuminate. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel again to turn off the LDP system. The LDP indicator will turn off

AUDIO MENU CLIMATE Lane Assist Lane Departure Warning ON Lane Departure Prevention ON LSD3141

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDP SYSTEM

When the LDP system is enabled in the lower display, the system can be turned off temporarily by pushing the dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel.

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDP system.

1. Press the MENU button below the lower display screen.
2. Select "Driver Assistance."
3. Select "Lane Assist."
4. Select "ON" to turn the "Lane Departure Prevention" system on or off.

NOTE:

TurningontheProPILOTAssistsystem(ifso equipped)willturnontheLDPsystematthe sametime.Foradditionalinformation,refer to"ProPILOT™ Assist"inthissection.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

ConditionC:

Actiontotake:

When the above conditions no longer exist, turn off the LDP system. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without

If the following messages appear in the ve-ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist hicle information display, a chime will soundswitch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist) on and the LDP system will be turned off autethe steering wheel again to turn the LDP matically: system back on.

• "Not Available Poor Road Conditions": When the VDC system (except Traction Control System [TCS] function) or ABS operates.
• "Currently not available": When the VDC system is turned off.

BLINDSPOTINTERVENTION®(BSI) (ifsoequipped)

1 2 3 4 Univariable Side Radar Obstruction LSD3142

1. Side indicator light
2. BSI/BSW/BCI/RCTA indicator light
3. Dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOTAssist)
4. ProPILOT Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT Assist)

The BSI system operates above approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side indicator light① illuminates.

If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. The side indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone.

If the BSI system is on and your vehicle approaches a lane marker while another vehicle is in the detection zone, the system chimes (three times) and the side indicator light flashes. The BSI system activates to help return the vehicle back to the center of the driving lane. The BSI system operates regardless of turn signal usage.

NOTE:

• BSlwarningandsystemapplicationwill onlybeactivatedifthesideindicator lightisalreadyilluminatedwhenyour vehicleapproachesalanemarker.Ifan- othervehiclecomesintothedetection zoneafteryourvehiclehascrossedalane marker,noBSlwarningorsystemapplicationwillbeactivated.Foradditional information,referto"BSIdrivingsituations"inthissection.
  TheBSIsystemistypicallyactivated earlierthantheLaneDeparturePrevention(LDP)systemwhenyourvehicleis approachingalanemarker.

The BSI system turns on when the dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel is pushed when the "Blind Spot Intervention" is enabled in the "Driver Assistance" menu in the lower display. The BSI ON indicator light on the instrument panel illuminates when the BSI system is turned on.

The BSI system provides a chime and turns on or flashes the side indicator light even if the BSW system is off.

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Warning ● ON Blind Spot Intervention ● ON Side Indicator Brightness — Standard + AUDIO MENU CLIMATE LSD3143

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSI SYSTEM

When the BSI system is enabled in the lower display, the system can be turned off temporarily by pushing the dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel.

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSI system:

1. Press the MENU button below the lower display screen.
2. Select "Driver Assistance."
3. Select "Blind Spot Assist."
4. Select "ON" to turn the "Blind Spot Intervention" system on or off.

- Select the "-" or the "+" to change the "Side Indicator Brightness" and set it to either "Standard", "Bright" or "Dark."

DISTANCECONTROLASSIST(DCA) (ifsoequipped)

Forward Assist Distance Control Assist ● ON AUDIO MENU CLIMATE LSD3144

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE DCA SYSTEM

To turn on the DCA system, push the dynam driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel after starting the engine. The DCA system switch indicator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel again to turn off the DCA system. The DCA system switch indicator light will turn off.

The system will start to operate after the vehicle speed becomes above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).

The dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel is used for the LDP, DCA and BSI systems. When the dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel is pushed, the LD system will also turn on or off simultaneously. The DCA system can be individually set to o

or off on the display. If the system is set for additional information on LDP and BSI, off, the system will not turn on even if therefer to "Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)" dynamic driver assistance switch (for models and "Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)" in this without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT section.

Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel is pushed to on. For additional information, refer to "Setting DCA system to ON/OFF" in this section.

SettingDCAsystemtoON/OFF:

The DCA can be turned on/off in the lower display.

1. Press the MENU button below the lower display screen.
2. Select "Driver Assistance."
3. Select "Forward Assist."
4. Select "ON" to turn the "Distance Control Assist" system on or off.

If the LDP, BSI and DCA systems are set to off in the lower display and the dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel is pushed, the LDP indicator light, BSI ON indicator light, and the DCA system switch indicator light will blink for approximately 2 seconds.

1 2 LSD3034

DCA system display and indicators

The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.

1. DCA system switch indicator (green): Indicates that the dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT Assist) on the steering wheel is on.

2. DCA system warning light (orange): The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the DCA system.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

ConditionA:

Actiontotake:

When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off with the dynamic driver assistance switch (for models

Under the following conditions, the DCA system is automatically canceled. The chime will switch (for models with ProPILOT Assist) or the ProPILOT System will blink. The system will not be able to be set.

• When the VDC system is off (To use the DCA system, turn on the VDC, then push the dynamic driver assistance switch [for models without ProPILOT Assist] or the ProPILOT Assist switch [for models with ProPILOT Assist] on the steering wheel.)
  For additional information about the VDC system, refer to "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" in this section.
• When ABS or VDC (including the TCS) is operating
• When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted

Owner's Manual Supplement

The information contained within this supplement updates the following information in the 2019 INFINITI QX50 Owner's Manual:

"FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM SWITCH (if so equipped)" in the "Instruments and controls" section.

Read carefully and keep in vehicle.

Printing: February 2018

Publication No. SU19E0 1J55UO

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM SWITCH (if so equipped)

P LIC3989

WARNING

• The front sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper driving.
• The rear sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and check that it is so to do so before backing up. Always back up slowly.

The front sonar system:

• is active when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the shift lever is in a forward gear position.
• a beeping tone is emitted when the sensors detect obstacles within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the front bumper.

The rear sonar system:

• is active when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift lever is in R (Reverse).
• a beeping tone is emitted when the sensors detect obstacles within 4.9 ft (1.5 m) of the rear bumper.

The front and rear sonar system may be enabled by pushing the front and rear sonar switch. When the system is enabled, the indicator light on the switch will illuminate. Push the switch again to disable the system. The indicator light will go off.

The system will automatically reset the next time the ignition switch is turned ON.

For additional information, refer to "Front and rear sonar system" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

FOREWORD READ FIRST-THEN DRIVE SAFELY

This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.

dt- is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this Owner's Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements, assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet is included in your Owner's literature portfolio. The "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Always carry it with you when you take your vehicle to an INFINITI retailer. The Warranty Information Booklet contents provide complete information about all warranties covering this vehicle, the requirements to keep the warranties in effect as well as the INFINITI Roadside Assistance program.

Additionally, a separate Customer Care and Lemon Law Information Booklet will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, as well as clarify your rights under your state's lemon law.

In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed prior to delivery. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS!

Followtheseimportantdriving rulesto help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers!

• NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
• ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions.
• ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you.
• ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Pre-teen children should be seated in the rear seat.
• ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.
• ALWAYS review this Owner's Manual for important safety information.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

For descriptions specified for all-wheel drive models, an AWD mark is placed at the beginning of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features for or road use, failure to operate all-wheel drive models correctly may result in loss of cont or an accident. For additional information, refer to "Driving safety precautions" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from an ordinary passenger car because it has a higher center of gravity for off-road use. As with other vehicles with features of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. For additional information, refer to "On-pavement and off-road driving precautions", "Avoiding collision and rollover" and "Driving safety precautions" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified. M fication could affect its performance, safety, emissions or durability and may even violate governmental regulations. of addition, damage or performance prob- lems resulting from modifications may be covered under INFINITI warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the port during normal driving, for example remote insurance company monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or engine reprogramming, may cause interference or damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommendoredorsetheuseof any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically approved by INFINITI. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all features and equipment available on this model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, order, date of production, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. INFINITI reserves the right to change specifications, performance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation. From time to time, INFINITI may update or revise this manual to provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent to you by INFINITI to ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner's Manuals and any updates can also be found in the Owner section of the INFINITI website at https://owners.infinitiusa.com/iowners/

navigation/manualsAndGuides. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner's Manual, contact INFINITI Consumer Affairs. See the INFINITI CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner's Manual for contact information.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. If To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.

X APD1005

you see this symbol, it means "Do not is" or "Do not let this happen."

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING

A WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY

Somevehicleparts,such aslithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: "Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. For additional information, refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/".

INFINITI®

© 2017 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner's Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

INFINITI CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

INFINITI CARES...

Both INFINITI and your INFINITI retailer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your INFINITI retailer are our primary concerns. Your INFINITI retailer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask You can write to INFINITI with the information-INFINITI retailer cannot assist you with or for the following information: tion on the left at:

you would like to provide INFINITI directly with comments or questions, please contact our (INFINITI's) Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers 1-800-662-6200

For Canadian customers 1-800-361-4792

• Your name, address, and telephone number
• Vehicle identification number (on dash panel)
• Date of purchase
• Current odometer reading
• Your INFINITI retailer's name
• Your comments or questions

OR

For U.S. customers INFINITI Division

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

[e-mail]

For Canadian customers INFINITI Division

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

[e-mail]

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.infinitiUSA.com (for U.S. customers)

or

www.infiniti.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in INFINITI and thank you for buying a quality INFINITI vehicle.

Table of Contents

Illustrated table of contents	0
Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system	1
Instruments and controls	2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments	3
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems	4
Starting and driving	5
In case of emergency	6
Appearance and care	7
Do-it-yourself	8
Maintenance and schedules	9
Technical and consumer information	10
Index	11

O Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints 0 - 2 instrument panel 0 - 6
Exterior front 0-3 Engine compartment check locations 0-8
Exterior rear 0-4 Warning and indicator lights 0-9
Passenger compartment.... 0 - 5

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 13 12 11 10 9 8 LIC3786

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Rear seat manual fold flat lever (P. 1-2)
2. Folding 2nd row bench (P. 1-2)
3. Rear seat belt with pretensioner(s) (P. 1-11)
4. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-7)
5. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-11, 1-42)
6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)
7. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-42)
8. Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bags (P. 1-42)
9. Front seats (P. 1-2)
10. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) (P. 1-42)
11. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)
12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) (P. 1-22)
13. 2nd row seat top tether strap anchor (located on bottom of seatback) (P. 1-22)
    Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

EXTERIOR FRONT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 LIC3787

1. Engine hood (P. 3-24)
2. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-36) Wiper blades (P. 8-15)
3. Windshield (P. 8-15)
4. Power windows (P. 2-67)
5. Door locks (P. 3-4) INFINITI Intelligent Key (P. 3-7) Keys (P. 3-2)
6. Mirrors (P. 3-36) Side camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-11)
7. Tire pressure (P. 8-25) Flat tire (P. 6-3) Tire chains (P. 8-25)
8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-23) Headlight switch (P. 2-41) Turn signal switch (P. 2-41) LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (P. 2-41)
9. Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-41)
10. Sonar sensors (if so equipped) (P. 5-186)
11. Front camera (if so equipped) (P. 4-11)
    See the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

EXTERIOR REAR

1 2 3 4 5 6 LIC3788

O-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Rear wiper and washer switch (P. 2-36)
2. Liftgate release (P. 3-24)
   Rearview camera (P. 4-3)
3. Sonar sensors (if so equipped) (P. 5-186)
4. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-23)
5. Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-31) Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2) Fuel-filler door (P. 3-31)
6. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-4)
   Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

1 2 3 4 5 8 7 6 LIC3789

1. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-69)
2. Sun visors (P. 3-35)
3. Map lights (P. 2-72)
4. Sunglasses storage (P. 2-56)
5. Rearview mirror (P. 3-36)
6. Glove box (P. 2-56)
7. Console box (P. 2-56)
8. Cup holders (P. 2-56)

Refer to the page number indicated in parer theses for operating details.

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 LIC3793

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

1. Vent (P. 4-34)

2. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System* Steering wheel switch for audio control* Center display multi-function control buttons* Control panel and vehicle information display switches (P. 2-22)

3. High beam/turn signal switch (P. 2-46) Paddle shifters (P. 5-19)

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) Horn (P. 2-47)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-6) Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-11) Vehicle information display (P. 2-21)

6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-36) Rear wiper and washer switch (P. 2-36)

7. Automatic heater and air conditioning controls (P. 4-35) Driver side climate controlled seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-48) Driver side heated seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-49)

8. Upper and lower displays* Navigation system* (if so equipped)

9. Automatic heater and air conditioning controls (P. 4-35) Passenger side climate controlled seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-48) Passenger side heated seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-49) Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch (P. 2-40)
10. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)
11. Glove box (P. 2-56)
12. Audio system controls* Front passenger air bag status light (P. 1-42)
13. INFINITI controller*
14. Power outlet (P. 2-54) USB charging port (P. 4-43) Cup holders (P. 2-56) Storage (P. 2-56)
15. Shift lever (P. 5-19)

16. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-13) Electronic parking brake switch (P. 5-24)

17. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

18. ProPilot ^TM Assist Switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-107) Cruise control switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-81) Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-83) Control panel and vehicle information display switches (P. 2-22)
19. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel control (P. 3-34)
20. Hood release (P. 3-24)
21. Trip reset switch (P. 2-6) Instrument brightness control (P. 2-41) Front and rear sonar system (if so equipped) (P. 5-186) Steering assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT™ Assist) (if so equipped) (P. 2-51) Dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT™ Assist) (if so equipped) (P. 2-50) Liftgate release switch (P. 3-24) Headlight switch (P. 2-41) Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-47)

Head Up Display (HUD) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-52) Distance control switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-138) *: Refer to the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual.

Refer to the page number indicated in parer theses for operating details.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LDI3173

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

KR20DDET engine

1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)
2. Drive belt location (P. 8-13)
3. Air filter (P. 8-14)
4. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-10)
5. Battery (P. 8-11)
6. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-18)
7. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-10)
8. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)
9. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)

Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning light	Name Page
or	Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light	2-12
or	Brake warning light	2-12
	Charge warning light	2-13
	Electric shift control system warning light (if so equipped)	2-13
	Electronic parking brake system warning light (yellow) (if so equipped)	2-13

Warning light	Name Page
or	Electronic parking brake warning light (if so equipped)	2-13
	Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light	2-14
	Low tire pressure warning light	2-14
[53x3]	Master warning light	2-15
	Oil pressure warning light	2-16
	Power steering warning light	2-16

Warning light	Name Page
	Seat belt warning light and chime	2-17
	Supplemental air bag warning light	2-17
Indicator	Name Page
	Automatic brake hold indicator light (if so equipped)	2-17
	Eco drive indicator light	2-18
	Front fog light in-dicator light (green) (if so equipped)	2-18
	Front passenger air bag status light	2-18
Indicator light	Name Page
	High beam assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped)	2-18
	High beam indicator light (blue)	2-18
	Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)	2-18
	Security indicator light	2-19
	Side light and headlight indicator light (green)	2-19
	Slip indicator light	2-19
	Turn signal/hazard indicator lights	2-19

Indicator light	Name Page
	Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)OFF indicator light	2-20

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats 1 - 2

Front power seat adjustment 1-3

Rear bench seat adjustment 1-4

Armrests. 1 - 5

Flexible seating 1 - 5

Head restraints/headrests....1-7

Adjustable head restraint/headrest

components 1-8

Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

components 1 - 8

Remove....1 - 8

Install....1-9

Adjust 1-9

Seat belts 1-11

Precautions on seat belt usage 1-11

Seat belt warning light 1-14

Pregnant women....1-14

Injured persons....1-14

Three-point type seat belt with retractor .....1-14

Seat belt extenders....1-18

Seat belt maintenance....1-19

Child safety 1-19

Infants....1-20

Small children 1-20

Larger children 1-20

Child restraints 1-22

Precautions on child restraints 1-22

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system 1-24

Rear-facing child restraint installation using LATCH 1-27

Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts.... 1-29

Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH 1-31

Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts.... 1-35

Booster seats 1-39

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) 1-42

Precautions on SRS 1-42

Supplemental air bag warning labels 1-62

Supplemental air bag warning light.... 1-62

SEATS

Sit upright and well back.

Diagram showing car seatbelt and cross-section of a vehicle (no text or symbols)

WARNING

- Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

• For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, these should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor of adjust the seat properly. For additional information, refer to "Precautions on seat belt usage" in this section.
• After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.

• Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

• To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

• Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle.
• The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger and sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2985

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to "Precautions on seat belt usage" in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Operating tips

For additional information, refer to "Automatic drive positioner" in the "Pre-driving checks and adjustments" section of this manual.

• The power seat motor has an auto-reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, moving the switch as shown will slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position then reactivate the switch.

Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery. Move the recline switch as shown until the desired angle is obtained.

LRS2986

Seat lifter

Move the switch as shown to adjust the angle and height of the seat cushion.

LRS3046

Driver's seat

Lumbar support (for driver's seat and if so equipped for passenger's seat)

The lumbar support feature provides adjustable lower back support to the driver and passenger (if so equipped). Move the switch as shown to adjust the seat lumbar area.

1 2 LRS2988

REAR BENCH SEAT ADJUSTMENT

Forward and backward

Pull the center of the boat up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever ② and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lev ③ up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to "Precautions on seat belt usage" in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).

WARNING

• After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.
• Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
• For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright, in the seat and adjust the seat belt properly. For additional information, refer to "Precautions on seat belt usage" in this section.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt buckle with a black arrow indicating the direction (no text or symbols)

LRS2924

^st ARMRESTS

The rear bench seat comes equipped with an armrest. Pull the armrest down as shown.

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seats when they are the fold-down position. In a collision, people riding in these areas without proper restraints are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

- Do not allow people to ride in any area your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. - Do not allow more thanone person to use the same seat belt. - Do not fold down the rear seats when occupants are in the rear seat area or an luggage is on the rear seats.

• Make sure that the seat path is clear before moving the seat.
• Becareful notto allowhandsor feet to get caught or pinched in the seat.

Head restraints/headrests should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant protection against injury in an accident. Alwaysreplace andadjust them properly if they have been removed for any reason.

If the head restraints/headrests are removed for any reason, they should be securely stored to prevent them from causing injury to passengers or damage to the vehicle in case of sudden braking or an accident.

• When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
• Properly secure all cargo to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with a black arrow pointing to the seat (no text or symbols)

LRS3047
Rear seat shown

Folding the rear bench seat

To fold the rear bench seat flat for maximum cargo hauling: 3

1. Make sure that the head restraints/headrests are lowered. To remove the head restraints/headrests, push and hold the lock knob while moving the head restraints/headrests in an upward direction. Store the head restraints/headrests properly so they are not loose in the vehicle.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt mechanism with a black arrow indicating the grip point (no text or symbols present)

Cargo area shown

1. Stow the rear seat belts in the seat belt hooks found on the sides of the vehicle.
2. Lift up on the recline lever on the side of the outboard seats or pull the lever on either side of the cargo area to fold the seatbacks flat.

To return the rear bench seats to a seating position, push up on the seatback until it latches in place.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement the other vehicle safety systems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Adjustable head restraints/headrests must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Do not attach anything to head restraint/headrest stalks or remove the head restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat if the head restraint/headrest has been removed. If the head restraint/headrest was removed, reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position. Failure to follow these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraints/headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

the LRS2403

The illustration shows the seating positions equipped with head restraints/headrests.

▲Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint.

■Indicates the seating position is equipped with a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).

- Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock them in a desired adjustment position.
The non-adjustable head restraints/headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame.
- Proper Adjustment:

• For the adjustable type, align the head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint/headrest.
• If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.

If the head restraint/headrest has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in place before riding in that designated seating position.

1 2 3 4 LRS2300

1 2 3 4 LR$2299 LRS2302

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Multiple notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Single notch
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks

Line drawing of a car seat with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the head restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

LRS2303

Line drawing of a person seated in a car seat, viewed from the side (no text or symbols)

INSTALL

ADJUST

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks For adjustable head restraint/headrest with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint/headrest is facing the correct direction. The stalk with the notch (notches) ① must be installed in the hole with the lock kn ② Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center is level with the center of your ears. I your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

Simple line drawing of a car wheel with a diagonal cross mark and an upward arrow, no text or symbols present.

Line drawing of a car seat with an upward arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest Raise
Lower

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is pofo raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it To lower, push and hold the lock knob and sitioned so the lock knob is engaged in the up. push the head restraint/headrest down.

notch before riding in that designated seating position.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is poMake sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in thesitioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating patch before riding in that designated seating position. position.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SEAT BELTS

Sit upright and well back. SSS0136

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. INFINITI strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Line drawing of a person sitting in a car, showing hands on seat and dashboard (no text or symbols)

Line drawing of a person seated in a car with a cross-shaped seatbelt, no text or symbols present

Diagram of car seatbelt and passenger seatbelt crossed in a car (no text or symbols)

WARNING

- Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and in an appropriate restraint.

WARNING

- The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Diagram of a person seated in a car with cross-shaped seatbelt bands (no text or symbols)

WARNING

• Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but no falling off your shoulder.

• Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.

• Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.

• Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.
• Do not allow more than one person to the same seat belt.
• Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts.
• If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

• Once a seat belt pretensioner(s) have activated, they cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
  All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.

All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer's inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.

Silhouette of a person wearing a seatbelt with a diagonal band crossing through the seat (no text or symbols)

LRS0786

SEAT BELT WARNINGLIGHT

Both the driver's and passenger's front seats are equipped with a seat belt warning light. The warning light, located on the instrument panel, will show the status of the driver and passenger seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning light will not light up if the seat is not occupied.

For additional information, refer to "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

INFINITI recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

INFINITI recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

- Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and i an appropriate restraint.

- Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

- Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child's neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is es.parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release inthe child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.

1-14 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2985

LR$2674

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, refer to "Seats" in this section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle Ⓐ until you hear and feel the latch engage.

The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slot pulling motion permits the seat belt to move and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

A B C LRS2675

1. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hip® as shown.
2. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seat positions three-point seat belts have two modes of operation:

• Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
• Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, refer to "Child restraints" in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to "Front passenger air bag and status light" in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

① WRS0139

To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows.

- Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service, or to learn more about seat belt operation.

S, A or t

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the buckle ①. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods:

• When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor.
• When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

Ⓐ Shoulder belt height adjust button

Shoulder belt height adjustment (front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. For additional information, refer to "Precautions on seat belt usage" in this section.

To adjust, push the button and then move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired position so that the belt passes over the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off of your

shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.

WARNING

• After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make it is securely fixed in position.
• The shoulder belt anchorheightshouldbe adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to dosomayreducetheeffectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.
• The shoulder belt should rest on the middle of the shoulder. It must not rest against the neck.
• Be sure that the seat belt is not twiste any way.
• Be sure that the shoulder belt anchor is secured by trying to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down after adjustment.

sure LRS3035

Seat belt hook

When the seat belt is not in use and when folding down the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts on the seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available for purchase. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for all seating positions.

Seat belt extenders are available for the:

• Driver and front passenger seating positions
• Rear seating positions

It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.

WARNING

• Only INFINITI seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with INFINITI seat belts.
• Adults and children who can us the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.
• Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

CHILD SAFETY

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow to seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt gu of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child's neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a
suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restrain systems:

- Rear-facing child restraint

- Forward-facing child restraint

Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child's size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle's seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

AP U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. For additional information, refer to "Child restraints" in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle SMALL CHILDREN

by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHildren) system or with t vehicle seat belt. For additional information, refer to "Child restraints" in this section.

INFINITI recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. Additional information, refer to "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)" in this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. INFINITI recommends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at the least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a rear face. The top, middle portion of the shoulder. The facing child restraint as long as possible up to shoulder belt should not cross the neck or the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint are at least 1 year old should be secured. In a forward-facing child restraint with a hairless. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. INFINITI recommends that small children be placed in children on both seats with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor A booster seat should be used until the child Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose can pass the seat belt fit test below:

a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forward-facing child restraint, INFINITI recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For

- Are the child's back and hips against the vehicle seatback?

· Is the child able to sit without slouching?

Do the child's knees bend easily over the front edge of the seat with feet flat on the floor?

- Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap belt low and snug across the hips and shoulder belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

• Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest?
• Will the child be able to stay in position for the entire ride?

Line drawing of a person wearing a seatbelt and visor, seated inside an airplane cabin (no text or symbols)

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before traveling.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision.

If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt.

CHILD RESTRAINTS

Line drawing of a person seated in a car with two crossed arms, no text or symbols present

Diagram of a car showing a person seated on the steering wheel with a clear diagonal line indicating the seat (no text or symbols present)

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS

WARNING

- Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

- The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.

• Infants and children should never be held on anyone's lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision.
• Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger.
• INFINITI recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the front seat, refer to "Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts" in this section.
• Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.
• Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle.

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, andachildcouldbeseriouslyinjuredor killed in a collision.
• Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts, or other items.
• A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the first passenger seat.
• Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint.
• Infants and children should always placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.

- When the child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For additional information, refer to "LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system" in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:

• Choose only a restraint with a label tifying that it complies with Federal tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
• Check the child restraint in your vehicle be sure it is compatible with the vehicle seat and seat belt system.

If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child's height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures.
If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 k) you may use either the LATCH anchors or the seat belt to install the child restraint (not both at the same time).
If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint.
- Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward-facing child re-

straints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.

LRS 274 LRS2990

LATCH system lower anchor locations - bench seat

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint unless the combined weight of the child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt

(not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.

The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the following positions only:

- Rear bench seat - outboard seating positions

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:

• Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration.

• Do not secure a child restraint in the rear center position using the LATCH system anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.

• Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed.

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

1-24 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with two arrows indicating movement or force direction (no text or symbols)

LATCH lower anchor location

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located as shown. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors.

ISO FIX LRS3045

LATCH label locations rear bench

LRS0661

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a labe stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

Line drawing of a car seat with an inset showing a close-up of the seat (no text or symbols)

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint.

Top tether anchor

WARNING

- Do not allow cargo to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo so it does not contact the top tether strap. Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage it during a collision. A child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.

- Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstandonly those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to at tach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

1 2 1 2 1 2 LRS3040

Rear bench seat

① Top tether strap
② Anchor point

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located in the following locations:

- Rear bench on the bottom of the seat-back in the seating positions shown.

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand onlythose loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorages, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety" and "Child restraints" sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seats using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

Diagram of car wheel and seat assembly showing a close-up of the wheel (no text or symbols present)

Rear-facing webbing-mounted - step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt switch with an inset showing the insertion of the component (no text or symbols present)

Rear-facing rigid-mounted - step 2

Car seatbelt diagram showing hand positioning and two black arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

Rear-facing - step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with hands adjusting the seat (no text or symbols)

Rear-facing - step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat

1-28 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

belt (if applicable). Not all child restraintDo not use the lower anchors if the combined fit in all types of vehicles. weight of the child and the child restraint

1. Check to make sure the child restraint properly secured prior to each use. If child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety" and "Child restraints" sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats:

ed e WRSO256

Rear-facing - step 1

1. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt buckle assembly with a black arrow indicating the buckle (no text or symbols present)

Rear-facing - step 2

Diagram of a car gear shift lever mechanism (no text or symbols present)

Rear-facing - step 3

Diagram of car seatbelt mechanism showing force application and movement arrows (no text or symbols)

Rear-facing - step 4

1. Route the seat belt tongue through the 3 child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.

Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Diagram of a car seatbelt mechanism with arrows indicating force or movement (no text or symbols present)

Rear-facing - step 5

Line drawing of a car seatbelt assembly with hands adjusting the seat (no text or symbols)

Rear-facing - step 6

1. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety" and "Child restraints" sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.

1. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

2. After attaching the child restraint, test if Do not use the lower anchors if the combine before you place the child in it. Push it weight of the child and the child restraint from side to side while holding the child exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined restraint near the seat belt path. The weight of the child and the child restraint is child restraint should not move more greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehi-than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to sidecle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to in-Try to tug it forward and check to see still the child restraint. Be sure to follow the the belt holds the restraint in place. If child restraint manufacturer's instructions for restraint is not secure, tighten the seat installation. belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint in the rear seats using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

Line drawing of a car seat assembly with an inset showing a close-up of the seat (no text or symbols)

Forward-facing webbing-mounted - step 2

1. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. For additional information, refer to "Installing top tether strap" in this section.

Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating

LRS2994

Forward-facing rigid-mounted - step 2

positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

1. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section.

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt buckle with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

Forward-facing - step 4

1. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.
2. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt being adjusted for a person's seatbelt (no text or symbols)

Forward-facing - step 6

1. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. No all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

2. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3 through 6.

s ne 1 2 1 2 LRS3041

Rear bench seat

① Top tether strap
② Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors (rear bench outboard seating positions only).

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap ① as shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point② as shown.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to "Front passenger-ger air bag and status light" in this section

Line drawing of a car interior showing seat, dashboard, and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) - on. step 1

For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety" and "Child restraints" sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in tl front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraintsforinfantsmustbeusedinthe rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section.

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

Car seatbelt buckle being adjusted for a person's seatbelt (no text or symbols visible)

Forward-facing - step 3

1. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). For additional information, refer to "Installing top tether strap" in this section.

Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt buckle with a belt buckle, no text or symbols present

Forward-facing - step 4

1. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

1-36 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with two arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols)

Forward-facing - step 5

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with two black arrows indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

Forward-facing - step 6

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with hands adjusting the seat (no text or symbols)

Forward-facing - step 8

1. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up or the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

or6. Remove any additional slack from the in seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

1. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.

2. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. No all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

3. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8.

s he 2 OFF LRS0865

1 2 1 2 1 2 LRS3040

Forward-facing - step 10
Rear bench seat

1. If the child restraint is installed in the ① Top tether strap front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front pass Anchor point senger air bag status light should Installing top tether strap illuminate. If this light is not illuminated refer to "Front passenger air bag and The child restraint top tether strap must be status light" in this section. Move the used when installing the child restraint with child restraint to another seating position-seat belts. tion. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI First, secure the child restraint with the seat retailer for this service. belt. After the child restraint is removed and the Rear bench seat seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled. OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and store it in a secure place. Be sure to "reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap ① as shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether chor point② as shown.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest a store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap ① as shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point② as shown.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.

If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.

A WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:

• Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child's face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach.
• Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child's arm.
• A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt.

Line drawing of two car seat compartments labeled A and B, showing different seat designs (no text or symbols beyond labels)

A. Low back booster seat

B. High back booster seat

LRS0453 LRS0464

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

- Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

- Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.

Line drawing of a person seated in a car seat using a seatbelt (no text or symbols)

Make sure the child's head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the child's ears. For example, if a low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child's ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child's ears, a high back booster seat should be used.

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

- If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats on the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety," "Child restraints" and "Booster seats" sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

ter e e- WR50699

1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rear-3 most position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.

Line drawing of a person seated in a car seat with a belt, no text or symbols present

Front passenger position

The booster seat should be positioned on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the booster seat is removed. For additional information, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.

1. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child's hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
2. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child's shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
3. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in "Three-point type seat belt with retractor" in this section.

2 OFF

LRS0865

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS

This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:

• Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System)
• Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
• Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag
• Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bag

If the booster seat is installed in the front Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front and passenger seat, place the ignition switch rear outboard seats)

in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light may or may not illuminate, depending on the size of the The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and used. For additional information, refer to chest of the driver and front passenger in "Front passenger air bag and status certain frontal collisions."

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and fron passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.

1-42 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-over supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and rear outboard seating positions in certain side-impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement the crad protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, refer to "Seat belts" in this section.

Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bags

This system can help cushion the impact force to the driver's and front passenger's knees in certain collisions.

The SRS is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, refer to "Seat belts" in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Sit upright and well back.

Line drawing of a person seated in a car wearing a seatbelt, with no text or symbols present.

WARNING

• The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reducetherisk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.
• The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit. For additional information, refer to "Front passenger air bag and status light" in this section.

The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front a bags inflate with great force. Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward,
sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seat-back and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Always properly use the seat belts.

• The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

- The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wear-

ing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. For additional information, refer to "Front passenger air bag and status light" in this section.

Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates.

Sit upright and well back.

Diagram of a car interior showing a person seated inside a seatbelt, with no visible text or symbols.

Line drawing of a person sitting on a vehicle with a diagonal line crossing through the window (no text or symbols)

ARS1133 | AR\$1041

WARNING

- Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

Diagram of a car seatbelt system with diagonal braces (no text or symbols)

Diagram of a car interior showing steering wheel and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

Technical line drawing of a car seatbelt assembly (no text or symbols)

Line drawing of a person seated in a car with crossed safety stripes (no text or symbols)

Line drawing of a car interior showing a person seated with a black seatbelt, no text or symbols present

Diagram showing a person inside a car with a large 'X' symbol crossed out by two diagonal lines (no text or labels)

WARNING

WARNING

- Children may be severely injured or killed Front seat-mounted side-impact supple- when the front air bags, side air bags omental air bags and roof-mounted curtain curtain air bags inflate if they are not side-impact and rollover supplemental air properly restrained. Pre-teens and chil- bags:

dren should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible. - Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflat-seat belts to help reduce the risk or severe front air bag could seriously injure or ity of injury in various kinds of accidents. kill yourchild. For additional information, refer to "Child restraints" in this section.

Diagram showing a person crossed out of a vehicle window with no visible text or symbols

Illustration of a person sitting in a car seat with a cross-shaped bandpass, no text or symbols present

WARNING

- The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.

1-48 Safety–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS3043

Diagram showing a person seated under a vehicle with a cross-shaped barrier, no text or symbols present

WARNING

• When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.
• Do not use seat covers on the front seat-backs. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 LRS3044

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System (front seats)

1. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
3. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)
4. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag modules
5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags
6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag inflators
7. Satellite sensors
8. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front and rear outboard seats)
9. Pressure sensors in door (driver's side shown; front passenger side similar)
10. Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bag
11. Crash zone sensor

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passenger's INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following items.

• Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket.
• Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket.
• Make sure that there is nothing pressing againsttherearoftheseatback,suchasa child restraint installed in the rear seat or an object stored on the floor.
• Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.

• Make sure that there is no object placed between the seat cushion and the center console or between the seat cushion and the door.

• If a forward-facing child restraint is installed in the frontpassenger seat, do not position the front passenger seat so the child restraint contacts the instrument panel. If the child restraint does contact at the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat is occupied and the passenger air bag may deploy in a collision. Also the front passenger air bag status light may not illuminate. For additional information, refer to "Child restraints" in this section.

• Confirm the operating condition with the front passenger air bag status light.
• If you notice that the front passenger at bag status light is not operating as de-b scribed in this section, get the occupant classification system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
• Until you have confirmed with a retailer that your passenger seat occupant classification system is working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating positions.

- Do not position the front passenger seat to so it contacts the rear seat. If the front seat does contact the rear seat, the air bag system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag status light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may flash.

This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.

The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System Monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensor and occupant classification sensor (weight sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classification sensor When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the released smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and drinking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

is also monitored. Based on information from Front air bags, along with the use of seat the sensor, only one front air bag may infolts, help to cushion the impact force on the in a crash, depending on the crash severity face and chest of the front occupants. They and whether the front occupants are belted can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger however, an inflating front air bag may cause air bag may be automatically turned off un-facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air der some conditions, depending on the bags, other than the driver and passenger weight detected on the passenger seat and knee air bags, do not provide restraint to the how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag status light will be illuminated. For addEven with INFINITI Advanced Air Bags, seat tional information, refer to "Front passenger belts should be correctly worn and the driver air bag and status light" in this section. On and passenger seated upright as far as prac-front air bag inflating does not indicate im-tical away from the steering wheel or instru-proper performance of the system. ment panel. The front air bags inflate quickly

If you have any questions about your air bag system, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer to obtain information about the system. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact INFINITI. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner's Manual. In order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation. The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 OFF

LRS0865

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and o restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sen-

(1) that turns the front passenger air bag or off depending on the weight applied to the front passenger seat. The status of the front passenger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air bag status light which is located on the instrument panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the "ON" position, the front passenger air bag status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or remains illuminated depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows:

CONDITION DESCRIPTION		PASSENGER AIR BAG INDICATOR LIGHT ( )	FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS
Empty Empty	Front passenger seat ON (illuminated)	INHIBITED
Nobody/Somebody	Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Small Adult in front passenger seat	ON (illuminated) INHIBITED
Adult Adult in	the front passenger seat OFF (dark)		ACTIVATED

In addition to the above, certain objects For additional information, refer to "Normal operated under some conditions as described placed on the front passenger seat may also operation" and "Troubleshooting" in this sec-below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If cause the light to operate as described abotion. the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will no

depending on their weight.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to system automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The purpose of the regulation is to help re-wearing the seat belt properly for the mostways be sure that you and all vehicle occu- duce the risk of injury or death from an ineffective protection by the seat belt and pants are seated and restrained properly. ing air bag to certain front passenger seat supplemental air bag. Using the front passenger air bag status liab

occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements. INFINITI recommends that pre-teens and you can monitor when the front passenger air children be properly restrained in a rear seabag is automatically turned OFF. INFINITI also recommends that appropriate if an adult occupant is in the seat but the child restraints and booster seats be properly

The occupant classification sensor in this veinstalled in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to the occupant classification sensor is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat to operate as described above to turn the by weight. For example, if a child is in the front passenger air bag OFF for specified front passenger seat, the INFINITI Advanced child restraints as required by the regulations.

Air Bag System is designed to turn the front restraints and passenger air bag OFF in accordance with to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint. If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the front passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used.

are properly seated and using the seat belt for the front passenger seat is not occupied, properly. Make sure that the child restraint is outlined in this manual should not cause the front passenger air bag is designed not installed properly, the seat belt is used profront passenger air bag to be automatically inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects early and the occupant is positioned properly. turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned on the seat could result in air bag. If the air bag status light is still not illumioFF, however, if the occupant takes his/heinflation, because of the object's weight de-nated, reposition the occupant or child re-weight off the seat cushion (for example, beected by the occupant classification sensor. restraint in a rear seat.

not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of Other conditions could also result in air bag if the front passenger air bag status light will the seat, or by otherwise being out of posiinflation, such as if a child is standing on that illuminate even though you believe that tion), this could cause the sensor to turn theat, or if two children are on the seat, come child restraint, the seat belts and the oc-air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated today to the instructions in this manual. Al- cupant are properly positioned, it is recom-

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

mended that you take your vehicle to an INFINITI retailer. An INFINITI retailer can check system status by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with a retailer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System and , front passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the front passenger seat status. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supplemental air bag warning light 🎨, located in the meter and gauges area of the instrument panel, will be illuminated (blinking or steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions

- Make sure that there are no objects weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.

Make sure that a child restraint or other 4. object is not pressing against the rear of the seatback. Make sure that a rear passenger is not pushing or pulling on the back of the fro5t passenger seat.

Make sure that the front passenger seat NO or seatback is not forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it. This make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.

eps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the "Seat section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the "Seat belts" section of this manual. From passenger seat belt buckle status is monitored by the occupant classification system, and is used as an input to determine occupancy status. So, it is highly recommended that the front passenger belt fasten their seat belt.

Remain in this position for 30 seconds allowing the system to classify the front passenger before the vehicle is put into motion.

Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status light.

NOTE:

This vehicle's occupant classification sensor system generally keeps the classification locked during driving, so it is important that you confirm that the front passenger is properly classified prior to driving. However, the occupant classification sensor may re-calculate the weight of the occupant under some conditions (both while driving and when stopped), so front passenger seat occupants should continue to remain seated as outlined above.

Troubleshooting

If you think the front passenger air bag status is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with an adult occupy in the front passenger seat:
2. Occupant is a small adult – the air bag light is functioning as intended. The front passenger air bag is suppressed.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

However, if the occupant is not a small adNOTE:

then this may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weig sensors:

Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
- A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
- A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
- Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
- An object placed under the front passenger seat.
- An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a st when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds tially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person should be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

1. If the light is OFF with a small adult, or child restraint occupying the front passenger seat.

This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:

- Small adult or child is not sitting upright leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.

topThe child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined in the "Child restraints" section of this manual.

- An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the s back pocket.

• A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
• A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
• Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
• An object placed under the front passenger seat.
• An object placed between the seat cushion and center console.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a sto when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult, child or child restraint should be repositioned in the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1. If the light is OFF with no front passenger and no objects on the front passenger seat the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions

WARNING

• Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate.
• Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
• No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.

Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.

• Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.
• Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of the bag system and result in serious personal injury.

- Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under thefront passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight sensor).

No unauthorized changesshould be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

• It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for work on and around the front air bag. It is also recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system.
• A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.

Line drawing of a car seat rack with seats and seatbelt (no text or symbols)

\*The SRS wiring harness connectors are low and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air box system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems

similar to those of a higher severity impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe off-roading) may cause the curtain air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always a indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

The side air bags are located in the outside of fresh air promptly. the seatback of the front seats. The curtainSide air bags, along with the use of seat belt: air bags are located in the side roof rails in help to cushion the impact force on the chest both rows. All of the information, cautions of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help and warnings in this manual apply and must cushion the impact force to the head of be followed. The side air bags and curtain occupants in the front and rear outboard bags are designed to inflate in higher severating positions in all rows. They can help side collisions, although they may inflate if save lives and reduce serious injuries. How-the forces in another type of collision are ever, an inflating side air bag or curtain air

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain, air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bags and curtain air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.

The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a short time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

- Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the bag front seat. Such objects may become a dangerous projectiles and cause injury if and a side air bag inflates.

Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

No unauthorized changesshouldbemade to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the curtain air bag systems.

- Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag. - It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for work on and around the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is also recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag systems.

*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bags and curtain air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

SRS AIRSAG LRS3037

Driver's side

SRS AIRBAG LRS3038

Passenger's side

Driver and passenger supplemental knee air bag

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always indication of proper knee air bag operation.

abrasions or other injuries. The knee air bag provides restraint to the lower body.

The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the knee air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, this air bag module during inflation. The knee air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over OR the knee air bag will remain inflated for a short time.

The knee air bag operates only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

The knee air bag is located in the knee bolster, on the driver's and passenger's side. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed. The knee air bag is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision. When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

are similar to those of a higher severity from the knee air bag helps to cushion the impact tal impact. It may not inflate in certain colliforce on the knees of the driver and passen- sions. Ger. It can help reduce serious injuries. How-

ger. It can help reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating knee air bag may cause

WARNING

Do not place any objects between the knee bolster and the driver's or passenger's seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a knee air bag inflates.

Right after inflation, the knee air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

1-60 Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

• No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the knee air bag system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the knee air bag system.
• Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system or suspension system. This could affect proper operation of the knee air bag system.
• Tampering with the knee air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the driver knee bolster or install additional trim material around the knee air bag.
  It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for work on and around the knee air bag. It is also recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the knee air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the knee air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this manual.

Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front and rear outboard seats)

WARNING

• The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.
• If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but pretensioner(s) are not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
• No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury.

It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for work on and around the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for installation of electrical equipment. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system.

- If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the seat belt extractor, the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor fixed to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as

may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.

After the pretensioner(s') activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light is used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner system. For additional information, refer to "Supplemental air bag warning light" in this section. If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

1. SRS air bag warning labels (located on the sun visors)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag systems are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restraint of seat protected by an air bag in front of the air bag deploys, it may cause serious injury or death.

Abstract black-and-white icon of two stylized human figures in motion, no text or symbols present.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying 🎨 in the instrument panel, monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns OFF. This means the system is opera-

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If any of the following conditions occur, the Repair and replacement procedure front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag and pretensioner systems need The front air bags, side air bags, curtain bags, knee air bags and pretensioner(s) and servicing:

• The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
• The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
• The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly and related parts should be pointed out to. They must be checked and repaired. It is reg- person performing the maintenance. The ig- ommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer position switch should always be in the LOCK for this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, knee air bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. These systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, current air bags, knee air bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

Once a front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bagorkneeairbaghasinflated,the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioner(s) must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

- If you need to dispose of a supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

- If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) should be checked to verify it is still functioning correctly. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. The OCS should be checked even if no air bags deploy as a result of the impact. Failure to verify proper OCS function may result in an improper air bag deployment resulting in injury or death.

1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel 2-4

Meters and gauges....2-6

Speedometer and odometer 2-6

Tachometer....2-8

Engine coolant temperature gauge....2-8

Fuel gauge....2-9

Variable Compression Turbo....2-9

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders 2-11

Checking lights....2-12

Warning lights 2-12

Indicator lights 2-17

Audible reminders 2-20

Vehicle information display 2-21

How to use the vehicle information

display.... 2-22

Startup display 2-22

Resetting the trip computer.... 2-22

Oil control system 2-22

Vehicle information display warnings and

indicators 2-26

Security systems 2-33

Vehicle security system 2-33

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System..... 2-35

Wiper and washer switch.... 2-36

Switch operation 2-36

Rain-sensing auto wiper system

(if so equipped)....2-38

Rear switch operation 2-39

Rear window defroster, outside mirror

defroster, and wiper deicer (if so equipped)

switch 2-40

Headlight switch 2-41

Headlight control switch.... 2-41

LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

system.... 2-45

Instrument brightness control....2-46

Turn signal switch 2-46

Fog light switch (if so equipped) 2-47

Horn.... 2-47

Climate controlled seat switches

(if so equipped)....2-48

Heated seat switches (if so equipped) .....2-49

Dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT™ Assist) (if so equipped) .....2-50

Steering assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT™ Assist) (if so equipped) 2-51

Front and rear sonar system switch (if so equipped).... 2-51

Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped) 2-52 HowtousetheHUD 2-53

Driver Assistance/Navigation linking 2-53

E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped) 2-54

Power outlets....2-54 12v outlets....2-54

Extended storage switch 2-55

Storage.... 2-56

Front-door pockets 2-56

Seatback pockets 2-57

Storage trays 2-57

Glove box 2-58

Console box 2-58

Overhead sunglasses storage 2-59

Cup holders.... 2-59

Cargo area storage bin 2-61

Luggage hooks 2-61

Coat hooks 2-62

Roof rack (if so equipped).... 2-62

Windows 2-67

Power windows.... 2-67

Moonroof (if so equipped) 2-69

Power moonroof.... 2-69

Interior lights.... 2-72

Map lights 2-73

Personal Lights 2-73

Cargo light 2-73

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (Type A) (if so equipped).... 2-74

Programming HomeLink® 2-74

Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers 2-76

Operating the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver 2-76

Programming trouble-diagnosis.... 2-76

Clearing the programmed information.....2-77

Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button 2-77

If your vehicle is stolen 2-77

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (Type B) (if so equipped).... 2-78

Programming HomeLink® 2-79

Programming HomeLink® for Canadian

customers and gate openers 2-80

Operating the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver 2-81

Programming trouble-diagnosis.... 2-81

Clearing the programmed information.....2-82

Reprogramming a single HomeLink®

button 2-82

If your vehicle is stolen 2-82

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 LIC3793

2-4 Instruments and controls

1. Vent (P. 4-34)

2. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System* Steering wheel switch for audio control* Center display multi-function control buttons* Control panel and vehicle information display switches (P. 2-22)

3. High beam/turn signal switch (P. 2-46) Paddle shifters (P. 5-19)

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) Horn (P. 2-47)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-6) Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-11) Vehicle information display (P. 2-21)

6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-36) Rear wiper and washer switch (P. 2-36)

7. Automatic heater and air conditioning controls (P. 4-35) Driver side climate controlled seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-48) Driver side heated seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-49)

8. Upper and lower displays* Navigation system* (if so equipped)

9. Automatic heater and air conditioning controls (P. 4-35) Passenger side climate controlled seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-48) Passenger side heated seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-49) Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch (P. 2-40)
10. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-42)
11. Glove box (P. 2-56)
12. Audio system controls* Front passenger air bag status light (P. 1-42)
13. INFINITI controller*
14. Power outlet (P. 2-54) USB charging port (P. 4-43) Cup holders (P. 2-56) Storage (P. 2-56)
15. Shift lever (P. 5-19)

16. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-13) Electronic parking brake switch (P. 5-24)

17. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

18. ProPilot ^TM Assist Switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-107) Cruise control switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-81) Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-83) Control panel and vehicle information display switches (P. 2-22)
19. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel control (P. 3-34)
20. Hood release (P. 3-24)
21. Trip reset switch (P. 2-6) Instrument brightness control (P. 2-41) Front and rear sonar system (if so equipped) (P. 5-186) Steering assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT™ Assist) (if so equipped) (P. 2-51) Dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT™ Assist) (if so equipped) (P. 2-50) Liftgate release switch (P. 3-24) Headlight switch (P. 2-41) Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-47)

Head Up Display (HUD) OFF switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-52) Distance control switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-138)

*: Refer to the separate Infiniti InTouch ^TM Owner's Manual.

Refer to the page number indicated in parer theses for operating details.

METERS AND GAUGES

1 2 3 2 4 c N 0 1/2 1 5 LIC3846

1. Tachometer

2. Warning and indicator lights

3. Vehicle information display Odometer

Twin trip odometer

Transmission position indicator

1. Speedometer
2. Fuel gauge
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge

2-6 Instruments and controls

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is located on the right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is located within the vehicle information display.

0 1/2 1 LIC3847

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

1 0.0 miles 2 TRIP RESET LIC3848

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer and the twin trip odometer are displayed in the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

Changing the display

Push the TRIP RESET swita② on the left side of the steering column to change the display as follows:

Trip →Trip Odometer Mileage →Trip

Resetting the trip odometer

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch for more than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero.

RPMx1000 ① LIC3849

TACHOMETER

C H ① LIC3850

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into the red zone.

CAUTION When engine speed approaches the red zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stopthevehicleassoonassafelypossible.If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, refer to "If your vehicle overheats" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual for immediate action required.

0 1/2 1 1 LIC3851

The ◀ indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the driver's side of the vehicle

CAUTION

- If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

- For additional information, refer to "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" in this section.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to O (Empty) after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The low fuel warning light comes on when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers O (Empty).

VARIABLE COMPRESSION TURBO

Your engine is equipped with a variable compression ratio system called "Variable Compression Turbo". This system can vary the engine compression ratio continuously.

According to driving conditions, the system applies optimum compression ratio automatically to achieve both high output and high fuel economy efficiency.

① Compression ratio status display Displays the status of compression ratio controlled by Variable Compression Turbo. The lowest compression ratio (8:1) and the highest (14:1) are displayed as "Power" and "Eco" respectively.
② Turbo charger boost pressure gauge Displays the turbo charger boost pressure.

NOTE:

Under some conditions, the compression ratio may not change. This is not a malfunction of the system.

CAUTION

If the Variable Compression Turbo becomes faulty, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. For additional information, refer to "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.

2-10 Instruments and controls

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

ABS or Ampock Braking System (ABS) warning light BRAKE or Brake warning light Charge warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Security indicator light Electric shift control system warning light (if so equipped) Electronic parking brake system warning light (yellow) (if so equipped) PARK or Electronic parking brake warning light (if so equipped) Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light Low tire pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light Master warning light High beam assist in car light (green) Oil pressure warning light High beam indicator light (blue) Power steering warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Supplemental air bag warning light Side light and headlight indicator light (green) Automatic brake hold indicator light (if so equipped) Eco drive indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so equipped) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights (if equipped) will come on:

☐ , Ⓞ!, PARK or ☑ (P)

The following lights (if so equipped) come briefly and then go off:

ABS or (ABS), BRAKE or (!)

If any light fails to come on or operate in way other than described, it may indicate burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer this service.

Some indicators and warnings are also displayed in the vehicle information display between the speedometer and tachometer. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in this section.

WARNING LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in this section.

so ABS or (ABS)-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the anti-lock braking system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

for "an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. For additional information, refer to "Brake system" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

BRAKE or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running, with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to "Brake fluid" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

WARNING

- Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous. - Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

2-12 Instruments and controls

- If the brake fluid level is below the M MUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning indicator

When the parking brake is released and brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the warning light and the ABS warning light minute, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake system checked, and if necessary, repaired. It is commended that you visit an INFINITI ret for this service. Avoid high-speed driving abrupt braking. For additional information refer to "Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light" in this section.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off the and check the generator belt. If the belt is light loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer foot this service.

NA CAUTION Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.

Electric shift control system warning light (if so equipped)

This light illuminates when a malfunction occurs in the electric shift control system. Wh

the master warning light illuminates, the akeme sounds and the following message is displayed in the vehicle information display: "When parked apply parking brake".

When the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the chime sounds continuously. Ensure the parking brake is applied

Have the system checked. It is recommend that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Electronic parking brake system warning light (yellow) (if so equipped)

The electronic parking brake system warning light functions for the electronic parking brake system. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light illuminates for a few seconds. If the warning light illuminates at any other time, it may indicate

the electronic parking brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

For additional information, refer to "Electronic parking brake" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

tonic parking brake warning light (if so equipped)

This light indicates that the electronic parking brake system is operating.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the electronic parking brake warning light illuminates. When the engine is started and the parking brake is released, the warning light turns off.

If the electronic parking brake warning light illuminates or flashes while the electronic parking brake warning light ⚠️ (yellow) illuminates, it may indicate that the electronic parking brake system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

For additional information, refer to "Electronic parking brake" in the "Starting and ing" section of this manual.

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection system warning light

This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off of the engine is started.

This light illuminates when the FEB with P destrian Detection system is set to OFF in lower display.

If the light illuminates when the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, refer to "Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection" and "Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.

2-14 Instruments and controls

The low tire pressure warning light warns of the "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS appears each time the ignition switch is not functioning properly. placed in the ON position as long as the low

After the ignition switch is placed in the position, this light illuminates for about 1 ond and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. "Fire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning also appears in the vehicle information display.

When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information labelled in the driver's door opening. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommendation pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in the "Instruments and controls" section and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the "Starting and driving" section and in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. The "Tire Pressure Low – Add Air" warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light dominates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the "Starting and driving" section and "Tire pressure" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

WARNING

• Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
• If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
• If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury or death. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure show on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver's

dooropeningtoturnthe low tirepressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a replacement tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

- When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for these services.

- Replacing tires with those not originally specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

The TPMS is not a substitute for the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly. - If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly.

- Be sure to install the specified size of tir to the four wheels correctly.

Master warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the master warning light illuminates if any of the following (if so equipped) are displayed on the vehicle information display:

No key warning

• I-Key system warning
• Low fuel warning
• Low washer fluid warning
• Parking brake warning
• Door/ liftgate open warning
• Loose fuel cap warning
• Low tire pressure warning
• Flat tire warning

Instruments and controls

• Transmission system warning
• Headlight warning
• Driver Attention Support system warning
• Shift position warning
• Low battery warning
• Shipping mode warning
• Low oil pressure warning
• All Wheel Drive (AWD) system warning
• Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) warning
• Handle Release warning
• Driving Aids malfunction warning
• Chassis Control system warning

For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in this section.

Engine oil pressure warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. I the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call an INFINITE retailer or other authorized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light is notModels with Direct Adaptive Steering®: designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, refer to "Engine oil" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual. When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the power steering warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the power steering warning light stays on for a few

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

Power steering warning light

WARNING

• If the engine is not running or isturned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.
• When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of a vehicle, but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

If the power steering warning light illuminates while driving, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle. If the power steering warning light turns off, you can drive again. If the power steering warning light continues to illuminate, it is recommended that you have Direct Adaptive Steering checked by an INFINITI retailer. For additional information, refer to "Power Steering" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Models with electric power steering:

When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the power steering warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the power steering warning light turns off. This indicates the electric power steering is operational.

2-16 Instruments and controls

If the power steering warning light illumi- occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI nates while the engine is running, it may ind switch is placed in the ON position, the sys retailer for these services.

cate the electric power steering is not func-tem does not activate the warning light for tioning properly and may need servicing. It is the front passenger.

recommended that you have the electric

power steering checked by an INFINITI retailer.

When the power steering warning light illu- minates with the engine running, the power____

assist to the steering will cease operation by you will still have control of the vehicle. At time, greater steering efforts are required to

operate the steering wheel, especially in. When the ignition switch is placed in the C sharp turns and at low speeds. For additional START position, the supplemental air bag information, refer to "Power Steering" in the warning light illuminates for about 7 second "Starting and driving" section of this manual and then turns off. This means the system

Seat belt warning light and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or STAR position and remains illuminated until the driver's seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver's seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger's seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger's seat is

For additional information, refer to "Seat belts" in the "Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section of the

Supplemental air bag warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the C no# START position, the supplemental air bag ewarning light illuminates for about 7 second land then turns off. This means the system operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,

your pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing:

The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.

The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioners may not function properly. For additional information, refer to "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)" in the "Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section of this manual.

A WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, is a pair bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in this section.

Automatic brake hold indicator light (if so equipped)

This light illuminates to show the status of the automatic brake hold system.

Instruments and controls

When the automatic brake hold system is standby, the indicator will illuminate white. When the automatic brake hold system is operating, the indicator will illuminate green. For additional information, refer to "Automatic brake hold" in the "Starting and driving section of this manual.

ECO drive indicator light

When the ECO mode has been selected, the ECO drive indicator light will illuminate, blind or remain off depending on the accelerator pedal operation. This is to help the driver of economically. For additional information, refer to "ECO mode" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are on. For additional information, refer to "Fog light switch in this section.

Front passenger air bag status light

The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will off depending on how the front passenger seat is being used.

For additional information, refer to "Front passenger air bag and status light" in the "Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplement

"estraint system" section of this manual.

High Beam Assist indicator light (green) (if so equipped)

This indicator light illuminates when the headlights come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position with the h beams selected. This indicates that the high beam assist is operational.

For additional information, refer to "Head-slight switch" in this section.

High beam indicator light (blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.

The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists.

gh this indicator light comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/maintenance test. For additional information, refer to "Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways?

The MIL may stop blinking and come on nature lights). If the headlight switch is in the steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-AUTO position, the side light and headlight recommended that you visit an INFINITI retaleindicator light will illuminate when the head-

yfor this service. You do not need to have vehicle towed to the retailer.

lights turn on. For additional information, refer to "Headlight switch" in this section.

- MIL on steady – An emission control system malfunction has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the vehicle information display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, he is the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for the service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the retailer.

CAUTION Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.

Slip indicator light

Security indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC system is operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

This light blinks when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position.

You may feel or hear the system working; th is normal.

The light will blink for a few seconds after t VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

- MIL blinking – An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage:

The blinking security indicator light indicate that the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational.

The indicator light also comes on when you place the ignition switch in the ON position. The light will turn off after a period of time if the system is operational. If the light does not come on have the system checked, is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

- do not drive at speeds above 45 m (72 km/h).

For additional information, refer to "Security systems" in this section.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

- avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

≥slant DO ≤slant Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

The side light and headlight indicator light illuminates when the side light or headlights are on (not including daytime running or sig

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

For additional information, refer to "Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system" or "Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system" in the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light

The disc brake pads have audible wear war" Starting and driving" section of this manual. ings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound. Fight reminder chime

This indicator light comes on when the VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indicates the VDC has been turned off.

when the vehicle is in motion, whether or with the ignition switch placed in the OFF the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brake position, a chime sounds when the driver's checked as soon as possible if the warning door is opened if the headlights or parking sound is heard. lights are on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine and the system will be reactivat For additional information, refer to "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Key reminder chime

Turn the headlight control switch off before leaving the vehicle.

The VDC light also comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will turn off after a period of time if system is operational. If the light stays on comes on along with the indicator light while you are driving, have the VDC system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

A chime sounds if the driver's door is open while the ignition switch is placed in the C position or placed in the OFF or LOCK position with the key left in the vehicle. Make the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK or position, and take the key with you when leaving the vehicle.

Intelligent Key door buzzer

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any SWE of the following improper operations is found.

WARNING VDC should remain on unless freeing a hicle from mud or snow.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) warning chime (if so equipped)

• The ignition switch is not returned to the LOCK position when locking the doors.
• The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when locking the doors.
• The Intelligent Key is taken outside the vehicle when operating the vehicle.
• Any doors are not closed securely when locking the doors.

While the VDC system is operating, you might feel a slight vibration or hear the tem working when starting the vehicle o celerating, but this is normal.

When the LDW or LDP system is on, the chime sounds if the vehicle is traveling close to either the left or the right of a traveling lane with detectable lane markers.

2-20 Instruments and controls

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key System. For additional information, refer to "INFINITI Intelligent Key" in the "Pre-driving checks and adjustments" section of this manual.

Pure mechanical component diagram without any text, numbers, or symbols

The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:

• Indicators and warnings
• Tire Pressure information
• Compass
  Audio
• Fuel Economy
• Driving Aids
  Engine Oil
  Chassis Control
  Navigation
• ProPILOT ^TM Assist (if so equipped)
  · Idle stop

- Other information

• Vehicle settings
• Trip computer information
  Drive system warnings and settings (if so equipped)
• Cruise control system information (if so equipped)
• Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) system information
  · Intelligent Key operation information

RES+ CANCEL SET- 1 LIC3944

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be gated using the ▶ and ▶ buttons located on the steering wheel.

1. ◀ and □ select/enter the vehicle information display menu items

Vehicle settings and features can be adjusted in the lower display. For additional information, refer to the separate Infiniti InTouch Owner's Manual.

STARTUP DISPLAY

When the vehicle in placed in the ON posit the screens that display in the vehicle information include:

• Active system status
• Trip computer
• Tire pressure information
• Fuel economy
• Warnings
• Audio
  Navigation
• Engine Oil

Warnings will only display if there are any present. For additional information refer to, "Vehicle information display warnings and indicators" in this section.

To control what items display in the vehicle information display, refer to the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual

RESETTING THE TRIP COMPUTER

1. Press the button until you reach the trip computer mode.

2. Press the ☐ button again for more than 1.5 seconds to reset average fuel consumption, average speed, distance to empty, and journey time.

OIL CONTROL SYSTEM

Engine oil information informs the distance to oil change. Never exceed one year or 7500 miles (12000 km) between oil change intervals.

Display when ignition is ON	Display timing	Action Re-quired
Engine Oil Service due in xxx miles	Remaining oil life is less than 940 miles (1500 km).	Plan to have your vehicle serviced.
Engine Oil Service due	Remaining oil life is 0 miles (0 km).	Have your vehicle serviced within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

The oil change interval cannot be adjusted manually.

The distance to oil change interval is calculated depending on the driving conditions and set automatically by the oil control system.

CAUTION

If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).

Operating the vehicle with deteriorated oil can damage the engine.

To reset oil control system:

1. Push ignition button to "ON" position.
2. Push the trip computer switches □ and □ located on the right side of the steering wheel to change the display.
3. Select the Engine Oil Service due in xxx miles display.
4. Push and hold the □ or □ switch for longer than 1 second. Hold until the remaining distance changes to - - - miles (km).

graph LR
    A["1 — No Key Detected"] --> B["7 — Push Ignition to OFF"]
    B --> C["13 — P"]
    C --> D["19 — AWD Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner's Manual"]
    D --> E["25 — Reminder Turn OFF Headlights"]

    F["2 — Key ID Incorrect"] --> G["8 — Shift to Park"]
    G --> H["14 — Low Washer Fluid"]
    H --> I["20 — 🎯"]
    I --> J["26 — When parked apply parking brake"]

    K["3 — Key Battery Low"] --> L["9 — 🎋️"]
    L --> M["15 — Tire Pressure Low - Add Air"]
    M --> N["21 — 🎋"]
    N --> O["27 — 🎋"]

    P["4 — Key System Error: See Owner's Manual"] --> Q["10 — Release Parking Brake"]
    Q --> R["16 — Steering Assist Not Available Cannot Detect Lane"]
    R --> S["22 — 🎋"]
    S --> T["28 — 🎋"]

    U["5 — Key Registration Complete"] --> V["11 — Low Fuel"]
    V --> W["17 — AWD AWD Error: See Owner's Manual"]
    W --> X["23 — Chassis Control System Error: See Owner's Manual"]
    X --> Y["29 — 🎋"]

    Z["6 — BRAKE"] --> AA["12 — Loose Fuel Cap"]
    AA --> AB["18 — AWD AWD High Temp. Stop Vehicle"]
    AB --> AC["24 — Power will turn off to save the battery"]
    AC --> AD["30 — Malfunction"]

2-24 Instruments and controls

graph TD
    A["31"] --> B["70 MPH"]
    B --> C["37"] --> D["Not Available High Camera Temp"]
    D --> E["43"] --> F["CVT"]
    F --> G["CVT Error: See Owner's Manual"]
    G --> H["49"] --> I["BRAKE"]
    I --> J["Press Brake Pedal"]

    K["32"] --> L["Stop vehicle and Apply parking brake"]
    L --> M["38"] --> N["Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction"]
    N --> O["44"] --> P["Headlight System Error: See Owner's Manual"]
    P --> Q["50"] --> R["Power turned off to save the battery"]

    S["33"] --> T["ECO, STANDARD, SPORT, PERSONAL"]
    T --> U["39"] --> V["Unavailable: High Accelerator Temperature"]
    V --> W["45"] --> X["Shift system malfunction: Visit dealer"]

    Y["34"] --> Z["Clock icon"]
    Z --> AA["40"] --> AB["Unavailable: Front Radar Blocked"]
    AB --> AC["46"] --> AD["Not Available Seat Belt Not Fastened"]
    AD --> AE["52"] --> AF["Check position of shift lever"]

    AG["35"] --> AH["AFS System Error: See Owner's Manual"]
    AH --> AI["41"] --> AJ["System OFF"]
    AJ --> AK["47"] --> AL["Not Available Poor Road Conditions"]
    AL --> AM["53"] --> AN["Shift to P range"]

    AO["36"] --> AP["Flat Tire Visit dealer"]
    AP --> AQ["42"] --> AR["Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse"]
    AR --> AS["48"] --> AT["Not Available Visibility is impaired"]
    AT --> AU["54"] --> AV["Currently not available"]

LIC3929

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

1. No Key Detected
2. Key ID Incorrect
3. Key Battery Low
4. Key System Error: See Owner's Manual
5. Key Registration Complete
6. Push brake and start switch to drive
7. Push Ignition to OFF
8. Shift to Park
9. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)
10. Release Parking Brake
11. Low Fuel
12. Loose Fuel Cap
13. Transmission Shift Position indicator
14. Low Washer Fluid
15. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

16. Steering Assist Not Available: Cannot Detect Lane (if so equipped)

17. AWD Error: See Owner's Manual (if so 31. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators (if so equipped))

18. AWD High Temp. Stop Vehicle (if so equipped) 32. Stop vehicle and Apply parking brake (if so equipped)
19. Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner's Manual33. INFINITI Drive Mode Selector indicators (if so equipped)
20. Cruise control indicator
21. Door Open 35. AES System Error: See
22. Steering Assist Alert (if so equipped)
23. Steering Assist status (if so equipped) 36. Flat Tire – Visit dealer
24. Chassis Control System Error: See Own37. Not Available: High Camera Temp (if so er's Manual equipped)
25. Power will turn off to save the battery38. Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction (if 25. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights so equipped)
26. When parked apply parking brake 39. Unavailable: High Accelerator Temperature (if so equipped)
27. Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW) indicator (if so equipped)
28. Unavailable: Front Radar Blocked (if so equipped)
29. Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) indicator (if 41. System OFF (if so equipped))
    so equipped) 42. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
30. Blind Spot Intervention (BSI)/ Blind Spot43. CVT Error: See Owner's Manual
    Warning (BSW)/ Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) indicator (if so equipped) 44. Headlight System Error: See Owner's Manual (if so equipped)
31. Malfunction

2-26 Instruments and controls

1. Distance Control Assist (DCA)/Blind Spot Intervention (BSI)/Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) indicator (if so equipped)
2. Not Available: Seat Belt Not Fastened so equipped)
3. Not Available: Poor Road Conditions (in so equipped)
4. Not Available: Visibility is impaired (if a equipped)
5. Press Brake Pedal (if so equipped)
6. Power turned off to save the battery
7. Shift system malfunction. Visit dealer
8. Check position of shift lever
9. Shift to P range
10. Currently not available

No Key Detected

This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is left outside the vehicle with the ig switch in the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to "INFINI Intelligent Key System" in the "Pre-driving checks and adjustments" section of this manual.

Key ID Incorrect

This warning appears when the ignition switch is placed from the OFF position and the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot start the engine with an unregistered key.

For additional information, refer to "INFINIT Intelligent Key System" in the "Pre-driving checks and adjustments" section of this manual.

Key Battery Low

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to "Battery replacement" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

Key System Error: See Owner's Manual

After the ignition switch is pushed to the position, this light comes on for a period time and then turns off.

The Key System Error message warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the light comes on while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start the engine.

If the light comes on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However in these cases, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Key Registration Complete

This appears when a new Intelligent Key is registered to the vehicle.

Push brake and start switch to drive

This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

This indicator also appears when the vehicle has been started using the Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) function.

This indicator means that the engine will star by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch.

Push Ignition to OFF

^61 After the Push Ignition to OFF warning illuminates, the warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is placed in the Auto ACC position when the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

To turn off the Push warning, place the iglLow Fuel

tion switch in the ON position and then in the This LOCK position.

Shift to Park

This warning appears when the door is opened while the shift lever is in positions other than the P (Park) position.

If this warning illuminates, move the shift lever to the P position.

Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)

This indicator appears when the battery of the Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key system and the vehicle are not communicating normally.

If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the br. pedal. For additional information, refer to "INFINITI Intelligent Key battery discharge" the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Release Parking Brake

This warning illuminates in the message area of the vehicle information display when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is drive

This warning illuminates when the fuel level the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches O (Empty). There will be a small reserve off fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches O (Empty).

Loose Fuel Cap

This warning appears when the fuel-filler is not tightened correctly after the vehicle been refueled. For additional information, refer to "Fuel-filler cap" in the "Pre-driving checks and adjustments" section of this manual.

Transmission Shift Position indicator

This indicator shows the transmission shift position.

Low Washer Fluid

This warning illuminates when the windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. A windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to "Windshield-washer fluid" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four apres to the recommended COLD tire preshare shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to "Low tire pressure warning light" in this section and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Steering Assist Not Available: Cannot Detect Lane (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Steering Assist system is engaged.

Under the following conditions, the Steering Assist system is automatically canceled:

- When lane markers in the traveling lane cannot be correctly detected for a period of time due to such items as a snow rut, reflection of light on a rainy day or several unclear lane markers are present

If you want to use the Steering Assist system Door Open

again, cancel the ProPILOT Assist system

and set it again when lane markers are cleq visible.

This warning illuminates when a door has arly been opened.

AWD Error: See Owner's Manual (if so equipped)

This warning appears when the all-wheel drive system is not functioning properly while the engine is running.

AWD High Temp. Stop Vehicle (if so equipped)

This warning may appear while trying to fre a stuck vehicle due to increased oil temperature. The driving mode may change to 2-Wheel Drive (2WD). If this warning is displayed, stop the vehicle with the engine idling as soon as it is safe to do so. Then if the warning turns off, you can continue driving.

Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner's Manual (if so equipped)

This warning may appear if there is a large difference between the diameters of the front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in safe area, with the engine idling. Check that all the tire sizes are the same, that the tire pressure is correct and that the tires are not excessively worn.

Steering Assist Alert (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Steering Assist system is engaged.

I will be displayed under the following condition:

- When not holding the steering wheel or when there is no steering wheel operation

Please hold on the steering wheel immediately. When the steering operation is detected, the warning turns off and the steer resist function is automatically restored.

Steering Assist status (if so equipped)

This indicator appears when the Steering Assist system is engaged.

For additional information, refer to "ProPI-LOT™ Assist" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Chassis Control System Error: See Owner's Manual

of this warning appears if the Integrated Dynamics-control Module detects an error in

the Active Trace Control, Active Engine Brake, or the Active Ride Control systems. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. For additional information, refer to "Chassis Control" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Power will turn off to save the battery

This warning appears in the message area of the vehicle information display after a period of time if the shift lever has not moved from the P (Park) position.

Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights

This warning appears when the headlights are left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO position. For additional information, refer to "Headlight switch" in this sec-

When parked apply parking brake

This message appears when a malfunction occurs in the electric shift control system below 6 mph (10 km/h).

Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Instruments and controls

Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW) indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator shows when the PFCW system is engaged.

For additional information, refer to "Warningmanual."

systems switch" in this section and "Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)/Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator shows when the LDW/LDP systems are engaged.

For additional information, refer to "Dynamic driver assistance switch" in this section and "Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system" and "Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)/ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/ Backup Collision Intervention® (BCI)/ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator shows when the BSI, BSW, BCI, or RCTA systems are engaged.

For additional information, refer to "Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)", "Blind Spot War ing (BSW)", "Backup Collision Intervention (BCI)" and "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) in the "Starting and driving" section of this

Malfunction

This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly:

• Backup Collision Intervention (BCI)
• Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)
• Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
• Distance Control Assist (DCA)
• Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection
  • Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)
  · Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
  • Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)
• Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW)

If one or more of these warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicators (if so equipped)

These indicators show the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system status. For additional information, refer to "Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Stop vehicle and Apply parking brake (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the battery charge is low.

Please park vehicle as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.

INFINITI Drive Mode Selector indicators

These indicators show the current drive mode of the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to "INFINITI Drive Mode Selector" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Cruise control indicator

This indicator shows the cruise control system status.

When cruise control is activated, a green circle will illuminate to indicate it is set. The vehicle information display will also display

the speed the cruise control was set at. If you to "Distance Control Assist (DCA)", "Lan accelerate past the set speed, the speed will Departure Prevention (LDW)", "Lane Deparblink until you either cancel cruise control oture Prevention (LDP)" or "Blind Spot Intergo back to the set speed. If cruise control ventilation® (BSI)" in the "Starting and driving" and canceled, the speed will be displayed to section of this manual. show the speed the vehicle will return to if the resume button is activated. Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

AFS system error: See Owner's Manual (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Active Front lighting System (AFS) encounters an error.

For additional information, see Active Front lighting System (AFS) in this section.

Flat Tire - Visit dealer

This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and one or more flat tires are detected when driving. For additional information, refer to "Flat tire" in the "In case of emergency" section and "Types of tires" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

Not Available: High Camera Temp (if so equipped)

This message appears when the camera de-Collision Intervention (BCI)" in the "Starting tects an interior temperature of more than and driving" section of this manual. 104°F (40°C). For additional information, re-

This message appears when the Blind Spot Warning (BSW), Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA), Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI), or Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) systems become unavailable because a radar blockage is detected. For additional information, refer to "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)", "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)", "Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)", or "Backup Collision Intervention (BCI)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Unavailable: High Accelerator Temperature (if so equipped)

This message appears when the Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) system becomes unavailable because of an interior temperature greater than approximately 104°F (40°C). For additional information, refer to "Backup

-Collision Intervention (BCI)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Unavailable: Front Radar Blocked (if so equipped)

This message appears when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC), Distance Control Assist (DCA), Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection, or Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW) systems become unavailable because the front radar is obstructed. For additional information, refer to "Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)", "Distance Control Assist (DCA)", "Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection", or "Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

System OFF (if so equipped)

This message appears when the Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) system is turned off using the lower display. For additional information, refer to "Backup Collision Intervention (BCI)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

This warning may appear if the extended storage switch is not pushed in. When this warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For addi

Instruments and controls

tional information, refer to "Extended storage switch" in this section.

CVT Error: See Owner's Manual

This warning illuminates when there is a problem with the CVT system. If this wo

comes on, have the system checked. It is ommended that you visit an INFINITI retail for this service.

Headlight System Error: See Owner's Manual (if so equipped)

This warning illuminates when there is an error with the system. For additional information, refer to "Headlight switch" in this section.

Distance Control Assist (DCA)/Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)/Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator shows when the DCA/BSI/LDP system is engaged.

For additional information, refer to "Dynamic driver assistance switch" in this section and Distance Control Assist (DCA)", "Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)" and "Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)" in the "Starting and driving section of this manual.

Not Available Seat Belt Not Fastened (if so- When a wheel slips equipped) The above system can

This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT Assist) system is engaged.

under the following condition, the ICC (with eProPILOT™ Assist) system is automatically canceled:

- When the driver's seat belt is not fastened

The above system cannot be used when the canceled: driver's seat belt is not fastened.

Not Available Poor Road Conditions (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT Assist) system, the Blind Spot Intervention (BSI)® system, the Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system, or the ICC system is engaged.

The above system cannot be used in some situations (VDC operates and wheel slip.)

Not Available Visibility is impaired (if so equipped)

This message may appear when the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT Assist) system is engaged.

Under the following conditions, the ICC (with ProPILOT ^TM Assist) system is automatically

• The camera area of the windshield is fogged up or covered with dirt, water, drops, ice, snow, etc.
• Strong light, such as sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles, enter the front camera
• When the wiper (HI) operates

The system will be available when the above conditions no longer exist.

- When the VDC operates

2-32 Instruments and controls

SECURITY SYSTEMS

Press Brake Pedal (if so equipped)

This message may appear in the following situations:

• The driver tries to release the electronic parking brake manually without depressing the brake pedal.
  The vehicle is stopped on a steep hill; there is a possibility of moving backwards, even if the electronic parking brake is applied.
• The vehicle moves while the automatic brake hold is activated.

For additional information, refer to "Electronic parking brake" in the "Starting and ing" section of this manual.

Power turned off to save the battery

This message appears after the ignition switch is automatically turned off. For additional information, refer to "Push-button ignition switch positions" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Shift system malfunction. Visit Dealer

This message appears when a malfunction occurs in the electric shift control system at 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.

Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Check position of shift lever

This message appears when a malfunction occurs in the electric shift device.

Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Shift to P range

This warning appears when the driver's door is opened with the shift position in any position other than the P (Park) position.

drlf-this warning illuminates, move the shift lever to the P position.

Currently not available

This message appears when the VDC system is turned off. The BSI system and the LDPV system will be turned off automatically. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)", "Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)" and "Lane Departure Warning (LDP)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Technical line drawing of a projector with concentric circular components and a black arrow indicating motion (no text or symbols)

Your vehicle has two types of security systems:

- Vehicle security system

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors, liftgate or hood when the system formed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft o

Instruments and controls

interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key in the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. An INFINITI retailer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security system

1. Close all windows and the moonroof. The system can be armed even if the windows and moonroof are open.
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
3. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the Intelligent Key, door handle request switch or power door lock switch.

Key fob operation:

Confirm that the 📄 indicator light comes on. The 📄 indicator stays illuminated for a period of time indicating that the system is in the pre-armed phase.

The indicator light will blink every 3 seconds once the security system is armed.

If during the pre-armed phase one of following occurs, the system will not arm:

• Any door is unlocked with the mechanical key
• A door is opened with the release button with the Intelligent Key on your person
• The doors are unlocked using the unlock button on the Intelligent Key
• The ignition switch is placed in the ON position

Evenwhenthe driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate when all the doors, hood and lift-gate are locked with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position. When placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the system will be released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:

• The turn signals blink and the horn sounds intermittently.
• The alarm automatically turns off after a period of time. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking the driver's door or liftgate with the key, or by pressing the button on the Intelligent Key.

The alarm is activated by:

opening the door or liftgate without using the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock switch).

2-34 Instruments and controls

How to stop an activated alarm

1. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

For Canada:

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver's door or the liftgate with the key, pressing the button on the Intelligent Key, or pressing the request switch on the driver's or passenger's door with the Intelligent Key in range of the door handle. If

Restart the engine while holding the vice (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System key.

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System willvices.

not allow the engine to start without the U of a registered INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, INFINITI recommends placing the registered INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other de-

If the engine fails to start using a registered This device complies with part 15 of the FCC INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System key (for Rules. Operation is subject to the following example, when interference is caused by an two conditions: (1) This device may not other INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System cause harmful interference, and (2) this device, an automated toll road device or auto-vice must accept any interference received, automatic payment device on the key ring), restofing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON sition for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Simple line drawing of a car silhouette with a key on the roof (no text or symbols)

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position.

This function indicates the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational.

If the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, seek service for the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

graph TD
    A["Engine"] --> B["Valve 1"]
    B --> C["Valve 2"]
    C --> D["Valve 3"]
    D --> E["Valve 4"]
    E --> F["Valve 5"]
    F --> G["Valve 6"]
    G --> H["Valve 7"]
    H --> I["Valve 8"]
    I --> J["Valve 9"]
    J --> K["Valve 10"]
    K --> L["Valve 11"]
    L --> M["Valve 12"]
    M --> N["Valve 13"]
    N --> O["Valve 14"]
    O --> P["Valve 15"]
    P --> Q["Valve 16"]
    Q --> R["Valve 17"]
    R --> S["Valve 18"]
    S --> T["Valve 19"]
    T --> U["Valve 20"]
    U --> V["Valve 21"]
    V --> W["Valve 22"]
    W --> X["Valve 23"]
    X --> Y["Valve 24"]
    Y --> Z["Valve 25"]

Type A (if so equipped) SWITCH OPERATION

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

2-36 Instruments and controls

A B OFF AUTO 5 1 2 3 4 LIC3097

Type B (if so equipped)

CAUTION

• Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.

• Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty.

• Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshield-washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

• Pre-mix windshield-washerfluidconcentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water.

NOTE:

If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that is on and

around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to open the wiper.

The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:

① Intermittent (INT) – intermittent operation can be adjusted by turning the knob toward Ⓐ (Slower) or Ⓑ (Faster). Also, the intermittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.) Further, if so equipped, the rain-sensing feature will adjust the speed of the intermittent operation. For additional information, refer to "Rain-sensing auto-wiper system" in this section.
② Low (LO) – continuous low speed operation
③ High (HI) – continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up ④ to have one sweep operation (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

NOTE:

The Wiper with Speed feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer to the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual.

OFF AUTO OFF AUTO ① ② ③

LIC3817

RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER SYSTEM (if so equipped)

CAUTION

- Do not touch the rain sensor and around it when the wiper switch is in the AUTO position and the ignition switch is in the ON position. The wipers may operate unexpectedly and cause an injury or may damage a wiper.

• The rain-sensing auto wipers are intended for use during rain. If the switch is left in the AUTO position, the wipers may operate unexpectedly when dirt, fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck on or around the sensor. The wipers may also operate when exhaust gas or moisture affect the rain sensor.
• When the windshield glass is coated with water repellent, the speed of the rain-sensing auto wipers may be higher even though the amount of therainfall is small.
• Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto wiper system when you use a car wash.
• The rain-sensing auto wipers may not operate ifrain does not hit the rain sensor even if it is raining.
• Using Genuine NISSAN wiper blades is recommended for proper operation of the rain-sensing auto wiper system. For additional information, refer to "Wind-shield wiper blades" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

The rain-sensing auto wiper system can automatically turn on the wipers and adjust the wiper speed depending on the rainfall and the vehicle speed by using the rain sensor located on the upper part of the windshield.

To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system, place the lever in the AUTO position. The wiper will sweep once while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted by turning the knob toward the front ② (High) or toward the re③ (Low).

- High - High sensitive operation

- Low - Low sensitive operation

To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system off, rotate the lever to the OFF position, or rotate the lever to the LO or HI position.

The rain-sensing feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer to the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual.

OFF OFF LIC2662

In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the rear window and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the rear window with the defroster before you wash the rear window.

CAUTION

• Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
• Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty.
• Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshield-washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
• Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water.

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER, OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROSTER, AND WIPER DEICER (if so equipped) SWITCH

NOTE:

If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow, etc., the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove snow, etc. on and around the wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper.

The rear window wiper and washer operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position to operate the wiper.

① Intermittent – intermittent operation (not adjustable)
② Low - continuous low speed operation

Push the switch forward ^3 to operate the washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

If the windshield wipers are on and the vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) the rear wipe will automatically turn on while the vehicle remains in R (Reverse).

NOTE:

The Reverse Link feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer to the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual.

the ion. LIC3816

To defrost the rear window glass, place the ignition switch in the ON position and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

To defrost the outside mirrors, place the ignition switch in the ON position and push the outside mirror defroster switch on. The outside mirror defroster indicator light comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.

To turn on the wiper deicer (if so equipped), place the ignition switch in the ON position and push the wiper deicer switch on. The wiper deicer indicator light comes on. Push the switch again to turn the deicer off.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

NOTE:

The top and bottom few rows of wires on the rear window are not part of the rear window defroster system. These wires make up the antenna for the audio system.

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

OFF AUTO 1 2 300Ω G++ G-- LIC3818

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

① Rotate the switch to the position, and the front parking, tail, license plate, and instrument panel lights will come on.
② Rotate the switch to the position, and the headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

1 AUTO OFF 300° ED G3++ G3-- LIC3819

Autolight system

The autolight system allows the headlights open, the headlights remain on for a period of turn on and off automatically. The autolight time. If another door is opened while the system can: headlights are on, then the timer is reset.

Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, To turn the autolight system off, turn the license plate and instrument panel lights switch to the OFFDOE, or D position. automatically when it is dark.
Turn off all the lights (except daylight running lights) when it is light.
Keep all the lights on for a period of time after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed.

Line drawing of a car's side view showing steering wheel and dashboard (no text or symbols)

1 2 3 LIC3820

Besure you do not put anything on top of the headlight beam select

autolight sensor located in the top ① of the instrument panel. The autolight sensor ① controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs ② while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position, your vehicle's battery could become discharged. ③

To select the high beam function, push the lever forward. The high beam lights dome on and the light illuminates.

Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high beams on and off.

High Beam Assist (if so equipped) The High Beam Assist system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and above. If an oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle appears in front of your vehicle when the head-light high beam is on, the headlight will be switched to the low beam automatically.

WARNING

- The High Beam Assist system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for safe driving operation. The driver should remain alert at all times, ensure safe driving practices and switch the high beams and low beam manually when necessary.

- The high beam or low beam may not switch automatically under the following conditions. Switch the high beam and low beam manually.

- During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, wind, etc.).

- When a light source similar to a head-light or tail light is in the vicinity of the vehicle.

• When the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle are turned off, when the color of the light is affected due to foreign materials on the lights, or when the light beam is out of position.
• When there is a sudden, continuous change in brightness.
• When driving on a road that passes over rolling hills, or a road that has level differences.
• When driving on a road with many curves.
• When a sign or mirror-like surface is reflecting intense light towards the front of the vehicle.
• When the container, etc. being towed by a leading vehicle is reflecting intense light.
• When a headlight on your vehicle is damaged or dirty.

• When the vehicle is leaning at an angle due to a punctured tire, being towed, etc.

• The timing of switching the low beam and high beam may change under the following situations.

• The brightness of the headlights of the oncoming vehicle or leading vehicle.
• The movement and direction of the oncoming vehicle and the leading vehicle.
• When only one light on the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is illuminated.
• When the oncoming vehicle or the leading vehicle is a two-wheeled vehicle.
• Road conditions (incline, curve, the road surface, etc.).
• The number of passengers and the amount of luggage.

② LIC3821

High Beam Assist operation

To activate the High Beam Assist system, turn the headlight switch to the AUTO position ① and push the lever forward ② (high beam position). The High Beam Assist indicator light in the meter will illuminate while the headlights are turned on.

If the High Beam Assist indicator light does not illuminate in the above condition, it may indicate that the system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 16 mph (25 km/h), the head-light uses the low beam.

To turn off the High Beam Assist system, the headlight switch to the position or select the low beam position by placing the lever in the neutral position.

TURN LSD2712

Ambient image sensor maintenance

The ambient image sensor① for the High w Beam Assist system is located in front of the

inside mirror. To maintain the proper operation of the High Beam Assist system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:

· Always keep the windshield clean.
- Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the ambient image sensor.

- Do not strike or damage the areas around the ambient image sensor. Do not touch the sensor lens that is located on the ambient image sensor.

If the ambient image sensor is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.

Battery saver system

The battery saver system automatically turns off the ignition after a period of time when the ignition switch is left in the Auto ACC or ON position.

The battery saver system automatically turns off the following lights after a period of time when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and the doors are closed:

• Headlights, when the headlight switch is in the EDQ or position
• Interior lights, when left in the ON position

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) (if so equipped)

The Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) was automatically adjust the headlights (low beam) toward the turning direction to improve the driver's view. When the headlight switch is ON and the driver operates the steering wheel in a turn, the AFS system was be activated.

The AFS will operate:

• when the headlight switch is ON.
• when the shift lever is in any position other than P (Park) or R (Reverse).

- when the vehicle is driven at above INFINITI recommends that you consult the 16 MPH (25 km/h) for the left-side heddeal regulations on the use of lights. light. Note that the right-side low beam headlight will swivel but the left side will not swivel when the vehicle is at a stop and the steering wheel is turned. The vehicle must attain a speed above 16 MPH (25 km/h) before AFS activates the left-side headlight. LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) SYSTEM The LED portion of the headlights automatically illuminate at 100% intensity when the engine is started and the parking brake released. The LED Daytime Running Lights

AFS will also adjust the headlight to a prop (DRL) system operates with the headlight axis automatically, depending on the number switch in the OFF position. When you turn will of occupants in the vehicle, the load the vehicle is carrying and the road conditions. full illumination, the LED lights switch from full illuminated light blinks after the ignition switch has been pushed to the ON position, this may indicate that the AFS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. When the engine is started, the headlights will vibrate to check the system condition. This is not necessary at dusk to turn the headlight malfunction switch on for interior controls and switches

Automatic headlight aiming control (if so equipped)

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic headlight levelling system. The headlight axis is controlled automatically.

WARNING

When the LED DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident juring yourself and others.

5:17 AM 85" Warning Brightness STANDARD P 109 miles LIC3822

1 2 1 2 NIC LIC 3823

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL

Press the "+" button to increase the brightness of instrument panel lights.

Press the "-" button Ⓑ to decrease the brightness of instrument panel lights.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

① Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.

HORN

Lane change signal

② Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed.

Move the lever up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn signal will automatically flash three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

≠0

LIC3824 | LIC3174

Diagram of a car steering wheel with a black arrow indicating clockwise direction (no text or symbols)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight to sound the horn, push near the horn icon switch to the position, then push the the steering wheel.

fog light switch on.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on, then push the fog light switch.

To turn the fog lights off, push the fog light switch again.

The headlights must be on and the low bed selected for the fog lights to operate. The lights automatically turn off when the high beam headlights are selected.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

Two identical hand-drawn diagrams of a kitchen appliance with floral and vegetable symbols, separated by a vertical line (no text or labels)

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the climate controlled seats if you or the occupants cannot monitor seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in those body parts in contact with the seat. Use of the climate controlled seats by such people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

- The battery could run down if the climate control seat is operated while the engine is not running.

• Do not use the climate control seat for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
• Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.
• Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar objects. This may result in damage to the climate controlled seat.
• Any liquid spilled on the seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.
• The climate controlled seat has an air filter. Do not operate the climate controlled seat without an air filter. This may result in damage to the system.
  When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
• If any malfunctions are found or the climate controlled seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

The climate controlled seat cools down the front seat by blowing cool air from under the surface of the seat. The climate control switch is located on the center console.

The climate controlled seat can be operated as follows:

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
   Push the climate controlled seat switches to cool the seat. The indicator light on the corresponding switch will illuminate.
2. Adjust the desired amount of air by pushing the switch again. The climate controlled seat blower remains on low speed for approximately 60 seconds after pushing the switch on.
3. When the vehicle's interior is warmed or cooled, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn off the climate controlled seats. To turn off the climate controlled seats, push the switch until the indicator light does not illuminate.

To check the air filter for the climate controlled seat, it is recommended that you contact an INFINITI retailer.

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

Two identical simple line drawings of a toilet in front and side, with no text or symbols.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

- The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.

• Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
• Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.
• Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.
• Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.
• When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.

If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The switches are located on the center console and can be operated independently of each other.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

2. Push the heated seat switch and select the desired heat range.

3. For high heat, push the switch once.

4. For medium heat, push the switch twice.
5. For low heat, push the switch three times.

6. The indicator light will illuminate when the heater is on.

7. To turn off the heater, push the heated seat switch again. Make sure that the indicator light turns off.

The heater is controlled by a control module, automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as the switch is on.

When the seat is warmed, or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch off.

DYNAMIC DRIVER ASSISTANCE SWITCH (for vehicles without ProPILOT™ Assist) (if so equipped)

NOTE:

The heated seats may also be adjusted in the lower display. For additional information, refer to "Heater and air conditioner (automatic)" in the "Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition" section of this manual.

Pure diagram of a car interior with a circular logo and label 'LIC3828' (no text or symbols within the diagram itself)

WARNING

When this switch is activated the follow systems (if so equipped) are turned off will not work.

• Distance Control Assist (DCA)
- Blind Spot Intervention (BSI)
• Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)

When the dynamic driver assistance switch is turned off, the indicator on the switch is off. The indicator will also be off if the system is deactivated using the settings menu.

The DCA system brakes and moves the accelerator pedal upward according to the distance from and the relative speed of the vehicle ahead to help assist the driver in maintaining a following distance. For additional information, refer to "Distance Control Assist (DCA)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

The BSI system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes, and helps assist the driver to return the vehicles to the center of the traveling lane. For additional information, refer to "Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

The LDP system warns the driver with a warning indicator in the vehicle information display and chime, and helps assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane by applying the brakes to the

The dynamic driver assistance switch is used for or right wheels individually (for a short to turn on and off the following systems (Period of time). For additional information, tance Control Assist (DCA), Blind Spot Interfer to "Land Departure Prevention (LDP)" in vention(BSI), and Land Departure Prevention the "Starting and driving" section of this (LDP)) that are activated (if so equipped) usmanual ing the settings menu in the lower display.

STEERING ASSIST SWITCH (for vehicles with ProPILOT™ Assist) (if so equipped)

FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM SWITCH (if so equipped)

Simple line drawing of a rectangular device with a circular icon on the top (no text or symbols)

LIC3853

When the steering assist switch is turned off, the indicator on the switch is off. The indicator will also be off if the system is deactivated using the settings menu.

The DCA system brakes and moves the accelerator pedal upward according to the distance from and the relative speed of the vehicle ahead to help assist the driver in maintaining a following distance. For additional information, refer to "Distance Control Assist (DCA)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

The BSI system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes, and helps assist the driver to return the vehicles to the center of the traveling lane. For additional information, refer to "Blind pot Intervention® (BSI)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Simple line drawing of a car inside a vehicle cabin with sensor waves (no text or symbols)

WARNING

When this switch is activated the following systems (if so equipped) are turned off and will not work.

• Distance Control Assist (DCA)
- Blind Spot Intervention (BSI)
• Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)

The LDP system warns the driver with a warning indicator in the vehicle information display and chime, and helps assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane by applying the brakes to the

The steering assist switch is used to turn left or right wheels individually (for a short and off the following systems (Distance Cor period of time). For additional information, The trol Assist (DCA), Blind Spot Intervention- refer to "Land Departure Prevention (LDP)" in (BSI), and Land Departure Prevention (LDP))the "Starting and driving" section of this that are activated (if so equipped) using the manual settings menu in the lower display.

WARNING

The front sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper driving.
The rear sonar system is a convenience but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and check that it is safe to do so before backing up. Always back up slowly.

e front sonar system:

is active when the ignition switch is in the ON position and the shift lever is in a forward gear position.

Instruments and controls

HEAD UP DISPLAY (HUD) (if so equipped)

- a beeping tone is emitted when the sensors detect obstacles within 1.0 m (3 ft) of the front bumper.

The rear sonar system:

• is active when the ignition is in the ON position and the shift lever is in R (Reverse).
• a beeping tone is emitted when the sensors detect obstacles within 1.5 m (4.9 ft) of the rear bumper.

The front and rear sonar system may be enabled by pushing the front and rear sonar switch. When the system is enabled, the indicator light on the switch will illuminate. Push the switch again to disable the system. The indicator light will go off.

The system will automatically reset the next time the ignition switch is turned ON.

For additional information, refer to "Front and rear sonar system" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Next Crosspoint St. 100 ① MPH ② 300 m ③ 100

LIC3942

WARNING

• Failure to properly adjust the brightness and position of the displayed image may interfere with the drivers ability to see through the windshield which could cause an accident leading to severe injury or death.
• Do not use the head up display for extended periods of time as that can cause you to not see other vehicles, pedestrians or objects, which could cause an accident leading to severe injury or death.

The Head Up Display (HUD) can display one or more of the following features (if so equipped):

① Vehicle speed display
② Driving Aids
③ Navigation/Warning

NOTE:

Do not place any type of liquid on or near the projector. Doing so may cause malfunction of the equipment.
Do not touch any internal parts of the projector. Doing so may cause malfunction of the equipment.
- To prevent scratches to the projector glass, do not place any sharp objects on or near the projector opening.
Do not place any objects on the instrument panel which may obstruct the display of the HUD.

i.... LIC3829

HOW TO USE THE HUD

- Turning the display contents on or off. The Navigation System linking display will The following items (if so equipped) may display the following items: be turned on or off: Intersection names

• Driving Aids

• Navigation

• Intersection names
  · Arrows indicating turning direction
  · Distance to the next intersection

NOTE:

Emergency information may display even if the HUD system is turned off.

DRIVER ASSISTANCE/ NAVIGATION LINKING

The HUD will display driver assistance and navigation information③.

Display brightness

The brightness of the display may be controlled by the Navigation System. The brightness will also be adjusted automatically according to the exterior ambient lighting brightness.

The driver assistance display will display

To turn the HUD system on, push the HUD warning situations for the following systems: switch. To turn the HUD off, push the switch again. FEB

If the HUD system is turned off, it will remain off even if the vehicle is restarted.

The following settings can be changed in the Hands-free warning (for vehicles with lower display: ProPILOT™ Assist) (if so equipped)

• Brightness and position of the display
• Tilting of the display

E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (if so equipped)

SOS LIC3830

The E-call (SOS) system switch is used in combination with an Infiniti InTouch™ Services subscription to call for assistance in case of an emergency.

Pushing the switch will (with a paid subscription) reach a Response Specialist that will provide assistance based on the situation described by the vehicle's occupant. For additional information, or to enroll your vehicle, when the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC refer to www.lnfinitiUSA.com/intouch or call OR ON position. 855-444-7244.

POWER OUTLETS

Line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard and control panel with an arrow pointing to the left side (no text or symbols)

Instrument Panel

12V OUTLETS

The power outlets are for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.

The instrument panel, rear console, and luggage area power outlets are powered only when the ignition switch is in the AUTO ACC or ON position.

Line drawing of a car air intake control panel with directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Rear console

2-54 Instruments and controls

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

Diagram of a vehicle interior with a circular component and directional arrow, no readable text or symbols

Cargo Area

CAUTION

• The outlet and plug may be hot during immediately after use.
• Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for additional information.

• Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

• Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.

• Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
• Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.
• Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned off.
• Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may over heat or the internal temperature fuse may open.
• When not in use, be sure to close the cap. or Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.

Medical diagram showing a hand holding a tool near a device with labeled component 'A' and directional arrow

LIC3359

STORAGE

Technical diagram showing a mechanical component before and after assembly, with no visible text or symbols.

OFF position

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with an arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

ON position

GHD LIC3834

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS

The extended storage switch is used when shipping the vehicle. It is located in the fuse panel on the driver's side of the instrument panel. If any electrical equipment does not operate, ensure the extended storage switch is pushed fully in place, as shown.

To inspect the extended storage switch, ensure the ignition switch and headlight switch are off, remove the fuse box using a suitable tool in combination with a cloth to avoid damaging the trim.

Line drawing of a car backrest seat with a downward arrow indicating direction (no text or symbols)

SEATBACK POCKETS

The seatback pockets may be located on the back of the driver's and/or passenger's seats. The pockets can be used to store maps.

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the front passenger's INFINITI Advanced Air Bag System (if so equipped), please observe the following items:

- Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket or head restraint/head rest.

- Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/head rest or in the seatback pocket.

Top-down line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard, air vent, and control panel (no text or symbols)

Front console
STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop.

The front console storage tray is equipped with a rubber mat, which may be removed.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with an arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

Rear armrest

② ① LIC3902

LIC3902|LIC3836

Diagram of a car interior showing directional arrows indicating movement or force (no text or symbols present)

CONSOLE BOX

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle. the master key when locking or unlocking ② the glove box.

Use open the console box, press down on the latch. The latch will release.

To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

① LIC3837

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES STORAGE

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to avoid obstructing the driver's view and to help prevent an accident.

CAUTION

• Do not use for anything other than sunglasses.
• Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses.

Line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard, steering wheel, and gear (no text or symbols)

Front console
CUP HOLDERS

The front console cup holders are equipped with a rubber mat, which may be removed.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with an arrow indicating clockwise motion (no text or symbols)

2nd row

A CAUTION

Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

Line drawing of a car door frame with a black arrow pointing to the side panel (no text or symbols)

LIC3839
Bottle holder - front

A WARNING

• Do not recline the 2nd row seatback when you use the cup holders on the rear armrest. Doing so may cause the beverages to spill over, and if they are hot, they may scald the passengers.
• Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

CAUTION

• Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident.
• Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers.

Line drawing of a car interior showing the seat, dashboard, and side panel (no text or symbols)

Bottle holder - rear

Diagram of a vehicle interior showing labeled components with arrows indicating movement or assembly, including a circled section and 'LIC2244' watermark.

CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN

Top-down diagram of a car showing the rear vent, dashboard, and side seats with directional arrows indicating movement (no text or symbols)

LUGGAGE HOOKS

To access the floor storage area, pull up the handle① to lift the luggage board.

When securing items using luggage hooks located on the side finisher do not apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a sin hook.

The luggage hooks that are located on the floor should have loads less than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.

The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps.

WARNING

• Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
• Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure cargo.
• Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

area. Your child could be seriously injured. Do not apply a total load of more than or killed in a collision if the top tether 7.3 lbs. (3.3 kg) to a single coat hook. strap is damaged.

LIC3943 LIC

Line drawing of a modern sedan car (no text or symbols)

ROOF RACK (if so equipped)

COAT HOOKS

The coat hooks, located on the side pillars the 2nd row, may be used to store coats other articles of clothing.

A CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 7.3 lbs. (3.3 kg) to a single coat hook.

Do not apply any load directly to the roof sid bars. Cross bars must be installed before applying load/cargo/luggage to the roof of the vehicle. Genuine NISSAN accessory cross bars are available through an INFINITI retailer. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for additional information.

The service load capacity for the roof side rails is 165 lbs. (74 kg), however do not exceed the accessory cross bars load capacity.

Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front

and rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. certification label (located on the driver's door pillar). For additional information regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to "Vehicle loading information" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Installing crossbars (if so equipped)

Diagram showing two circular objects on parallel lines with arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

WARNING

• Always install the cross bars onto the roof side rails beforeloading cargo of any kind. Loading cargo directly onto the roof side rails or the vehicle's roof may cause vehicle damage.
• Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is loaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity, especially if the significant portion of that load is carried on the cross bars.
• Heavy loading of the cross bars has the potential to affect the vehicle stability and handling during sudden or unusual handling maneuvers.
• Roof rack cross bars should be evenly distributed.
• Do not exceed maximum roof rack cross bars load capacity.

WARNING

• It is recommended that you have the roof rack crossbars installed by an INFINITI retailer.
• Make sure the moonroof is in the closed position during the installation process.
• Protect the painted area on the vehicle's roof under the crossbars by placing a piece of cloth under the cross bars to prevent scratch damage.
• Do not load the crossbars more than the rated load capacity and always distribute the load uniformly.

The roof rack crossbars may be installed or removed. Use the TORX® provided wrench in the tool kit to install and remove the crossbars. The TORX® wrench will be in the glove sbox.

1. Manually remove the protective covers from the roof rails.

Line drawing of a device component with a circular button and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

3892 LIC3893

Technical diagram showing a mechanical component with labeled parts and directional arrow indicating movement or assembly.

1. Using a quarter, rotate the key-slot coun3. Use the TORX® provided wrench to loosen Open the clamp approximately two inches terclockwise to remove the plastic cover. the clamp screw. to minimize potential scratching of the roof

2-64 Instruments and controls

RF LIC3894

Diagram of a car interior showing a curved ramp and directional arrow (no text or symbols)

Diagram of a curved mechanical component with fluid flow, no text or symbols present

1. Determine crossbar orientation by locating. Align the pins of the passenger side clamp while holding the inner clamp, use the arrow that points to the front of the with the holes in the roof rail. TORX® provided wrench to tighten the vehicle. clamping screw.

NOTE:

Using the TORX® provided wrench, tighten to 10 N·m (7.4 ft.-lbs.).

Line drawing of a hand using a tool to adjust or install a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)

Line drawing of a hand using a tool to adjust or install a mechanical component (no text or symbols visible)

Line drawing of a hand gripping a flexible object with a curved handle (no text or symbols)

1. Tighten both the driver and passenger side Assemble the plastic cover. Slide the cover. Ensure the cover is in the final position, shoulder screw. over the crossbar.

NOTE:

Using the TORX® provided wrench, tighten to 10 N·m (7.4 ft.-lbs.).

2-66 Instruments and controls

WINDOWS

Line drawing of a hand holding a small object with a tool, no text or symbols present

1. Using a quarter, turn the key-slot clockwise to lock the plastic cover.

NOTE:

After assembling both the front and rear crossbars, wiggle the crossbars by hand to check for loose parts. If either crossbar is loose, remove the crossbars and repeat steps 1-11 carefully.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

• Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle while it is motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.
• To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapmentinwindowsor inadvertentdoor lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver's passenger's door is opened during this period of time, the power to the windows is canceled.

in 3 1 A B C 5 4 2 SIC4352

1. Driver side automatic switch
2. Front passenger side automatic switch
3. Left rear passenger automatic switch
4. Right rear passenger automatic switch
5. Window lock button

Driver's side power window switch The driver's side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close the front and rear passenger windows.

The window can be partially opened by pushing the switch ^A down lightly until the desired window position is reached. To close the window partially, pull the switch ^B up until the desired window position is reached.

Locking passengers' windows

When the window lock button Ⓐ is depressed, only the driver's side window can be opened or closed. Press it again to cancel the window lock function.

Simple line drawing of a boat's side panel with arrows indicating direction (no text or symbols)

SIC4353

Simple line drawing of a device with two arrows pointing downward and an arrow pointing upward, no text or symbols present.

LIC0410

Front passenger's power window switch

The passenger's window switch operates only the corresponding passenger's window. To open the window partially, push the switch down lightly until the desired window position is reached. To close the window partially, pull the switch up until the desired window position is reached.

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows. To partially open the window, push the switch down lightly until the desired window position is reached. To partially close the window, pull the switch up lightly until the desired window position is reached.

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

Simple line drawing of a device with two arrows pointing downward and an arrow pointing upward, no text or symbols present.

Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation.

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.

Diagram of car air intake system with numbered components and directional arrows indicating flow or movement

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, push the window switch down to the second detent and release it; I need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening. If the vehicle's battery is disconnected, replaced, or jump started, the power window auto-reverse function may not operate properly. If this occurs, it is recommended that visit an INFINITI retailer to re-initialize the power window auto-reverse system.

To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. To stop the window, push the switch down while the window is closing.

POWER MOONROOF

The front moonroof is a power moonroof, the rear moonroof is fixed glass. The power moonroof will only operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The moonroof is operational for a period of time, even if the ignition switch is placed in the O position. If the driver's door or the front passenger's door is opened during this period of

time, the power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroof

To slide the moonroof:

• To fully open the moonroof, push the switch① toward the open position until it reaches the second detent. If the switch① is pushed to the first detent, only the sunshade will open.
• To fully close the moonroof, push the switch ^2 toward the close position until 2 it reaches the second detent. If the switch ^2 is pushed to the first detent, the moonroof will close but the sunshade will remain open.
• To stop the moonroof during operation, push the ①, ② or ③ switch to the desired position.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt up, push the moonroof switch. To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch or the switch to the first detent. When the switch is pushed to the second detent, the moonroof will tilt down and the sunshade close.

Resetting the moonroof switch

If the moonroof does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the moonroof operation system.

1. If the moonroof and sunshade are open close them fully by repeatedly pushing the moonroof switch to the deposition.
2. Push and hold the moonroof switch to the close position ^② at the first detent.

After holding the switch for 10 second the moonroof and sunshade move slightly to the closed position and then move back a little.

1. The moonroof and sunshade will fully open and then fully close automatically.
2. Release the switch. Check if the moon-roof switch operates normally.

If the moonroof does not operate properly the after performing the procedure above, have the your vehicle checked. It is recommended that e will you visit an INFINITI retailer for this servic

Auto-reverse function (when closing or tilting down the moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be activated when the moonroof and sunshade are closed or tilted down by automatic operation when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the moonroof occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing

If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof and sunshade as it moves to the front, the moonroof and sunshade will immediately open backward.

2-70 Instruments and controls

When tilting down

If the control unit detects something caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up.

WARNING

• In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints.
• Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing.

CAUTION

• Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand from the moonroof before opening.
• Do not place heavy objects on the moon roof or surrounding area.

Panoramic sunshade

The panoramic sunshade operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position. When opening or closing the sunshade the switch need not be held.

To open the sunshade:

To fully open the sunshade, slide the switch ① toward the OPEN position to the first detent.

To fully open the sunshade and the moonroof together, slide the switch① toward the OPEN position to the second detent.

To close the sunshade:

To fully close the sunshade, slide the switch ② toward the CLOSE position to the second detent. If the moonroof is open, both the moonroof and the sunshade will close automatically.
If the switch is sl② toward the CLOSE position to the first detent while the moonroof is open, only the moonroof will close. The sunshade will remain open.

To stop the sunshade during operation, push the switch ①, ②, or ③ at the desired position.

WARNING

• To avoid personal injury, keep your hands, fingers and head away from the sunshade arm, the arm rail and sunshade inlet port.
Do not allow children near the sunshade system. They could be injured.
- Do not place objects on or near the sun-shade. This could cause improper operation or damage it.
- Do not pull or push the sunshade. This could cause improper operation or damage it.

CAUTION

Do not place objects (such as newspapers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the sunshade inlet port. Doing so may entangle these objects in the sunshade when it is extending or retracting, causing improper operation or damage to the sunshade.
- Do not push the sunshade arm with your hands, etc., as this may deform it. Improper operation or damage to the sunshade may result.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

• Do not put any object into the sunshade inlet port as this may result in improper operation or damage the sunshade.
• Do not hang any object on the arm rail this may result in improper operation or damage the sunshade.
• Do not forcefully pull the sunshade. Doing so may elongate the sunshade. Improper operation or damage to the sunshade may result.

as 1 2 LIC3841

NOTE:

The footwell lights and step lights illuminate when the driver and passenger doors are open regardless of the interior light switch position. These lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

The interior lights will automatically turn on and stay on for a period of time when:

• The doors are unlocked by the Intelligent Key, a key or the request switch while all doors are closed and the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
• The doors and/or liftgate is opened.
• The switch is individually pushed.

When the ON switch ^① is pushed, the interior lights illuminate.

When the DOOR/OFF switch② is pushed, the interior lights do not illuminate unless individually pushed.

2-72 Instruments and controls

Top-down view of a car dashboard with directional arrows indicating left and right buttons (no text or symbols)

MAP LIGHTS

Simple line drawing of a rectangular object with an arrow pointing to its side (no text or symbols)

Rear personal lights

For additional information, refer to "Exterior and interior lights" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

PERSONAL LIGHTS

To turn the map lights on, push the switches.

To turn them off, push the switches again.

To turn the rear personal lights on, push the switch. To turn them off, push the switch again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.

CARGO LIGHT

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.

The light will go off after a period of time if the liftgate is left open, unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (Type A) (if so equipped)

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

• Will operate most radio frequency devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems.
• Is powered by your vehicle's battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicle's battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all programming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to "Programming HomeLink®" in this section.

WARNING

Do not use the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.

During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc., that you are programming.

Your vehicle's engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: -www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC position when programming HomeLink®. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink® for quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radio frequency.

1 LIC2365

1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 in (2-8 cm) away from the HomeLink® surface, keeping the HomeLink® indicator light① in view.

1 LIC2366

1. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink® button and hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indicator light ① flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. (The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.)

NOTE:

Some devices may require you to replace Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in "Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers" in this section.

1. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.

- If the indicator light ① is solid/continuous, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released.

- If the indicator light① blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns to a solid/continuous light, continue with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A second person may make the following steps easier. Use a ladder or other device. Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the next steps.

1. At the receiver located on the garage door opener motor in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button (the name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer but it is usually located near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there is difficulty locating the button, reference the garage door opener's manual.

2. Press and release the "learn" or "smart" button.

3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press NOTE:

and hold the trained HomeLink® button for 2 seconds and release. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence up to three times to complete the training process. HomeLink® should now activate your rolling code equipped device.

1. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during training. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "timeout" in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties training a gate operator or garage door opener by using the "Training" procedures, replace "Programming HomeLink®"

Step 2 with the following:

2-76 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener, etc., unplug the device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.

1. For additional information, refer to "Programming HomeLink®" step 1 in this section.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink® button, and the hand-held transmitter button. During training, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and hold the desired HomeLink® button while you press and re-press ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training.

Proceed with "Programming HomeLink®" step 3 to complete. If the device was unplugged during the programming procedure, remember to plug it back in when programming is completed.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after it is programmed, can be used to activate the programmed device. To operate, simply press and release the appropriate programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The amber indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted. For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:
id. replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.

- position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink® surface.

- press and hold both the HomeLink® andTo clear all programming:

hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption.

- position the hand-held transmitter1-3in (2 - 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink

is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position - keeping the indicator light in view at all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties, please contact the INFINITI Consumer Affairs Department. The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION

The following procedure clears the programmed information from both buttons. Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons can be reprogrammed. For additional information, refer to "Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button" in this section.

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light begins to flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer t 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the programming mod and can be programmed at any time begin-ting with "Programming HomeLink®" - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK® BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button, complete the following:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash a ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink® button, proceed with "Programming HomeLink®" - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515 (except Mexico).

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pressing the HomeLink® button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink® buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

def your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the Owner's Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.

FCC Notice: f- For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (Type B) (if so equipped)

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

- Will operate most radio frequency devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems. - Is powered by your vehicle's battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicle's battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink® will retain all programming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is programmed, retain the original transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional information, refer to "Programming HomeLink®" in this section.

WARNING

Do not use the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.

During the programming procedure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc., that you are programming.

Your vehicle's engine should be turnedoff while programming the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC position when programming HomeLink®. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink® for quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radio frequency.

1 LIC3656

1. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 in (2-8 cm) away from the HomeLink® surface, keeping the HomeLink® indicator light① and area above the bimodal switch in view.

1 LIC3657

1. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink® button and hand-held transmitter button. The mirror will begin training upon the Homelink® button being pressed. The mirror will indicate the Homelink® icon and the word TRAINING over the bi-modal switch. Also, a flashing amber colored dot will appear in the mirror above the button being pressed. DO NOT release until the training is complete.

The training is complete when the mirror indicates the Homelink® icon and the word TRAINED over the bimodal switch and a fixed green colored dot appears

Instruments and controls

above the button pressed. When this happens, both buttons may be released as it indicates successful programming.

NOTE:

Some devices may require you to replace Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in "Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers" in this section

1. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.

If the indicator light ① is solid/continuous, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed and released.

If the indicator light① blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns to a solid/continuous light, continue with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A second person may make the following steps easier. Use a ladder or other device. Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the next steps.

1. At the receiver located on the garage door opener motor in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button (the name

and color of the button may vary by manufacturer but it is usually located near where the hanging antenna wire attached to the unit). If there is difficult locating the button, reference the garage door opener's manual.

1. Press and release the "learn" or "smart" button.

Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold the trained HomeLink® button for 2 seconds and release. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence up to three times to complete the training process. HomeLink® should now activate your rolling code equipped device.

1. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE OPENERS

to Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission - which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during training. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "timeout" in the same man-sner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties training a gate operator or garage door opener by using the "Training" procedures, replace "Programming HomeLink®"

Step 2 with the following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener, etc., unplug the device during the "cycling" process to prevent possible damage to the garage door opener components.

1. For additional information, refer to "Programming HomeLink®" step 1 in this section.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink® button and the hand-held transmitter button. During training, your hand-held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and hold the desired HomeLink® button while you press and re-press ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several sec-

2-80 Instruments and controls

onds upon successful training. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful training. Proceed with "Programming HomeLink®" step 3 to complete. If the device was unplugged during the programming procedure, remember to F plug it back in when programming is completed.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after it is programmed, can be used to activate programmed device. To operate, simply press and release the appropriate programmed HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button.

The Homelink® icon and name will appear above the bimodal switch and a green colored dot with 3 parenthesis will appear in mirror above the button pressed.

- If the programmed device uses a fixed code the green transmitting icon will be solid.

If the programmed device uses a rolling P code the green transmitting icon will flash. For additional information, refer to "Programming Homelink for Canadian Ifid customers and gate openers" in this section. The mirror will exit the transmitting mode when the button is pressed and then released, or when the button is pressed for 20 seconds or longer.

For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

When operating a properly equipped garage door opener, the mirror will indicate with a flashing amber triangle icon in the lower left corner when it has received an Opening (icon pointing up) or Closing (icon pointing down) signal. The mirror will further indicate with a solid green triangle icon in the lower left corner when it has received an Open (icon pointing up) or Closed (icon pointing down) signal from the garage door opener.

NOTE:

the Opening or Closing flashing amber icon will discontinue if the mirror has not receive a subsequent signal from the garage door lo

opener within 30 seconds.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

· replace the hand-held transmitter batteries with new batteries.

- position the hand-held transmitter with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink® surface.

press and hold both the HomeLink® and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption.

position the hand-held transmitter1-3 in (2 - 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not programmed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position - keeping the indicator light in view at all times.

If you continue to have programming difficul-

ties, please contact the INFINITI Consumer verfairs Department. The phone numbers are located in the Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED INFORMATION

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HOMELINK® BUTTON

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

The following procedure clears the pro- To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Trans- grammed information from both buttons. In-ceiver button, complete the following: dividual buttons cannot be cleared. However, 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® additional information, refer to "Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button" in this sec2. The Homelink® icon and TRAINING will appear above the bimodal switch and a

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the Owner's Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information.

To clear all programming:

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink® buttons until the message CLEARING appears next to the Homelink® icon above the bimodal switch and a solid amber colored dot appears in the mirror above the center Homelink® button in approximately 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.

The mirror will indicate the clearing is com-grammed. This procedure will not affect an plete by CLEARED appearing above the bi-other programmed HomeLink® buttons. modal switch and a flashing green dot ap- pearing above the center Homelink® button.

The Homelink® icon and TRAINING will appear above the bimodal switch and flashing amber colored dot will appear above the button being pressed after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink® button, proceed with "Programming HomeLink®" - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515 (except Mexico).

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pressing the HomeLink® button that was just pro-

When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver with your new transmitter information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys 3-2

INFINITI Intelligent Key....3-2

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys 3-4

Doors....3-4

Locking with key 3-5

Locking with inside lock knob Type A (if so equipped)....3-5

Locking with inside lock knob Type B (if so equipped)....3-6

Locking with power door lock switch....3-6

Automatic door locks....3-6 Child safety rear door lock....3-

INFINITI Intelligent Key System 3-7

Operating range 3-9

Door locks/unlocks precaution....3-9

INFINITI Intelligent Key operation....3-10

How to use the remote keyless entry function 3-14

Warning signals 3-18

Troubleshooting guide.... 3-19

Log-in function 3-20

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped).... 3-21

Remote Engine Start operating range 3-21

Remote starting the vehicle 3-22

Extending engine run time 3-22

Canceling a Remote Engine Start 3-22

Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work.... 3-23

Hood 3-24

Liftgate....3-24

Operating the power liftgate 3-25

Motion-Activated Liftgate (if so equipped).... 3-27

Power liftgate main switch 3-29

Liftgate release 3-29

Liftgate position setting 3-30

Automatic operation (if so equipped) .....3-34

Sun visors....3-35

Vanity mirrors.... 3-35

Card holder 3-36

Mirrors 3-36

Manual anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped)....3-36
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped)....3-36
Smart anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped).... 3-37
Outside mirrors 3-39

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) .....3-40

Memory storage function....3-40

Entry/exit function 3-41

Setting memory function 3-42

System operation 3-42

KEYS

1 2 2 3 XXXXX WPD0427

Type A (if so equipped)

1. Intelligent Keys (two sets)
2. Mechanical key
3. Key number plate (one plate)

INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY

Your vehicle can only be driven with the In ligent Keys which are registered to your ve cle's Intelligent Key System components and INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System compon- nents.

LPD2052

Type B (if so equipped)

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered prior to use with the Intelligent Key System and INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to an INFINITI retailer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for duplicates by using the key number. INFINITI does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can I duplicated without knowing the key number.

CAUTION

- Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when driving. The Intelligent Key is a precision device with a built-in transmitter. To avoid damaging it, please note the following:

• The Intelligent Key is water resistant; however, wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
• Do not bend, drop or strike it against another object.

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

• If the outside temperature is below 14°F (-10°C), the battery of the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
• Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in a place where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
• Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
• Do not use a magnet key holder.
• Do not place the Intelligent Key near an electric appliance such as a television set or a personal computer.
• Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come into contact with water or salt water, and do not wash it in a wash machine. This could affect the system function.

SPA1951

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI recommends erasing the ID code of that In lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may preTo install the mechanical key, firmly insert vent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob Key to operate the vehicle. For information returns to the lock position, regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer. Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock

Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot.

For additional information, refer to "Doors" in this section and "Storage" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.

Valet hand-off

When you have to leave a key with a valet, give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the mechanical key with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box from being opened during valet hand-off, follow the procedure below.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical key.
3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and keep the mechanical key with you.

For additional information, refer to "Storage" the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.

DOORS

You can only drive your vehicle using the Intelligent Keys which are registered to the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.

The mechanical key can be used for all the locks.

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can be duplicated without knowing the key number. As many as four INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to the INFINITI retailer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these components will only recognize keys coded into the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.

Any key that is not given to the retailer at When the doors are locked using one of the time of registration will no longer be able following methods, the doors cannot be start your vehicle. opened using the outside door handles. The

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function.

When the doors are locked using one of the following methods, the doors cannot be opened using the outside door handles. The doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

• Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders.
- Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.
- To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows and/or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others and/or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and/or pets.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

① ② ③ LPD2750

Front doors

LOCKING WITH KEY

To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as shown.

Manual

To lock the doors and liftgate, turn the key toward the front of the vehicle.

To unlock the driver's door, turn the key to-ward the rear of the vehicle, then return it to the neutral position.

To unlock all doors and the liftgate, turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle ag within 60 seconds of unlocking the driver's door.

e 1 2 LPD2714

Inside lock

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB TYPE A (if so equipped)

To lock the door without the key, move the inside lock to the lock position, then close the door.

To unlock the door without the key, move th inside lock knob to the unlock position

1 2 3 LPD2713

Inside lock

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB TYPE B (if so equipped)

① ② ① ② SPA2727

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Lockout protection

If the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle while any door is open, all doors will unlock automatically and a warning chime will sound after the door is closed.

This function helps to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

• All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
• All doors unlock automatically when the transmission is placed in the P (Park) position or when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE:

The automatic door unlock function can be changed using "Vehicle Settings" of the lower touch-screen display. For additional information, refer to the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual.

To lock the door without the key, move t inside lock knob to the lock position then close the door.

To unlock the door without the key, move inside lock knob to the unlock position

For front doors, the door can also be un- the door lock switch (driver's or front passen- locked by pulling on the inside handle lever ger's side) to the unlock posit ^2 n one time ^3 .

INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

CHILD BERRY LPD2753

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the LOCK position, the door can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING

• Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
• The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight.
• Before leaving the vehicle, engage the P _P (Park) position and check that the electronic parking brake warning light is illu-

minated to confirm that the electronic parking brake is applied. The electronic parking brake warning light will remain on for a period of time after the driver's door is locked.

• Make sure to engage the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake when parking your vehicle, riding on or off the vehicle or loading luggage. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move or roll away unexpectedly and result in serious personal injury or property damage.
  The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote control function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or course. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.
  Be sure to read the following before using the intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

• Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle.
• Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves. Environmental conditions may

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating "k conditions:

• When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broad casting station.
• When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver or a CB radio.
• When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials.
• When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby.
• When the Intelligent Key is placed near electric appliance such as a personal computer.
• When the vehicle is parked near a park meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery's life is approximately two years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, a "Key Battery Low" indicator illuminates in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display warnings and indicators" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.

For additional information, refer to "Battery replacement" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key:

• Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.
• Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
• Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object.

Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.

• Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
• Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.

- Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, INFINITI recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Top-down line drawing of a car with two sensors and numbered connection points (no text or symbols)

OPERATING RANGE

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm) from each request switch or one touch unlock sensor ①.

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the request switches or the one touch unlock sensor may not function.

If any of the front doors are recently closed and locked, you must wait 2 seconds before you can unlock the door with the one touch unlock sensor. Pulling the handle within 2 seconds of locking the door will allow you

time to confirm that the door has been locked without accidentally unlocking the door with the one touch unlock sensor.

If you pull the door handle with your gloved hand, the one touch unlock sensor operation may not function.

LPD2716

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION

Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used. When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even when the Intelligent Key is within the specified someone who does not carry the Intelligent field operating range from the door handle. Key, to push the request switch or the one request switch or the one touch unlock sensor to lock/unlock the doors. sor ①.

• Within 2 seconds after the doors are locked using the door handle request switch, make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles. If you keep holding the door handle for more than 2 seconds after locking the doors using the door handle request switch, the door will be unlocked.
  To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the key with you before locking the doors and liftgate.
• The Intelligent Key system (opening/closing doors with the door handle request switch or the one touch unlock sensor) can be set to remain inactive. For additional information, refer to the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual.
• The door cannot be unlocked using the one touch unlock operation after locking the door within 2 seconds. To unlock the door, release the one touch unlock sensor once and touch it again.

If a large amount of water runs down on the door handle (for example, when washing the vehicle or in heavy rain), the door may unlock if the Intelligent Key is in range of operation. To prevent the door from being unlocked, the Intelligent Key should be more than 7 ft (2 m) away from the vehicle.
Do not hold and pull the door handle quickly. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.
If you pull the door handle with a gloved hand, the one touch unlock operation may not function.

on ne s in r from will e ed LPD2717

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.

LPD2734

B ©2733 LPD2718

Diagram showing a person standing beside a car with an attached display panel labeled with icons and Chinese text.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you can also unlock the corresponding d you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing by touching the one touch unlock sens® the door handle request switch (driver's or (driver's or front passenger's) within the front passenger's) within the range of operation and unlock the other door by using the door handle request switch (A).

Locking all doors and fuel-filler door

1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
3. Push the door handle request switch (driver's or front passenger's) while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
4. All the doors, liftgate and fuel-filler door will lock.
5. The hazard indicator flashes twice and the outside chime sounds twice.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

LPD2734

NOTE:

• Request switches for all doors and lift-gate can be deactivated when the Lock/Unlock by Door Handle setting is switched to OFF in "Vehicle Settings" of the lower touch-screen display. For additional information, refer to the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual.
• Doors will lock with the Intelligent Key while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
• Doors will not lock with the Intelligent Key while any door is open.

- Doors will not lock by pushing the door. When any door is open, the doors are locked, handle request switch with the Inteli- and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the gent Key inside the vehicle. However, vehicle and all the doors are closed; a chime when an Intelligent Key is inside the vewill sound and the lock will automatically un- hicle, doors can be locked with anotherlock. registered Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

• After locking the doors using the request switch, make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles or the rear liftgate opener switch.
• When locking the doors using the request switch, make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.

The request switch is operational only of when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch to lock the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other

CAUTION

tThe lockout protection may not function under the following conditions:

- When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel.

• When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin.
• When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the door pockets.
• When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or near metallic materials.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

B LPD2733

LPD2734

Unlocking doors and fuel-filler door

1. Touch the one touch unlock senso® (driver's or passenger's door) while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
2. The door handle welcome lights illuminate, the hazard indicator lights flash once and the vehicle beeps once. The corresponding door will unlock.
3. Push the door handle request switch within 1 minute.
4. The hazard indicator flashes once and the vehicle beeps once again. All doors, liftgate and fuel-filler door will unlock.

All doors and the fuel-filler door will lock automatically unless one of the following erations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch or one touch lock operation while the doors are locked.

• Opening any door.
• Pushing the ignition switch.

During this 1-minute time period, if the button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors will be locked automatically after another 1 minute has passed.

NOTE:

The one touch unlock sensor can be deactivated when the Touch Sensitive Door Sensor setting is switched to OFF in "Vehicle Settings" of the lower touch-screen display. For additional information, refer to the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual.

If a door handle is pulled too quickly while unlocking the doors using the one touch unlock sensor, you may be unable to open the door. Returning the door handle to its original position will allow you to open the door.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after unlocking the door(s).

- Opening any door. - Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked.

The interior light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations:

• Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
• Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
• Switching the room light switch to the OFF position.

A LPD2732

Driver's and passenger's side

Door handle welcome lights

NOTE:

The door handle welcome lights and one touch unlock sensor can be deactivated in "Vehicle Settings" in the lower touch-screen display. For additional information, refer to the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions

When you unlock the doors using the Intelliaround the vehicle.

gent Key, request switch or one touch unlock sensor, the door handle welcome light® Will illuminate for a period of time. The wel-

come lights will also illuminate when you open an unlocked door without carrying the Intelligent Key with you. When you lock the doors using the Intelligent Key or request switch, the door handle welcome lights fade out.

The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions:

• When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range.
• When the doors or the rear liftgate are open or not closed securely.
• When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in vehicle.

the LPD2257

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the button on the Intelligent Key.
4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and the horn beeps once.
5. All doors will be locked.

LPD2258

Unlocking doors

1. Press the Button on the Intelligent Key.
2. The hazard indicator lights flash once.
3. The driver's door will be unlocked.
4. Press the 🔒 button again within 60 seconds to unlock all doors.

NOTE:

The unlocking operation can be changed in Selective Door Unlock in "Vehicle Settings" of the lower touch-screen display. For additional information, refer to the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pressing the button:

- Opening any doors.

- Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked.

The light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations:

• Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
• Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.

- Switching the room light switch to the OFF position.

Opening windows

The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously open windows equipped with automatic operation.

To open the windows, press and hold the 🔒 button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressing the 🔒 button on the Intelligent Key.

The door windows cannot be closed by using the Intelligent Key.

Linking the key fob to automatic drive positioner memory (if so equipped)

If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive positioner, the key fob can be linked to a memory setting.

For additional information, refer to "Automatic drive positioner" in this section.

HOLD WPDO414

WPD0415

Releasing the rear liftgate

The rear liftgate can be opened and closed performing the following:

• Press the 📄 button for longer than 0.5 seconds to open the rear liftgate.
• Press the 📋 button again for longer than 0.5 seconds to close the rear lift-gate.

When the button is pressed during the The panic alarm stops when:

open or close process, the liftgate motors will

stop. When the button is pressed again

for longer than 0.5 seconds, the liftgate will reverse direction.

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding the button on the Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on and the headlights will flash for a period of time.

It has run for a period of time, or

II. Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

The request switch on the driver or passenger door or liftgate is pushed and the Intelligent Key is in range of the door handle.

LPD2259

Answer back horn feature

If desired, the answer back horn feature be deactivated using the Intelligent Key. When it is deactivated and the button is pressed, the hazard indicator lights flash twice. When the button is pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights nor the horn operates. However, the headlights will illuminate for 30 seconds.

NOTE:

WARNING SIGNALS

If you change the answer back horn and light help prevent the vehicle from moving un-flash feature with the Intelligent Key, the lower touch-screen display will show the current mode after the ignition switch has been cycled from the OFF to the ON position. "Vehicle Settings" in the lower touch-screen display can also be used to change the answer back horn mode between "Convenience" and "Security" settings. When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and

To deactivate: Press and hold the 🔒 and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

For additional information, refer to the "Troubleshooting guide" in this section and the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual.

The hazard indicator lights will flash three times to confirm that the answer back ho feature has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the 1 and buttons for at least 2 seconds once more.

The hazard indicator lights will flash once and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
When stopping the engine	The When Parked Apply Parking Brake warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.	A door is opened while the P (Park) position is not engaged and the ignition switch is still in the ON position.	Place the ignition switch in the ON position and apply the parking brake. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
When engaging the P (Park) position	The Push Ignition to OFF warning appears in the display.	The ignition switch is in the ON position.	Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
When opening the driver's door to get out of the vehicle	The Door Open warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.	The ignition switch is in the ON position.	Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle	The No Key Detected warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.	The ignition switch is in the ON position.	Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
	The When Parked Apply Parking Brake warning appears on the display and the outside chime sounds continuously.	The ignition switch is in the ON position and the P (Park) position is not engaged.	Apply the parking brake. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
When closing the door with the inside lock knob turned to LOCK	The outside chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds and all the doors unlock.	The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.	Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When pushing the door handle or lift-gate request switch or the 1 button on the Intelligent Key to lock door	The outside chime sounds for approximately 2 seconds.	The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.	Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine	The Key Battery Low warning appears on the display.	The battery charge may be getting low.	Replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to "Battery replacement" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.
	The No Key Detected warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds.	The battery charge may be getting low.	Replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to "Battery replacement" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.
When pushing the ignition switch	The I-Key System Error: See Owner's Manual warning appears on the display.	It warns of a malfunction with the In- it- is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.

LOG-IN FUNCTION

For additional information, refer to the sepa-- Automatic drive positioner (if so rate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual. equipped)

After setting up the user information, the system will automatically recognize the user upon turning on the vehicle.

The log-in function is linked to the following: Engine/transmission features: Steering

There will be a personalized welcome greeting and screen prompt to log in.

- Meter

- Steering

This feature allows four drivers to use their own registration, drive mode, driving position, air conditioner, and auto settings and memorizes these custom settings.

- Audio

- Suspension (if so equipped)

- Navigation system display (if so equipped)

- Active trace control system

- Navigation settings (if so equipped)

- Driver assistance except for the Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with Pedestrian Detection system (if so equipped)

The log-in user can be changed on the wel-- Air conditioner come greeting screen or the User List screen.

· Body Control Module (BCM)

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)

Diagram of a vehicle door panel with labeled icons including lock, lock, car, and car door

LPD2272

The button will be on the INFINITI Intelligent Key if the vehicle has Remote Engine Start. This feature allows the engine to start from outside the vehicle.

The following features may be affected when Remote Engine Start is used:

- Vehicles with an automatic climate control system will default to either a heating or cooling mode depending on outside and cabin temperatures. For additional information, refer to "Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control" in the "Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems" section of this manual.

Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws require a person using Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any requirements,

Other conditions may affect the function of the Remote Engine Start feature. For additional information, refer to "Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work" in this section.

Other conditions can affect the performance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional information, refer to "INFINITI Intelligent Key" in this section.

To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

CAUTION

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or other strong radio wave sources are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.

The Remote Engine Start function can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within th specified operating range from the vehicle.

The Remote Engine Start operating range is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE

To use the Remote Engine Start feature to start the engine perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
2. Press the 🔒 button to lock all doors.
3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the 🔒 button until the turn signal lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the vehicle is not within view press and hold the 🔒 button for at least 2 seconds.

The following events will occur when the engine starts:

• The parking lights will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
• The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on.
• The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend a time for an additional 10 minutes. For additional information, refer to "Extending engine run time" in this section.

Depress and hold the brake then push the push-button ignition switch to the ON posi

tion before driving. For additional information, refer to "Driving the vehicle" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manuc

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME

The Remote Engine Start feature can be extended one time by performing the steps listed in "Remote starting the vehicle" in this section. Run time will be calculated as follows:

The first 10 minute run time will start when the Remote Engine Start function is performed.
The second 10 minutes will start immediately when the Remote Engine Start function is performed again. For example, if the engine has been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added, the engine will run for a total of 15 minutes.

Extending engine run time will bring you to the two Remote Engine Start limit.

A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts, or a single start with an extension, are allowed. For between ignition cycles.

The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position and then back to the OFF position

before the Remote Engine Start procedure - can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE START

To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform one of the following:

Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and press 🔒 until the parking lights turn off.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Cycle the ignition switch ON and then OFF.
• The extended engine run time has expired.
• The first 10 minute timer has expired.

The engine hood has been opened.

The vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.
The ignition switch is pushed without an Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is not depressed.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE START WILL NOT WORK

The Remote Engine Start will not operate if any of the following conditions are present:

• The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
• The hood is not securely closed.
• The hazard indicator lights are on.
• The engine is still running. The engine must be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 seconds if the engine goes from running to off. This is not applicable when extending engine run time.

- The 🔒 button is not pressed and held. The Remote Engine Start may display a warning or indicator in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer for at least 2 seconds.

- The Q button is not pressed and held to the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's within 5 seconds of pressing the lock but ton. Manual.

- The brake is pressed.

- The doors are not closed and locked.

- The liftgate is open.

- The I-Key Indicator Light remains solid in the vehicle information display.

• The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.
• Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, have already been used.
• The vehicle is not in P (Park).
• There is a detected registered key already inside of the vehicle.
  The Remote Engine Start function has been switched to the OFF position in "Vehicle Settings" of the lower touchscreen display. For additional information, refer to the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual.

The Remote Engine Start may display a warning or indicator in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer

do the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual.

HOOD LIFTGATE

1 2 LPD2754

1. Pull the hood lock release hand located below the driver side instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly.
2. Push the lever ② at the front of the hood to the side with your fingertips and raise the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make sure it locks into place.

• Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident.
- If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

WARNING

WARNING

• Always be sure the liftgate has been closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving.
• Do not drive with the liftgate open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For additional information, refer to "Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
• To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapmentinwindowsorinadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
• Always be sure that hands and feet are clear of the door frame to avoid injury while closing the liftgate.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Diagram showing a car inside a curved road with a vehicle icon, labeled LPD2720 (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

Instrument panel switch OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE

WARNING

- Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the liftgate.

A B LPD2755

Liftgate opener switch and request switch

- To help avoid risk of injury and/or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others and/or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and/or pets.

NOTE:

To open, close or reverse the power liftgate engage the P (Park) position. Also, the power liftgate will not operate if battery voltage is low.

Power Open:

The power liftgate automatically moves from the fully closed position to the fully open position in approximately 5 to 8 seconds. The power open feature can be activated by the switch on the Intelligent Key, the instrument panel switch or the liftgate opener switch. A chime sounds to indicate the power open sequence has been started.

When the vehicle is locked, the liftgate can be opened by the instrument panel switch, Intelligent Key and liftgate request switch® (with the Intelligent Key in liftgate operation range). The liftgate will individually unlock and open. Once the liftgate is closed, the vehicle will remain unlocked.

To open the liftgate with the Intelligent Key, hold the button for 0.5 seconds.

- To open the liftgate with the instrument panel switch, hold the button for 0.5 seconds.

- To open the liftgate with the liftgate opener switch Ⓐ, the liftgate must be unlocked and without the Intelligent Key in liftgate range.

LPD2756

Liftgate close switch

Power Close:

The power liftgate automatically moves from instrument panel or liftgate opener switch the fully open position to the secondary poor liftgate request switch is pressed again. sition. When the liftgate reaches the second ary position, the cinching motor engages and pulls the liftgate to its primary latch position. Power close takes approximately 7 to 10 seconds. The power close feature can be activated by the switch on the Intelligent Key the instrument panel and the liftgate close tion will stop and the liftgate will enter switch ©. A chime sounds to indicate the manual mode. power close sequence has been started.

• If the liftgate opener switch A is activated while the cinching motor is engaged, the cinching motor will disengage and release the latch and the liftgate will open.
• The Intelligent Key button must be held for 0.5 seconds before the liftgate closes.
• The liftgate close switch© can only be used to close the liftgate if the power liftgate main switch is in the ON position.

Stop - Reverse:

During the open/close movement, the lift-gate can be stopped if the Intelligent Key, instrument panel or liftgate opener switch or liftgate close switch is pressed. The liftgate can be reversed if the Intelligent Key,

instrument panel or liftgate opener switch or liftgate request switch is pressed again. Auto Reverse:

If an obstacle is detected during power open or power close, a warning chime will sound and the liftgate will reverse direction and re-turn to the full open or full close position. If

Second obstacle is detected, the liftgate motion will stop and the liftgate will enter manual mode.

A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch strip during power close, the liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full open position.

NOTE:

If the pinch strip is damaged or removed, power close function will not operate.

WARNING

There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the liftgate.

the the LPD2721

Manual Mode:

If power operation is not available, the lift-to-gate may be operated manually. Power operation may not be available if multiple ob-lstacles have been detected in a single power cycle or if battery voltage is low.

If the power liftgate opener switch Ⓐ is pushed during power open or close, the power operation will be canceled and the liftgate can be operated manually.

To open the liftgate manually, unlock the doors, press the liftgate opener switchⒶ and lift the liftgate.

To close, lower and push the liftgate down securely.

MOTION-ACTIVATED LIFTGATE (if so equipped)

The liftgate can be operated using a quick kicking motion under the center of the rear bumper.

To operate, the Intelligent Key must be within 31.5 in (80 cm) of the liftgate.

NOTE:

Tow hitches are available as an accessory for this vehicle. If a tow hitch is installed, the liftgate electronic control unit (ECU) needs to be replaced with an ECU programmed with towing logic for the Motion-Activated Liftgate to function properly.

Line drawing of a car's rear side with a black arrow labeled 'OK' indicating a warning or status point (no other text or symbols)

Activation zone

Proper operation technique

• While at the rear of the vehicle, begin making a quick forward kicking motion.
• Raise your foot straight under the center of the rear bumper then immediately return your foot to the ground in a continuous motion.
• The kicking motion should be straight, smooth and consistent.
• After your kick motion is complete, step back and allow the liftgate to open/close.

Wait 2 sec After Kick LPD2766

Front view of a car with a large 'X' symbol above the rear, and two legs below (no text or symbols on the car itself)

DO: Quick forward kick and return while the NOT: Swing foot side to side or pause key fob is within range during kick

Three beeps will sound and the liftgate will begin moving within two seconds after the kick.

CAUTION

Before performing the kicking motion, steady your stance to prevent any loss of balance. Also, while making the kicking motion, take caution around hot exhaust system parts. Otherwise, there may be danger of injury.

WARNING

Prevent unintentional liftgate opening/closing. There may be conditions when opening/closing the liftgate is not desired. Keep the Intelligent Key out of range of the liftgate, (31.5 in or 80 cm), when washing or working around the back of the vehicle.

CAUTION

• Interference or malfunction can be caused by parking in close proximity to radio or satellite towers.
• Intelligent Key interference could be caused if you have your key fob stored nexttoyourcellphoneoranyRF-enabled smart card. For additional information, refer to "INFINITI Intelligent Key" in this section.

ON OFF A B

LPD2723

POWER LIFTGATE MAIN SWITCH

The power liftgate operation can be turned ON A or OFF B by the power liftgate main switch located in the glove box.

When the power liftgate main switch is pushed to the OFF position, the power operation is not available by the power liftgate switch or liftgate request switch on the liftgate.

Power operation is only available when the power liftgate main switch is in the OFF position by pushing the instrument panel switch or pressing the liftgate button on the key fob.

Motion-Activated Liftgate (if so equipped) will not function when the power liftgate main switch is in the OFF position.

LIFTGATE RELEASE

A WARNING

• Always be sure the liftgate has been closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving.
- Do not drive with the liftgate open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For additional information, refer to "Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
- To avoid personal injury, do not attempt to activate the power liftgate if one or both of the liftgate struts are removed.

CAUTION

• If the power liftgate does not stay open or if the liftgate unexpectedly closes at any time while a continuous warning chime sounds, do not operate the lift-gate. There may be a pressure loss in one or both of the liftgate struts. It is recommended that you have the liftgate inspected. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
• Do not activate the power liftgate if one or both of the liftgate struts are removed. Damage to the liftgate or power liftgate mechanisms may occur.
• Keep the power liftgate mainswitch (if so equipped) in the OFF position when washing or working around the back of the vehicle (with Intelligent Key) to prevent inadvertent opening/closing.

A B LPD2749

Power liftgate release

LPD2722

LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING

If the liftgate cannot be opened with the instrument panel switch, liftgate opener switch or key fob due to a discharged bo follow these steps:

The liftgate can be set to open to a specific height (garage mode) by performing the fol- flowing:

1. Remove the cove ^A on the inside of the liftgate.
2. Move the level® as illustrated to open the liftgate.

It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer as soon as possible for repair.

1. Open the liftgate using the request switch or the Intelligent Key.
2. Pull the liftgate down and move to the desired height position (the liftgate will have some resistance when being manually adjusted).

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

1. Press and hold the power liftgate close switch ⑧ located on the liftgate for more than 3 seconds or until two beeps are heard.

The liftgate will open to the selected position setting. To change the position of the liftgate, repeat steps 1-3.

s on te, LPD2725

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

The fuel-filler door automatically unlocks when the driver's door is unlocked.

1. Unlock the fuel-filler door using one of the following operations:

2. Unlock the driver's door with the Intelligent Key.

3. Push the power door lock switch to the unlock position.

- Touch the one touch unlock sensor (driver's or front passenger's) while carrying the Intelligent Key with you. For additional information, refer to "Locking all doors and fuel-filler door" in this section.

1. To open the fuel-filler door, push the right side of the fuel-filler door to release.

To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely and lock the doors.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

• Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosiveunder certain conditions. You couldbe burnedor seriously injuredif it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

• Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

• Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL) to come on.

• Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.
• Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers:
• Always place the container on the ground when filling.
• Do not use electronic devices when filling.
• Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it.
• Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For additional information, refer to "Fuel recommendation" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
The Loose Fuel Capwarning message will be displayed if the fuel-filler cap is not properly tightened. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly after the Loose Fuel Cap warning is displayed may cause the Mal-function Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. If the light illuminates because the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

• For additional information, refer to "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
• If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.

Line drawing of a car's seatbelt assembly with labeled component A (no text or symbols beyond label)

B Loose Fuel Cap A LPD2786

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove.
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder ① while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard.

Loose Fuel Cap warning

The Loose Fuel Cap warning will appear in the vehicle information display when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for the message to be displayed. To turn off the warning, perform the

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon as possible. For additional information, refer to "Fuel-filler cap" in this section.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it a single click is heard.

3. Press the ☐ button Ⓐ on the steering wheel for about 1 second to turn of the Loose Fuel Cap warning message in the vehicle information display.

STEERING WHEEL

① ② ③ LPD2728

Tilt and telescopic operation Pull the lock level ^① down:

• Adjust the steering wheel up or down direction ② to the desired position.
• Adjust the steering wheel forward or backward in direction③ to the desired position.

Push the lock level① up firmly to lock the steering wheel in place.

LPD2752

Tilt and telescopic operation

To adjust the steering wheel move the switch in① in the following directions:

- Adjust the steering wheel up or down in direction ② to the desired tilt position.

- Adjust the steering wheel forward or backward in direction③ to the desired telescopic position.

Entry/Exit function (if so equipped)

The automatic drive positioner system will make the steering wheel move up automatically when the driver's door is opened and the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. This lets the driver get into and out of the seat more easily. The steering wheel moves back into position when the driver's door is closed and the ignition switch is pushed.

For additional information, refer to "Automatic drive positioner" in this section.

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

SUN VISORS

graph TD
    A["Step 1: Rear wing"] --> B["Step 2: Rear handle"]
    B --> C["Step 3: Rear handle"]

1. To block glare from the front, swing down the sun viso ^1 .
2. To block glare from the side, remove sun visor from the center mount and swing the visor to the side.
3. Slide the extension③ sun visor in or out as needed.

CAUTION

• Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original position.
• Do not pull the extension sun visor forcibly downward.

Diagram of a vehicle interior with a rectangular frame and directional arrow, no text or symbols present

Driver's and passenger's side VANITY MIRRORS

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun viso down and flip open the mirror cover. The vanity mirror will illuminate when the mirror cover is open.

MIRRORS

Simple line drawing of a mechanical component with an arrow indicating downward motion (no text or symbols)

Driver's and passenger's side CARD HOLDER

To use the card holder, slide card into the Do not view information while operating the vehicle.

2 1 WPDO126

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

Use the night position ① to reduce glare from the headlights of vehicles behind you night.

Use the day position when driving in daylight hours.

LPD0469 1 2 1

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims during night time conditions and according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

WARNING

Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensors or apply glass cleaner to the sensors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper operation.

The indicator light ^② will illuminate when the automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature press the O button. The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature, press the | button again. The indicator light will turn on.

For additional information on HomeLink® Universal Transceiver operation, refer to "HomeLink® Universal Transceiver" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.

g s, 2 1 LPD2525

SMART ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

NOTE:

To use the Smart mirror position and to use the regular mirror position.

The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically dims according to the intensity of the headlights of the vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The mirror will store the settings for all main menu selections in the memory after every button release and will be used at the time - the startup. The mirror will exit to the main menu if none of the MENU, -, or + buttons pressed for about 5 seconds. The mirror will also enter the BRIGHTNESS adjustment if the MENU button is pressed and display mode is active.

MENU:

· BRIGHTNESS:

• The mirror will continually decrease the display brightness (until reaching the minimum) while the - button is pressed during the BRIGHTNESS adjustment.
• The mirror will continually increase the display brightness (until reaching the maximum) while the + button is pressed during the BRIGHTNESS adjustment.

DOWN/UP:

- The mirror will continually move the display view down (until reaching the lowest view) while the - button is pressed during the DOWN/UP adjustment.

- The mirror will continually move the display view down (until reaching the highest view) while the + button is pressed during the DOWN/UP adjustment.

- LEFT/RIGHT

- The mirror will continually move the display view left (until reaching the left most view) while the - button is pressed during the LEFT/RIGHT adjustment. - The mirror will continually move the display view right (until reaching the right most view) while the + button is pressed during the LEFT/RIGHT adjustment.

- ROTATION:

• The mirror will continually rotate the display view counterclockwise (until reaching the furthest counterclockwise view) while the - button is pressed during the ROTATION adjustment.
• The mirror will continually rotate the display view clockwise (until reaching the furthest clockwise view) while the + button is pressed during the ROTATION adjustment.

· INDICATION:

- The mirror will enable the displaying of a HomeLink® house icon over each HL button, MENU over the menu button, and AVM (if so equipped) over the + button while in display mode if the - button is pressed during the INDICATION selection. - The mirror will disable the displaying of the HomeLink® house icon over each HL button, MENU over the menu button, and AVM (if so equipped) over the + button while in display mode if the + button is pressed during the INDICATION selection.

DIMMING MIRROR:

- The mirror will dim the interior and exterior mirrors in response to glare when the mirror mode is active and the DIMMING MIRROR selection is ON. - The mirror will dim the exterior mirrors in response to glare when the display mode is active and the DIMMING T MIRROR selection is ON. - The mirror will clear automatic dimming of the interior and exterior mirrors when the DIMMINGMIRROR selection is OFF.

• The mirror will clear automatic dimming of the interior and the exterior mirrors when the ignition is OFF.
• The mirror will clear automatic dimming of the interior mirror when the display mode is active.
• The mirror will change the dimming of the exterior mirrors to account for the presence or absence of privacy glass.
• The mirror will enable the interior and exterior mirrors functionality if the - button is pressed during the DIM-MING MIRROR selection.
• The mirror will disable both the interior and the exterior mirrors functionality if the + button is pressed during the DIMMING MIRROR selection.
• The mirror will exit the main menu if the MENU button is pressed during the DIMMING MIRROR selection and the vehicle is not in Park.
  For information on HomeLink® Universal Transceiver operation, refer to the "HomeLink® Universal Transceiver" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.

① ② SPA2739

WARNING

• Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.
• Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

Line drawing of a boat hull with visible hull, hull, and side cables (no text or symbols)

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Move the small switch ^① to select the left or right mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position using the large switch ^② . Move the small switch ^① to the center (neutral) position to prevent accidentally moving the mirror.

Manual folding outside mirrors

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so equipped)

The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both outside mirror surfaces downward to provide better rear visibility close to the vehicle when the mirror control switch is in either the L or position.

The mirrors automatically return to their original position when you shift out of R (Reverse).

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if so equipped)

The outside mirror surfaces will return to The automatic drive positioner system has their original position when one of the fol- two features: lowing conditions has occurred: Memory storage function

- The shift lever is moved to any position other than R (Reverse).

- Memory storage function

- The outside mirror control switch is set to the neutral or center position.

- Entry/exit function

- The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE:

If the outside mirror control switch is in the center position, the mirror surface will NOT turn downward when the shift lever is moved to R (Reverse).

For additional information, refer to "Automatic drive positioner" in this section.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

The electric control type outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. Push the rear window defroster switch to activate the heating function. Push the switch again to deactivate, or the heating function will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.

Line drawing of a car door with a close-up inset showing the control panel (no text or symbols)

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver's seat, steering column, and outside mirrors can be stored in the automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these procedures to use the memory system.

1. Place the ignition in the ON position (the vehicle should be stopped while setting the memory).
2. Adjust the driver's seat, steering column, and outside mirrors to the desired positions by manually operating each adjusting switch. For additional information, refer to "Seats" in the "Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

system" section of this manual, and "Steering wheel" and "Outside mirrors" this section.

Linking log-in function to a stored memory position

For additional information, refer to the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual and "Log-in function" in this section.

1. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, push the memory switch (1 or 2).
2. The indicator light for the pushed memory switch will come on and stay on for approximately 5 seconds.
3. The chime will sound if the memory has been stored.

The log-in function can be linked to a stored

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

nory position with the following proce-

This system is designed so that the driver's seat and automatic operation steering column will automatically move when you the vehicle is engaged in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get into and out of the driver's seat more easily.

NOTE:

NOTE:

Make sure the Intelligent Keys are far apart

The driver's seat will slide backward and the steering column will move up:

If a new memory position is stored in the Otherwise, the vehicle same memory switch, the previous memory wrong Intelligent Key.

position will be overwritten by the new stored position.

Confirming memory storage

- Push the SET switch.

- If a memory position has been stored in the switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light for the respective switch will stay ON for3, approximately 5 seconds.

- Push the SET switch. - If a memory position has been stored in the switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light for the respective switch will stay ON for 3, approximately 5 seconds.

1. Adjust the position of the driver's seat, steering column and outside mirrors. For additional information, refer to "Seats" in the "Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section of this manual, and "Steering wheel" and "Outside mirrors" in this section.

- When the driver's door is opened with the ignition switch placed in the OFF position. - When the ignition is switched OFF with the driver's door open. The driver's seat and steering wheel will return to the previous position:

Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.

When the ignition is switched ON while the vehicle is engaged in the P (Park) position.

The next time you log in (selecting the user on position. the display) after placing the ignition switch The entry/exit function can be adjusted or the ON position while carrying the Intelligent-anceled through "Vehicle Settings" in the Key, the system will automatically adjust to lower touch-screen display by performing the the memorized driving position. following:

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

- Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to To use the memory function, set the climate recognition systems" section of this manual OFF. navigation and audio systems to the driver's or the separate Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's preferred settings. Lock the doors with the Manual.

Switch the Exit Steering UP from ON to OFF. Intelligent Key. Each Intelligent Key may be set with the driver's individual preferences. SYSTEM OPERATION

Restarting the entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if fuse opens, the stored memory positions will be lost and some of the functions will be restricted:

1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h).

OR

1. Open and close the driver's door more than two times with the ignition switch in the OFF position.

The entry/exit function should now work properly.

SETTING MEMORY FUNCTION

The position of the following settings can be linked to the Intelligent Key and the memorized settings can be available for each Intelligent Key.

• Climate control system
• Navigation system (if so equipped)
• Audio system

3-42 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

the memorized settings are available.

To engage the memorized settings, perform the following:

1. Carry the Intelligent Key that is linked to the memorized settings.
2. Unlock the doors by pushing the driver's door handle request switch or the button on the Intelligent Key.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. The settings linked to the Intelligent Key will start.

For additional information on using the climate control system, refer to "Heater and air conditioner (automatic)" in the "Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems" section of this manual.

For additional information, refer to the "Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

When the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h) or 4 mph (7km/h) for some limited functions such as linking a key fob to the meter when the power source is turned on from off or during the exit function.
When any of the memory switches are pushed while the automatic drive positioner is operating.
When the adjusting switch for the driver's seat and steering column is turned on while the automatic drive positioner is operating.
When the seat has already been moved to the memorized position.
- When no seat position is stored in the memory switch.
- When the shift lever is moved from P (Park) to any other position.

3-42 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual....4-2

RearView Monitor (if so equipped) 4 - 3

RearView Monitor system operation .....4-4

How to read the displayed lines....4-5

Difference between predicted and actual distances 4 - 5

How to park with predicted course lines.....4-7

Adjusting the screen....4-9

How to turn on and off predicted course lines 4-9

RearView Monitor system limitations .....4-9

System maintenance 4-10

Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) .....4-11

Around View® Monitor system operation .... 4-12

Difference between predicted and actual distances 4-17

How to park with predicted course lines.....4-18

How to switch the display 4-20

Around View® Monitor settings .....4-20

Adjusting the screen.... 4-21

Around View® Monitor system limitations 4-22

System maintenance 4-24

Camera Aiding Sonar (parking sensor)

(if so equipped)....4-24

Sonar System Operation 4-25

Turning ON and OFF the sonar function .....4-26

Sonar system limitations.... 4-27

System maintenance 4-28

Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so

equipped) 4-29

MOD system operation....4-30

Turning MOD on and off 4-32

MOD system limitations 4-32

System maintenance 4-33

Vents 4-34

Heater and air conditioner (automatic) 4-35

Automatic operation 4-36

Manual operation 4-37

Operating tips....4-38

CLIMATE setting screen....4-39

Rear climate control (if so equipped) .....4-41

Heater and air conditioner settings....4-42

Servicing air conditioner 4-42

USB/iPod® charging ports 4-43

Antenna 4-43

Car phone or CB radio....4-44

INFINITI INTOUCH™ OWNER'S MANUAL

Refer to the Infiniti InTouch ^TM Owner's Manual that includes the following information.

• Infiniti InTouch™ Services
• Navigation system (if so equipped)
• Audio system
• Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system
• Viewing information
• Other settings
  • Voice recognition (if so equipped)
• General system information

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)

Diagram of car interior with labeled navigation controls and a menu icon, showing dashboard and steering wheel layout.

1. Upper touch-screen display (upper display)

2. MENU button

3. Lower touch-screen display (lower display)

4. 📋/2 button

A WARNING

• Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.
• RearView Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly.
• The system is designed as an aid to the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
• The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

A CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle in the upbe touch-screen display (upper display) when the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position. When activating the RearView Monitor, the guide lines, the icons and the messages may not be displayed immediately. The radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active.

Line drawing of a car exterior view with no visible text or symbols

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located just above the vehicle's license plate ^① .

With the engine running, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor. When activating the RearView Monitor, the guide lines, the icons and the messages may not be displayed immediately.

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

①②③④ ⑤ ⑥ A LHA1196

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle wide and distances to objects with reference to the vehicle body line are displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

• Red line ①: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
• Yellow line ②: approx. 3 ft (1 m)
• Green line③: approx. 7 ft (2 m)
• Green line④: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide line⑤

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Predicted course lines ^6

illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

Indicate the predicted course when backing up. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. When activating the Rear-View Monitor, the guide lines, the icons and the messages may not be displayed immediately. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.

The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Diagram showing a car on a slope next to an open arch with a black rectangle, no text or symbols present.

Backing up on a steep uphill

A4645 LHA1201

Backing up on a steep downhill

Technical diagram showing mechanical components and a car impact test setup with labeled parts A and B

Backing up near a projecting object

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the predicted course lines do not touch distance guide lines and the vehicle width distance guide lines and the vehicle width the object in the display. However, the vehicle guide lines are shown closer than the actual guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the upper display closer than it appears on the upper display.

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

C B A C A B LHA4646

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position Ⓐ is shown farther than the position Ⓑ in the display. However, the position Ⓐ is actually at the same distance as the position ⒀. The vehicle may hit the object

when backing up to the position ^A if the object projects over the actual backing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

WARNING

• If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
• On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line.
• If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:

- Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running.

• Drive the vehicle on a straight road more than 5 minutes.
• When the steering wheel is turned with theignitionswitchintheONposition,the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

Diagram of a mechanical or structural component with labeled point A, showing internal curved and layered features (no text or symbols present)

Top-down line drawing of a car on an elevated ramp, with two vertical supports below (no text or symbols)

. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen when the shift lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position. When activating the RearView Monitor, the

guide lines, the icons and the messages may not be displayed immediately.

B C D B C LHA1198

1. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted course lines Ⓑ enter the parking space ⓒ.

2. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide line parallel to the parking space while referring to the predicted course lines.

3. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, press the Park button located near the shift lever to place the vehicle in the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Display Settings Brightness Contrast Black Level Tint Color Reset Settings Check surroundings for safety.

LHA4243

The RearView Monitor settings can be changed with the following procedure on upper display.

1. Press the MENU button while the Red View Monitor screen is shown on the upper display.
2. Touch the "Settings" key and then the "Camera/Sonar" key.
3. Touch the "Display" key. Select a preferred item, "Brightness", "Tint", "Color", "Contrast" and "Black Level" of the Rear-

View Monitor and adjust the value by touching the "+" or "-" key. Touch "Reset Settings" to return all settings to default.

You can also press the 🎋 button and either turn or move the INFINITI controller to adjust the day/night settings. Pressing the ⚙️ button again will switch the screen to AUTO mode. While the adjustment screen is shown on the upper display you can also touch either "+" or "-" key.

The upper and lower display screens can be turned on or off by pressing and holding the ⏻/D button.

NOTE:

Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color, Contrast and Black Level of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF PREDICTED COURSE LINES

To toggle on and off the predicted course lines while in the P (Park) position:

1. Press the MENU button.
2. Touch the "Settings" key.

3. Touch the "Camera/Sonar" key.

4. Touch the "Camera" key.

5. Touch the "Predicted Course Lines" key to turn the feature on or off. When the predicted course lines are turned on, the indicator light is on.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

A WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

• The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show every object.
• Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small objects below the bumper, and may not show objects close to the bumper or on the ground.

• Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.

• Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.

• Use the displayed lines as a reference. The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and road grade.
• Make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when backing up.
• Do not put anything on the rearview camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate.
• When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
• Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:

• When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects.
  : When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
• Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.
• The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
• The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.

- Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment.

- There may be a delay when switching between views.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the camera, the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera

- Do not use wax on the camera lens. W off any wax with a clean cloth dampen with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

Line drawing of a car rear view with labeled components (no text or symbols on the car itself)

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
• Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera ①, the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR (if so equipped)

Diagram of car interior with labeled navigation panels and control buttons, including a camera and directional indicator.

1. Upper touch-screen display (upper display)

2. Lower touch-screen display (lower display)

3. MENU button

4. *2 CAMERA button

WARNING

• Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for the proper use of the Around View® Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.
• The Around View® Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation because it has areas where objects cannot be viewed. The four corners of the vehicle in particular, are areas where objects do not always appear in the bird's-eye, front, or rear views. Always check your surroundings to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly.
• The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.

The Around View® Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.

The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle in a split screen format. Not all views are available at all times.

re- Available views:

• Front View An approximately 150-degree view of the front of the vehicle.
• Rear View An approximately 150-degree view of the rear of the vehicle.
• Bird's-Eye View The surrounding views of the vehicle from above.
• Front-Side View The view around and ahead of the front passenger's side wheel.
• Front-Wide View An approximately 180-degree view of the front the vehicle.
• Rear-Wide View
• An approximately 180-degree view of the rear of the vehicle.

nat. LHA4554

To display the multiple views, the Around View® Monitor system uses cameras located in the front grille, on the vehicle's outside mirrors and one just above the vehicle's license plate①.

With the engine running, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press the 📄 CAMERA button to operate the Around View® Monitor. When activating the Around View® Monitor, the guide lines, the icons and the messages may not be displayed immediately.

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When the camera is first activated with the bird's-eye view in the display, a red icon will flash on the upper display. This indicates that the sonar system is activated. For additional information on the front and rear sonar system, refer to "Front and rear sonar system" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Available views

WARNING

• The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. The apparent distance viewed on the monitor may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.
• Use the displayed lines and the bird's-eye view as a reference. The lines and the bird's-eye view are greatly affected by the number of occupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road condition and road grade.
• If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines and the bird's-eye view may be displayed incorrectly.

When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are further than they appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they appear.

• Objects in the rear view will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the monitor and outside mirrors.
• Use the mirrors or actually look to properly judge distances to other objects.
• On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course lines and the actual course line.

The vehicle width and predicted course lines are wider than the actual width of course.

The displayed lines will appear slightly off to the right, because the rearview camera is not installed in the rear cen of the vehicle.

ts ⑥ ④③②① A SAA1840

Front view

Front and rear view nd

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate vehicle width and distance to objects with reference to the vehicle body line are displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:

• Red line ①: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
• Yellow line ②: approximately 3 ft (1 m)
  · Green line③: approximately 7 ft (2 m)
• Green line④: approximately 10 ft (3 m)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

①②③④ ⑤ ⑥ A SAA1896

Rear view

Vehicle width guide lines:

Indicate the approximate vehicle width when backing up.

Predicted course line:

Indicate the predicted course when operating the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and may not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.

The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straight-ahead position, both the right and left predicted course lines ⑥ are displayed. When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn.

the 1 2 3 3 4 LHA4534

Front view

Bird's-eye view

The bird's-eye view shows the overhead view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle position and the predicted course to a parking space.

The vehicle icon shows the position of the vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between objects viewed in the bird's-eye view may differ somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover are indicated in black.

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1 2 3 3 4 LHA4535

Rear view

The non-viewable area② is highlighted in yellow for several seconds after the bird's-eye view is displayed. It will be shown only first time after the ignition switch is placed the ON position.

In addition, the non-viewable corners are displayed in red and will blink for the first 3 seconds ③ to remind the drivers to be cautious.

Predicted course lines ④ indicate the predicted course when operating the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the neutral position.

When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the neutral position, the two green predicted course lines are shown in front of the vehicle.

When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, one green predicted course line is shown in front of the vehicle and the other predicted course line is shown at the side of the vehicle.

When the monitor displays the rear view, the predicted course lines are shown at the back of the vehicle.

- A line on the ground may be misaligned and is not seen as being straight at the seam of the views. The misalignment will increase as the line proceeds away from the vehicle.

WARNING

in Objects in the bird's-eye view will appear further than the actual distance.

- Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of the views.

- Objects that are above the camera cannot be displayed.

- The view of the bird's-eye view may be misaligned when the camera position alters.

① ② ③ LHA2652

Front-side view

1 2 3 4 5 LHA4555

Front-wide view

1 2 3 4 5 LHA4556

Rear-wide view

Guiding lines

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line ^① shows the front part of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line② shows the approximate vehicle width including the outside mirrors.

The extensions③ of both the front① and side ② lines are shown with a green dotted line.

Front-wide and rear-wide view

The front-wide and rear-wide views show wider area on the entire screen and allow the checking of the blind corners on right left sides. The rear-wide view displays an approximately 180-degree area while the front-view and rear-view display an approximately 150-degree area. The predicted course lines are not displayed when using front-wide and rear-wide view.

Distance guide lines

d indicates distances from the vehicle body: and Red line ①: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m) · Yellow line ②: approximately 3 ft (1 m) · Green line ③: approximately 7 ft (2 m) · Green line ④: approximately 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide line ^5

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

e or to d on- LHA4644

LHA4645

Backing up on a steep uphill

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actuguide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the upper display closer than it appears on the upper display.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

LHA1201

A4646 C B A C A B

Backing up near a projecting object Backing up behind a projecting The predicted course lines ^A do not touch object

the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual position (B) is shown farther than the position (C) in the display. However, the position (C) is actually at the same distance as

sition Ⓐ is actually at the same distance as the positionA. The vehicle may hit the object

when backing up to the position ^A if the object projects over the actual backing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES

WARNING

• If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
• On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line.
• If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:

- Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running.

- Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.

- When the steering wheel is turned with theignitionswitch in the ON position, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Top-down diagram of a car under two different parking scenarios, showing structural changes and parking details (no text or symbols)

the guide lines, the icons and the messages may not be displayed immediately.

Technical diagram showing two car parking or pavement installation scenarios with labeled points A, B, C, D.

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on the screen when the shift lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position. When activating the Around View® Monitor,

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the predicted course lines Ⓑ enter the parking space ⓒ.

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide line parallel

to the parking space© while referring to the predicted course lines. If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, available views are:

1. When the vehicle is parked in the space, Front view/bird's-eye view split screen completely, press the Park button located near the shift lever to place the vehicle in the P (Park) position and apply Front-wide view the parking brake. If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

With the ignition switch in the ON position press the ☐ CAMERA button or with the engine running, move the shift lever to the (Reverse) position to operate the Around View® Monitor.

The Around View® Monitor displays different split screen views depending on the position of the shift lever. When activating the Around View® Monitor, the guide lines, the icons and the messages may not be displayed immediately. Press the 📄 CAMERA button or touch the "Change View" key to switch between the available views. If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the available views are:

• Rear view/bird's-eye view split screen
• Rear view/front-side view split screen
• Rear-wide view

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

the Camera/Sonar Settings Camera Sonar Display LHA4265

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR ® SETTINGS

To set up the Around View® Monitor to your preferred settings, press the MENU button, select the "Settings" key, then select the "Camera/Sonar" key on the lower display then select the "Camera" key. For additional information about the sonar, refer to "Camera aiding sonar (parking sensor)" in this section. For information about the Display screen adjustment, refer to "Adjusting the screen" in this section.

Designs and items displayed on the screen may vary depending on model.

Camera Back-up Collision Intervention ●ON Moving Object Detection ○ON MOD Volume - Mid + Non-viewable Area Reminder ●ON Predictive Course Lines ●ON Automatic Display with Sonar ●ON LHA4557

MOD Volume:

Adjusts the MOD volume between High, Mid or Low by touching the "+" or "-" key on the display screen. This feature is only available when "Moving Object Detection" is on.

Non-viewable Area Reminder:

With this item turned to ON, the non-viewable area is highlighted in yellow for seven seconds after the bird's-eye view is displayed. It will only be shown the first time after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

Display Settings Brightness Contrast Black Level Tint Color Front Reset Settings

LHR Predicted Course Lines:

Back-up Collision Intervention:

When this item is turned to ON, the predicted ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

Turns ON or OFF the Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) system. For additional information

tion, refer to "Backup Collision Intervention A (BCI)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Moving Object Detection (MOD):

When this item is turned to ON, the MOD ^1 activated. When this item is turned to OFF (indicator turns off), the MOD system is deactivated.

course lines are displayed in the front view, rear view and bird's-eye view.

Automatic Display with Sonar:

When this item is turned to ON, the camera view is automatically shown on the display in the case that the distance to the objects measured by the sonar is becoming short.

The Around View® Monitor settings can be changed with the following procedure on the upper display.

ra1. Press the MENU button while the in Around View® Monitor screen is shown on the upper display.

1. Touch the "Settings" key and then the "Camera/Sonar" key.
2. Touch the "Display" key. Select a preferred item, "Brightness", "Tint", "Color", "Contrast" and "Black Level" of the Around View® Monitor and adjust the value by touching the "+" or "-" key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Touch "Reset Settings" to return all settings to default.

You can also press and hold the ☐ CAMERA button and either turn or move the INFINITI controller to the left or the right to adjust the day/night settings. Press-ing and holding the ☐ CAMERA button again will switch the screen to AUTO mode. While the adjustment screen is shown on the upper display you can also touch either "+" or "-" key.

NOTE:

Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color, Contrast and Black Level of the Around View® Monitor while the vehicle is moving Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

① the . e or ② LHA4348

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for AroundView®Monitor.Failuretooperatethe vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

• Do not use the Around View® Monitor with the outside mirrors in the stored position, and make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when operating the vehicle using the Around View® Monitor.
• The apparent distance between objects viewed on the Around View® Monitor differs from the actual distance.
• The cameras are installed on the front grille, the outside mirrors and above the rear license plate. Do not put anything on the vehicle that covers the cameras.
• When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the cameras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
• Do not strike the cameras. They are precision instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

There are some areas where the system will not show objects and the system does not warn of moving objects. When in the front or rear view display, an object below the bumper or on the ground may not be viewed. When in the bird's-eye view, a tall object near the seam of the camera viewing areas will not appear in the monitor.

The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:

• There may be a delay when switching between views.
• When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly.
• When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
• The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
• The colors of objects on the Around View® Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.

Objects on the Around View® Monitor may not be clear and the color of the object may differ in a dark environment.

There may be differences in sharpness between each camera view of the bird's-eye view.

Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

Check surroundings for safety. Front P/Δ MOD Charge View LHA4570

System temporarily unavailable

When the "!" icon is displayed on the screen, there are abnormal conditions in the Around View® Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Check surroundings for safety. MOD Front MOD Change View LHA4571

When the "[X]" icon is displayed on the screen, the camera image may be receiving temporary electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected. It is recommended that you visit INFINITI retailer for this service.

Line drawing of a car with a triangular roof and labeled point 1 (no text or symbols on the car itself)

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner an clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
• Do not damage the cameras as the motor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the cameras ^① , the Around View ^® Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

CAMERA AIDING SONAR (parking sensor) (if so equipped)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the sonar function as outlined in this section could result in serious injury or death.

• The sonar is a convenience feature. It is not a substitute for proper parking.
• This function is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
• The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers.
• Always look around and check that it is safe to move before parking.
• Read and understand the limitations of to the sonar as contained in this section.

The sonar function helps to inform the driver of large stationary objects around the vehicle when parking by issuing an audible and visual alert.

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Diagram of car interior with labeled parts including steering wheel, dashboard, and navigation controls

1. Upper touch-screen display (upper display)

2. Sonar indicator

3. CAMERA button

4. Lower touch-screen display (lower display)

5. MENU button

The system gives the tone for front objects when the shift lever is in the "D" (Drive) position and both front and rear objects when the shift lever is in the "R" (Reverse) position.

When the camera image is shown on the upper display, the system shows the sonar indicator regardless of the shift lever position.

The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

The colors of the sonar indicators and the distance guide lines in the front, front-wide, rear, and rear-wide views indicate different distances to the object.

When the objects are detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking and the rate of the tone increase.

When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an object is detected by only the corner sonar and the distance does not change.

The tone will stop when the object is no longer near the vehicle.

Check surroundings for safety. Front MCD Change View B A C LHA4559

Sonar Sonar FR Sensor Only Interrupt Display Sonar Sensitivity Sonar Volume LHA4273

TURNING ON AND OFF THE SONAR FUNCTION

When the _MOD key A is selected, the indicator B will turn off and the sonar will be turned off temporarily. The Moving Object Detection (MOD) system will also be turned off at the same time. For additional information, refer to "Moving Object Detection (MOD) in this section. When the _MOD key A is selected again, the indicator will turn and the sonar will turn back on. In the below cases, the sonar will be turned back on automatically:

• When the shift lever is placed in the "R" (Reverse) position.
• When the 📄 CAMERA button is pressed and a screen other than the camera view is shown on the display.
• When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
• When the ignition switch is placed in the "OFF" position and turned back to the "ON" position again.

To prevent the sonar system from activating altogether, use the "Sonar" menu. For additional information, refer to "Sonar function settings" in this section.

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Check surroundings for safety. B A Change View D LHA4609

Check surroundings for safety. P# MOD Change View B A LHA4610

Sonar function settings

wide view Around View® Monitor screen to

To set up the sonar function to your preferred item is turned off (indicator turns off), the settings, press the MENU button, select the front and rear sonar is deactivated. The am-"Settings" key, select the "Camera/Sonar" key per markers are displayed at the corners of and then select the "Sonar" key on the lower the vehicle icon and the sonar icon will disappear display.

Designs and items displayed on the screen may vary depending on the models.

aid the driver when an object is near. When item is turned off (indicator turns off), the front and rear sonar is deactivated. The am-ber markers are displayed at the corners of the vehicle icon and the sonar icon will disap pear from the ^P4 MOD " key A on the Around View® Monitor display. The next time the ignition switch is placed in the on position, a

Sonar: When this item is turned to ON, the gray sonar icon will briefly flash on the up front and rear sonar is activated and a sond display, indicating that the sonar system is indicator © will appear at the corner of the off.

vehicle to inform the driver when an obstacle-FR sensor only: When this item is turned to is near. Another sonar indicator may also "ON", only the front sonar sensors are active. appear on either a side view, front or rear-Interrupt Display: When this item is turned to

"ON" the upper display screen will interrupt the current view in the display to see the surrounding area of the vehicle.

Sonar Sensitivity: Adjust the sensitivity level of the sonar by touching either the "+" or "-" the menu screen.

Sonar Volume: Adjust the volume of the buzzer by touching either the "+" or the "-" o the menu screen.

SONAR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the sonar function. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

- Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck's compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system, including reduced performance or a false activation.

- The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects.

• The system will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects close to the bumper or on the ground.

• The system may not detect the following objects:

• Fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, grass or wool.

• Thin objects such as rope, wire or chain.
• Wedge-shaped objects.
• If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of objects or false alarms.

CAUTION

Excessive noise (such as audio system volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard.

System temporarily unavailable

When the amber markers are displayed at the corners of the vehicle icon and the function cannot be activated from the Camera setting menu (the setting items are grayed out), the sonar system may be malfunctioning.

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

A CAUTION

Keep the surface of the sonar sensors (lo-gated on the front and rear bumper fascia) free from accumulations of snow, ice and dirt. Do not scratch the surface of the sonar sensors when cleaning. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished.

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD) (if so equipped)

Diagram of car interior with labeled navigation panels and control buttons, including a camera and directional indicator.

1. Upper touch-screen display (upper display)

2. Lower touch-screen display (lower display)

3. MENU button

4. *2 CAMERA button

WARNING

• Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Moving Object Detection system could result in serious injury or death.
• The MOD system is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with objects surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirrors and rearview mirror and turn and check the surroundings to ensure it is safe to maneuver.
• The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
• The MOD system is not designed to detect surrounding stationary objects.

The MOD system can inform the driver of moving objects near the vehicle when backing out of garages, maneuvering in parking lots and in other such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects by using image processing technology on the image shown in the display.

The MOD system will turn on automatically under the following conditions:

• When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position. When activating the Around View® Monitor, the guide lines, the icons and the messages may not be displayed immediately.
• When the ☐ CAMERA button is pressed to activate the camera view on the display.
• When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the camera screen is shown in the upper display.

Check surroundings for safety. Front P MOD Change View 4 ① ③ LHA4572

Front and bird's-eye views

The MOD system operates in the following conditions when the camera view is displayed:

- When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or I (Neutral) position and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD system detects moving objects in the bird's-eye view. The MOD system will not operate if the outside mirrors are moving in or out, in the stowed position, or if either front door is opened.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Check surroundings for safety. M INDO Front P& MOD Change View 4 LHA4275

Front-wide view

- When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the front view or front-wide view.

Check surroundings for safety. MOD Path MOD Change View Path LHA4560

Rear and bird's-eye views

When the shift lever is in the R (Revers position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the rear view or rear-wide view. When activating the Around View® Monitor, the guide lines, the icons and the messages may not be displayed immediately. The MOD system will not operate if the liftgate is open.

The MOD system does not detect moving objects in the front-side view. The MOD is not displayed on the screen when in this view.

Check surroundings for safety. MOD P4A MOD Change View E40 LHA4561

Rear and front-side views

If the vehicle is equipped with Backup Collision Intervention (BCI) system, "the" key ⑤ may be displayed on the Around View® Monitor screen when the shift lever is in th R (Reverse) position. When activating the Around View® Monitor, the guide lines, the icons andthe messages may not be displayed immediately. For additional information, refer to "Backup Collision Intervention (BCI)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this

Check surroundings for safety. P# MOD Change View B# LHA4562

Rear-wide view

When the MOD system detects moving objects near the vehicle, a yellow frame will be displayed on the view where the objects are detected. While the MOD system continues to detect moving objects, the yellow frame continues to be displayed.

NOTE:

While the sonar/BCI chime(ifsoequipped) is beeping, the MOD system does not chime.

In the bird's-eye view, the yellow frames displayed on each camera image (front, rear right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected.

The yellow frame ② is displayed on each from the screen when both of the systems view in the front view and rear view modes are completely turned off from the setting A blue MOD icon is displayed in the view menu.

A blue MOD icon is displayed in the view where the MOD system is operative. A grayMOD Volume:

MOD icon is displayed in the view where the select either the "+" or "-" key on the menu MOD system is not operative. screen to adjust the volume level of the MOD If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD warning sound.

if the MOD system is turned off, the MOD icon ③ is not displayed. MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF

1. Press the Menu button beneath the lower display.
2. Select the "Settings" key
3. Select the "Camera/Sonar" key
   be4. Select the "Camera" key
4. Select "Moving Object Detection" on the menu screen to switch between ON and OFF.

You can also turn MOD on and off by touching the _4 MOD " key④ on the upper display. When the sonar or MOD system is completely turned off from the setting menu, the

“P##▲” or “MOD” will disappear from the P# MOD "key. The P# MOD key will disappear

Listed below are the system limitations for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

- Do not use the MOD system when towing a trailer. The system may not function properly.

Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume or open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

- The MOD system performance will be limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects such as:

- When there is low contrast between background and the moving objects.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

• When there is a blinking source of light.
• When strong light such as another hicle's headlight or sunlight is pres
• When camera orientation is not in its usual position, such as when a mirror is folded.
• When there is dirt, water drops or snow on the camera lens.

• When the position of the moving objects in the display is not changed.

• The MOD system might detect flowing to water droplets on the camera lens, white smoke from the muffler, moving shadows, etc.

• The MOD system may not function properly depending on the speed, direction, distance or shape of the moving objects.
• If your vehicle sustains damage to the parts where the camera is installed, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered and the MOD system may not detect objects properly.
• When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly. This is not a malfunction.

NOTE:

The blue MOD icon will change to orange one of the following has occurred:

t. When the system is malfunctioning.

When the component temperature is reaches a high level (icon will blink).

- When the Rear View camera has detected a blockage (icon will blink).

If the icon light continues to illuminate or-ange, have the MOD system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

if 1 LHA4554

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

• Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
• Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of t cameras ①, the MOD system may not operate properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

VENTS

Diagram showing three variations of air vent system configurations with directional arrows indicating airflow or movement.

Adjust air flow direction for the center vents open or close the vents using the dial. Move ①, driver's and passenger's side vents ②, the dial toward the to open the vents or rear console vents ③, by moving the vent toward the to close them. slide and/or vent assemblies.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic)

15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO 0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000

LHA4574

1. Lower touch-screen display (lower display)
2. ^ Temperature control increase button (passenger's side)

3. √ Temperature control decrease button (passenger's side)

4. Air recirculation button

5. Front defroster button
6. Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch
7. ON-OFF button

8. CLIMATE button

9. MENU button

10. Manual air flow control button

11. Fan speed decrease button
12. ✿ Fan speed increase button
    13.AUTO button
13. √ Temperature control decrease button (driver's side)
14. ▲ Temperature control increase button (driver's side)

WARNING

• The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
• Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should alsonotbeleftalone.Theycouldaccidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
• Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls to activate the air conditioner.

NOTE:

• Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents.
• When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Press the AUTO button to set the automatic control mode that keeps the air distribution, temperature and the fan speed automatically.

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round as system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution, air intake control, and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

1. Press the 🎨 CLIMATE button on the lower display menu. The CLIMATE screen will display on the lower display.
2. Press the AUTO button on. (The indicator on the button will illuminate and AUTO will be displayed on the CLIMATE screen.)
3. Press the ▲ ∨ temperature control buttons on the driver's side to set the desired temperature.
   The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution, air intake control and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
4. A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Press the front defroster button on. (The indicator light on the button come on.)

2. Operate the ∧ ∨ temperature control buttons to set the desired temperature.
   To quickly remove ice from the outside of the windows, use the fan speed control button or the + key to set the fan speed to maximum.
   As soon as possible after the windshield he is clean, press the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode.

3. When the front defroster button is pressed, the air conditioner will automatically be turned on at outside temperatures approximately 32°F (0°C) to defog the windshield. The air recirculate mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the passenger compartment to further improve the defogging performance.

Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control (if so equipped)

Vehicles equipped with automatic climate controls and Remote Engine Start function may go into automatic heating or cooling mode when Remote Engine Start is activated depending on outside and cabin tempera-

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

tures. During this period, the climate control Temperature control

display and buttons will be inoperable until the ignition switch is turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrosting mode, the rear win dow defroster, heated seat (if so equipped) and heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may be activated automatically. In Remote Engine Start cooling mode, the climate con trolled seat (if so equipped) may be activated automatically.

Voice Recognition logic (if so equipped)

When the climate control system is on, the fan speed may be automatically lowered so that commands are more easily recognized.

Fan speed can be adjusted using the fan speed decrease and increase buttons, if desired.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Press the fan speed increase and fan speed decrease buttons to manually control the fan speed. Fan speed can also be

controlled by touching the + or keys on the lower display.

Press the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Press the temperature control buttons up or down to set the desired temperature.

The temperature can be set within the following range:

For U.S.: 60 to 90°F (16 to 32°C)

For Canada: 64 to 90°F (18 to 32°C)

Air recirculation

Press the air recirculation button to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.

The 🎨 indicator light on the button will come on.

The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode.

When the outside temperature exceeds 70 (21°C), the air conditioning system may de fault to air recirculation mode automatically to reduce overall power consumption. To air recirculation mode, deselect the air recirculation button (indicator will turn off) enter fresh air mode.

Automatic intake air control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be controlled automatically. To manually cont

the intake air, press the air recirculation button. To return to the automatic control mode, press and hold the air recirculation button for about 2 seconds. The indicator light will flash twice, and then the intake air will be controlled automatically.

Air flow control

Press the 🎨 button to manually control air flow. Pressing the button repeatedly will cycle through the available modes and display the corresponding icon on the lower display. Air flow can also be controlled by touching the 🔊 key on the lower display:

• Air flows from center and side vents.
• Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets.
• Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
  Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.

To turn system off

tPress the ON-OFF button.

CLIMATE button

Press the 🎨 CLIMATE button to show the Climate screen on the lower display.

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch

For additional information, refer to "Rear window defroster, outside mirror defroster, and wiper deicer (if so equipped) switch" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.

S A B LHA4578

OPERATING TIPS

The sensors, A and B on the instrument panel, help the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around these sensors.

- When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air may flow from defroster or foot outlets to initialize automatic heating mode. This is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air will flow normally from the foot outlets.

- A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CLIMATE SYNC Steering Heater A/C AUTO Auto Recirc LHA4579

CLIMATE SETTING SCREEN

Climate control settings can be changed on the screen.

Available setting items may vary depending on models and specifications.

Press the 🎨 CLIMATE button on the lower display menu. The CLIMATE screen will display on the lower display.

Heating (A/C off)

The air conditioner does not activate in this mode. When you need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Press the ✿ CLIMATE button.
2. If the Climate system is off, press the ON-OFF button to turn the system on
3. If the ⚙ A/C indicator is on, touch the ⚙ A/C key to turn the A/C off.
4. Press the ▲ ∨ temperature control buttons on the driver's side to set desired temperature.
5. When in AUTO mode, the temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
   Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature or the system may not work properly.
6. This procedure is not recommended if windows fog up.

When the outside temperature decreases to approximately 32°F (0°C), the A/C function does not activate even if the A/C indicator light illuminates.

^s Air conditioning (A/C)

Touch the A/C key to turn the A/C mode on or off. Turn on the A/C m

effective cooling and dehumidifying. When the A/C indicator light is on, the A/C mode on.

Sync mode setting

The driver's, passenger's and rear (if so equipped) temperature setpoints can be synchronized using the SYNC key on the lower display. When the key is touched, temperature settings become synchronized and the SYNC indicator turns on.

If the driver's side temperature buttons are pressed, the driver's side, passenger's side, and rear (if so equipped) temperature settings will update simultaneously.

If the passenger's side or rear (if so equipped) temperature buttons are pressed, Sync mode will exit, the indicator light will go off, and the temperature will update based on the button pressed. Driver's side temperature will remain the same until manually changed.

Steering wheel heater (if so equipped)

Touch the ⚙ Steering Heater key on the CLIMATE screen on the lower display to turn the steering wheel heater on or off. When the steering wheel heater is on, the indicator light is on.

Automatic Climate Control System (if so equipped)

The Automatic Climate Control System keeps the air inside of the vehicle clean, using the automatic air recirculation control with the exhaust gas/outside odor detecting sensor with ion control.

70°F CLIMATE 70°F SYNC Steering Heater A/C AUTO Auto Recirc 1 LHA4580

① Auto Recirc key

Touch to turn on the automatic recirculation mode.

② Plasmacluster® icon

Indicates the Plasmacluster® ion emission status.

lon control:

The Automatic Climate Control System unit generates highly concentrated Plasmacluster® ions into the air blown from the ventors to reduce odor absorbed into the intertrim and to suppress airborne bacteria. The high-density Plasmacluster® ions also have a proven skin moisture preserving effect.

The Plasmacluster® icon on the CLIMATE screen indicates the status of the Plasma-cluster® ion emission from the system and changes with the amount of the air flow.

Automatic air recirculation control with the exhaust gas/outside odor detection sensor:

The Automatic Climate Control System comes with an exhaust gas detection/outside odor sensor. When the automatic air circulation control is activated, the sensor detects odors outside the vehicle such as pulp or chemicals, and exhaust such as gasoline or diesel. When such odors or gases are detected the display and the system automatically change from fresh air mode to the recirculation mode.

When the automatic air recirculation is on, for the first 5 minutes, the air recirculation mode is selected to prevent dust, dirt, and pollen from entering the vehicle and to clean the air inside of the vehicle.

After 5 minutes, the sensor detects exhaust gas and automatically alternates between the air recirculation mode and the fresh air mode.

The automatic air recirculation mode can be activated under the following conditions.

- The air flow control is not in the front defroster mode (the indicator light on the front defroster button is turned off).

- The outside temperature is about 32°F (0°C) or more.

1 2 3 LHA4582

Press the √ to decrease the rear temperature. If front passengers touch the SYNC key on the CLIMATE screen, the rear temperature settings will synchronize with the driver's and passenger's side settings.

Rear temperature switch (if so equipped) REAR CLIMATE CONTROL (if so equipped)

1. Rear temperature display
2. ^ Rear temperature control increase button
3. √ Rear temperature control decrease button
   You can adjust the climate control system for rear seat passengers using the buttons on the back of the console.

Press the to increase the rear temperature.

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER SETTINGS

CLIMATE Steering Wheel Heater ○ ON Auto Steering Wheel Heater ⊕ ON LHA4583

Heater and air conditioner settings can be changed on the screen.

1. Press the MENU button on the lower display menu.

2. Using the arrow, tab over to the next screen and touch the Settings key. Touch the arrow again to get to the next screen and touch Other.

3. Touch the CLIMATE key. Available setting items may vary depending on models and specifications.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER

Available settings

- Steering Wheel Heater

Touch to turn the steering wheel heate on and off.

· Auto Steering Wheel Heater

The automatic control mode for the steering-wheel heating can be turned on and off. When the item is turned on, the steering-wheel heating will turn on automatically if the temperature inside the vehicle compartment is low at the time when the ignition switch is turned on. Regardless of the temperature, the steering-wheel heating will turn off after it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI 30 minutes. If the steering-wheel heater retailer for servicing your "environmentally is turned on or off manually by friendly" air conditioning system.

touching ⚙ on the CLIMATE screen, the automatic steering-wheel heating control mode will be canceled and will return to the manual mode.

- If the surface temperature of the steering-wheel is above the temperature within which the system is designed to operate, the system will not heat the steering-wheel. This is not a malfunction.

The air conditioner system in your INFINITI vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth's ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your INFINITI air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. For additional information, refer to "Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for servicing your "environmentally friendly" air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USB/iPod® CHARGING PORTS ANTENNA

Line drawing of a car interior showing dashboard, seats, and a directional arrow pointing to the lower right side (no text or symbols)

1st row

Line drawing of a car air conditioner panel with control buttons and a black arrow pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols on the panel itself)

2nd row

The vehicle is equipped with a shark fin antenna and an antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.

CAUTION

• Do not place metalized film near the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise.
• When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened soft cloth.

There are USB/iPod® charging ports located in the 1st row on the inside of the console box and in the 2nd row on the back of the center console. These ports will charge compatible devices.

NOTE:

The USB/iPod® charging ports will not operate with the display screen. Only the USB connection port located beneath the instrument panel will operate USB/iPod® devices.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the follow-

ing precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts.

WARNING

• A cellular phone should not be used for any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving.
• If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
• If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

• Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control modules.
• Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.
• Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.
• Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.

For additional information,, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for servicing.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MEMO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving....5-4

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) 5-4

Three-way catalyst....5-4

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)....5-5

On-pavement and off-road driving precautions 5-9

Avoiding collision and rollover....5-9

Off-road recovery....5-9

Rapid air pressure loss....5-10

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving 5-10

Driving safety precautions 5-11

Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD) driving safety precautions (if so equipped) 5-13

Push-button ignition switch 5-13

Operating range 5-14

Push-button ignition switch positions .....5-15

Emergency engine shut off 5-16

INFINITI Intelligent Key battery discharge 5-16

INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System 5-17

Before starting the engine 5-17

Starting the engine 5-17

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped).... 5-18

Driving the vehicle.... 5-19

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) 5-19

Electronic parking brake 5-24

Automatic operation 5-24

Manual operation 5-25

When towing a trailer 5-26

Automatic brake hold.... 5-26

How to activate/deactivate the automatic brake hold function 5-27 How to use the automatic brake hold function 5-27

INFINITI Drive Mode Selector 5-28

Standard mode 5-29

Sport mode 5-29

Personal mode 5-29

ECO mode....5-30

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped) 5-32

LDW system operation 5-33

How to enable/disable the LDW system .....5-34

LDW system limitations 5-34

System temporarily unavailable 5-35

System maintenance 5-36

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)

(if so equipped).... 5-37

LDP system operation....5-38

How to enable/disable the LDP system .....5-39

LDP system limitations 5-40

System temporarily unavailable 5-41

System maintenance 5-42

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) .....5-43

BSW system operation 5-44

How to enable/disable the BSW system .....5-45

BSW system limitations 5-46

BSW driving situations 5-47

System temporarily unavailable 5-50

System maintenance 5-51

Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI) (if so equipped) . . . 5-52

BSI system operation....5-54

How to enable/disable the BSI system ..... 5-55

BSI system limitations 5-56

BSI driving situations 5-58

System temporarily unavailable 5-63

System malfunction 5-63

System maintenance 5-63

Backup Collision Intervention (BCI)

(if so equipped)....5-64

BCI system operation 5-66

Turning the BCI system on/off.... 5-69

BCI system limitations 5-70

System temporarily not available....5-71

System malfunction 5-72

System maintenance 5-72

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

(if so equipped).... 5-73

RCTA system operation 5-74

How to enable/disable the RCTA system .... 5-76

RCTA system limitations....5-77

System temporarily unavailable 5-79

System maintenance 5-80

Cruise control (if so equipped) 5-81

Precautions on cruise control 5-81

Cruise control operations 5-82

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles

without ProPILOT™Assist) (if so equipped).....5-83

How to select the cruise control mode .....5-85

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode.....5-85

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

operation 5-87

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode switches 5-88

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode limitations 5-95

System temporarily unavailable 5-99

System maintenance 5-101

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode 5-102

ProPILOT™ Assist (if so equipped) .....5-107 ProPILOT™ Assist system operation .....5-109

Turning the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode on 5-113

Operating ProPILOT™ Assist 5-113

How to enable/disable the Steering Assist.... 5-117

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT™ Assist) 5-118

Steering Assist .... 5-128 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode .... 5-135

Distance Control Assist (DCA) (if so equipped). . 5-138

DCA system operation 5-140

How to enable/disable the DCA system.....5-143

DCA system limitations....5-144

DCA driving situations....5-146

System temporarily unavailable 5-147

System maintenance 5-148

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with

Pedestrian Detection system 5-149

System operation 5-151

Turning the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system on/off 5-152

FEB with Pedestrian Detection system limitations 5-153

System temporarily unavailable 5-156

System malfunction 5-157

System maintenance 5-158

Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW). . 5-159

PFCW system operation 5-161

Turning the PFCW system on/off .....5-162

PFCW system limitations 5-164

System temporarily unavailable 5-168

System malfunction 5-169

System maintenance 5-169

Break-in schedule 5-170

Fuel efficient driving tips.... 5-171

Increasing fuel economy 5-172

Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD) (if so equipped) 5-172
Parking/parking on hills 5-175
Power steering....5-176
Electric power steering type 5-176
Direct Adaptive Steering® type 5-176
Park with Easy Steering (if so equipped)....5-178
Brake system 5-179
Brake precautions 5-179
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)....5-180
Brake Assist 5-181
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.....5-181
Brake force distribution....5-183
Chassis Control 5-184
Active Trace Control (if so equipped) .....5-184
Active Engine Brake 5-184
Active Ride Control....5-185
Hill start assist system....5-186
Front and rear sonar system (if so equipped)....5-186

System operation 5-187

How to enable/disable the sonar system ....5-189

Sonar limitations 5-189

System temporarily unavailable 5-190

System maintenance 5-190

Cold weather driving 5-191

Freeing a frozen door lock 5-191

Antifreeze 5-191

Battery 5-191

Draining of coolant water 5-191

Tire equipment 5-191

Special winter equipment 5-192

Driving on snow or ice....5-192

Engine block heater (if so equipped)....5-192

Active noise cancellation/Active sound enhancement 5-193

Active noise cancellation....5-193

Active sound enhancement 5-194

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING

• Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should alsonotbeleftalone.Theycouldaccidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
• Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

- Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

• If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.
• Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage.
  Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time.

• Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates, doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with or of these open, follow these precautions

• Open all the windows.

• Set the air recirculation button to off and the fan control dial to high to circulate the air.

- If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the liftgate or the body, follow the manufacturer's recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.

- The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

• The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.
• Do notstopor park the vehicleover flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

5-4 Starting and driving

CAUTION

• Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst's ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
• Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunction in the ignition, fuel injection, or electric systems can cause over rich fuel flow of the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for service.
• Avoid driving with an extremely low f level. Running out of fuel could cause engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
• Do not race the engine while warming up.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle to s the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

In this vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure lab, if your vehicle has tires of a different size into than the size indicated on the vehicle place or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

cleAs an added safety feature, your vehicle h been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor this System (TPMS) that illuminates a low pressure telltale when one or more of you

tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale ill minutes, you should stop and check all your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them the proper pressure. Driving on a significant under-inflated tire causes the tire to overh and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitut for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then

as remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle heart-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect proper signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reactions, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

tion telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Additional information:

• When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.
  The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving).
• The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

• The "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off.

• The "Tire Pressure Low – Add Air" warnFor additional information, refer to "Low tire ing appears each time the ignition switchpressure warning light" and "Tire Pressure is in the ON position as long as the lowwow – Add Air" in the "Instruments and con-tire pressure warning light remains illumi-trols" section and "Tire Pressure Monitoring nated. System (TPMS)" in the "In case of emergency"
  The "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

• Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle's operation and the outside temperature. Do not reduce the tire pressure after driving because the tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four tires.
• The Tire and Loading Information label is located in the driver's door opening.
• You can also check the pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the vehicle information display screen. The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen corresponds with the actual order of the tire position.
  Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

5-6 Starting and driving

WARNING

- If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If you have a flat tire, replace it with replacement tire as soon as possible. (For additional information, refer to "Flat tire" in the "In case of emergency" section for changing a flat tire.)

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Replacing tires with those not originally specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

hD@ not inject any tire liquid or aerosol sealant into the tires, as this may cause malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CAUTION

• The TPMS may not function properly when the wheels are equipped with tire chains or the wheels are buried in snow.
• Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.

Some examples are:

Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.

- If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.

- If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in the following cases:

a If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and tire without TPMS.

- If the TPMS has been replaced and the II has not been registered.

- If the wheel is not originally specified by INFINITI.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the F Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device

TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator

When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure.

5-8 Starting and driving

Vehicle set-up:

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
   Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. Do not start the engine.

Operation:

1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing.
   -3. When the designated pressure is reached, the horn beeps once and the hazard indicators stop flashing.
3. Perform the above steps for each tire.

- If the tire is over-inflated more than approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn beeps and the hazard indicators flash three times. To correct the pressure, push the core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to release pressure. When the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps once.

- If the hazard indicator does not flash ^n within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that the TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator is not operating.

• The TPMS will not activate the TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator under the following conditions:
• If there is interference from an external device or transmitter.
• The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire.
• There is a malfunction in the TPMS system.
• There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard indicators.
• The identification code of the tire pressure sensor is not registered to the system.
• The battery of the tire pressure sensor is low.
• If the TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward and try again.

If the TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator is not working, use a tire pressure gauge.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVINGPRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passenger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of on-pavement and of road applications. This gives them a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However, they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.

For additional information, refer to "Driving safety precautions" in this section.

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe or prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways.

B4s attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the "Safety - Seats, seat 5 belts and supplemental restraint system" section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side where may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

.1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

1. Do not apply the brakes.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

Starting and driving 5-9

1. When it is safe to do so, gradually turneral guide. The vehicle must be driven as ap5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu- the steering wheel until both tires return appropriate based on the conditions of the ve- ally stop the vehicle. to the road surface. When all tires are liable, road and traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers on
   the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane.
3. If you decide that it is not safe to move the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop if safe place off the road.
   The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury.
   DRINKINGALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a "blow-out" can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspecting the tires for wear and damage. For additional information, refer to "Wheels and tires" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or "blows-out" while driving, maintain control of 4. the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a gen-5-10 Starting and driving

WARNING

• The vehiclegenerally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire.
• Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
• Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal.

• Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

• Remain calm and do not overreact.

• Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold straight course.

When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe lo- cation off the road and away from traffic if possible.

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.

INFINITI is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated,

the fact is that alcohol affects all people diPlease observe the following precautions: ferently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don't mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Don't drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVINGSAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your INFINITI is designed for both normal and off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep water or mud as your INFINITI is main designed for leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road vehicle.

Remember that 2-wheel drive models are less capable than All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models for rough road driving and extrication when stuck in deep snow or mud, or the like

WARNING

• Spinning the front wheels on slippery surfaces may cause the AWD warning message to display and the AWD system is to automatically switch from the AWD to the 2WD mode. This could reduce the traction. Be especially careful when towing a trailer (AWD models).
• Drive carefully when off the road and avoid dangerous areas. Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should be seated with their seat belt fastened. This will keep you and your passengers in position when driving over rough terrain.
• Do not drive across steep slopes. Instead drive either straight up or straight down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can tip over sideways much more easily than they can forward or backward.

• Many hills are too steep for any vehicle. I you drive up them, you may stall. If you drive down them, you may not be able to control your speed. If you drive across them, you may roll over.

• Do not shift gears while driving on downhill grades as this could cause loss of control of the vehicle.

• Stay alert when driving to the top of a hill. At the top there could be a drop-off or other hazard that could cause an accident.

If your engine stalls or you cannot make to the top of a steep hill, never attempt turn around. Your vehicle could tip or roll over. Always back straight down in R (Reverse) gear and apply brakes to control your speed.

Heavy braking going down a hill could cause your brakes to overheat and fade, resulting in loss of control and an accident. Apply brakes lightly and use a low gear to control your speed.

Unsecured cargo can be thrown around when driving over rough terrain. Properly secure all cargo so it will not be thrown forward and cause injury to you or your passengers.

- Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as farforward and aslow as possible. Do not equip the vehicle with tires larger than specified in this manual. This could cause your vehicle to roll over.

• Do not grip the inside or spokes of the steering wheel when driving off-road. The steering wheel could move suddenly and injure your hands. Instead drive with yourfingersandthumbsontheoutsideof the rim.
• Before operating the vehicle, ensure that the driver and all passengers have their seat belts fastened.
• Always drive with the floor mats in place as the floor may become hot.
• Lower your speed when encountering strong crosswinds. With a higher center of gravity, your INFINITI is more affected by strong side winds. Slower speeds ensure better vehicle control.
• Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires, even with AWD engaged.
• For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing) or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

When a wheel is off the ground due to unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel excessively.
- When a wheel is off the ground due to d unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel excessively.
- Accelerating quickly, sharp steering ma- - maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control.
- If at all possible, avoid sharp turning maneuvers, particularly at high speeds. Your and INFINITI vehicle has a higher center of or gravity than a passenger car. The vehicle is not designed for cornering at the same speed as passenger cars. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly could result in loss of control and/or a rollover accident.

Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted, or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Install tire chains on the front wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully.

Be sure to check the brakes immediately after driving in mud or water. For additional information, refer to "Brake precautions" in this section.

• Avoid parking your vehicle on steep hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it rolls forward, backward or sideways, you can could be injured.
• Whenever you drive off-road through sand, mud or water as deep as the wheel hub, more frequent maintenance may be required. For additional information, refer to "Maintenance under severe operating conditions" in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.

INTELLIGENT ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (if so equipped)

WARNING

• Replacing tires with those not originally specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
• Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Install tire chains on the front wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive carefully.
• This vehicle is not designed for off-road (roughroad)use.Do notdrive on sandy or muddy roads that tires may get stuck in.

• For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any D (Drive) or R (Reverse) position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

• Do not attempt to test an AWDequipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing) or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

• When a wheel is off the ground due to an unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel excessively.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed three consecutive times in quick succession or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.

START ENGINE STOP

LSD2911

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be placed in the OFF position until the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be placed the OFF position, proceed as follows:

1. Press the Park button to place the vehicle in the P (Park) position.
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch position will change to the ON position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the 2020 OFF position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position if the ignition switch is in ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position.

in in ①

OPERATING RANGE the

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system's operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch to start the engine.

When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will change as follows:

Push the ignition switch center:

• Once to change to ON.
• Two times to change to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically return to the LOCK position when any door is eit opened or closed with the switch in the O position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to "V

"hicle information display" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.

5-14 Starting and driving

The operating range of the engine start funON (Normal operating position)

OFF

tion is inside of the vehicle ^1

- The luggage area is not included in the operating range, but the Intelligent Key may function.

This position turns on the ignition system electrical accessories.

ON has a battery saver feature that will the ignition switch in the OFF position, if

and the ignition switch is in the OFF position when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.

- If the Intelligent Key is placed on the in-vehicle is not running, after some time un strument panel, inside the glove box, the following conditions: storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent. All doors are closed. Key may not function.

- If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the The battery saver feature will be canceled. Intelligent Key may function. any of the following occur:

deAUTO ACC

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in this position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it placed in the ON position while carrying the Intelligent Key.

The ignition switch will lock when any door opened or closed with the ignition switched off.

- Any door is opened. - The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) position.

The ignition switch changes position.

With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the Intelligent Key with you and the ignition switch placed from the ON position to the OFF position, the radio can still be used for iperiod of time, or until the driver's door is opened.

After a period of time, functions such as radio, navigation, and Bluetooth®Hands-Free Phone System may be restarted by pressing the POWER button/VOLUME control knob or the key fob unlock button. For additional information, refer to "Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems" section of this manual.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position when the engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:

• Rapidly push the ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
• Push and hold the ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

U- LSD2912

INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE

If the battery of the Intelligent Key is discharged or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine according to the following procedure:

1. Press the Park button to place the vehicle in the P (Park) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sounds. The engine will start.

After step 3 is performed, when the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change to ON.

NOTE:

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or the engine is started by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator may appear in the vehicle information display even when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again.
If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears, replace the battery as soon as possible. For additional information, refer to "Battery replacement" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

STARTING THE ENGINE

The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using the registered key, it may be due to interference caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automated payment device on the key ring. Restart the engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 5 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 again.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, INFINITI recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.

· Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.
Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.
Check that all windows and lights are clean.
Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.
Check that all doors are closed.
Position seat and adjust head restraints/headrests.
Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.
Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. For additional information, refer to "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Press the Park button to place the vehicle in P (Park) or move the shift lever N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
   The starter is designed not to operate in the shift lever is in any of the driving positions.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal and push the ignition switch to start the engine.
   To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position.
4. If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when re-starting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
5. If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch

Starting and driving 5-17

to the LOCK position. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.

1. To stop the engine, place the shift le in the P (Park) position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

er 2. Apply the brake.
3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON position.

For additional information, refer to "INFINITI Intelligent Key" in the "Pre-driving checks and adjustments" section of this manual.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up:

Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive a moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)

Vehicles started with the Remote Engine Start require the ignition switch to be placed in the ON position before the shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position. To place the ignition switch in the ON position, follow these steps:

1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you.

5-18 Starting and driving

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)

WARNING

• Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or M (Manual shift mode). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.
• Cold engine idle speed is high, so use cation when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.
• Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.
• Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.
• Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.

CAUTION

To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.

Engine power may be automatically reduced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift lever out of the P (Park) position. This Continuously Variable Transmission is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any driving position

while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park) position and into any of the other positions if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever to a driving position.
2. Release the parking brake and foot brake pedal and then gradually start the vehicle in motion.

WARNING

Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or M (Manual shift mode). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.
- Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.

Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.

- Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.

CAUTION

• To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.
• Except in an emergency, do not shift the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.

R N Idle position N D/M P 1 LSD2994

Shifting

Press the button to shift

Shift without pressing the button

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal, press the shift lever button and move the shift lever from the P (Park) position to any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING

Apply the electronic parking brake if the shift lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.

CAUTION

Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

Use this position when the vehicle is parked or starting the engine. Always make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped before dressing the park button to engage the P (Park) position. For maximum safety, the brake pedal must be depressed before engaging the P (Park) position. Use this position together with the parking brake. When parking on a hill, first depress the brake pedal, apply the parking brake and then engage the

P (Park) position. The parking lock should noise the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make be used as a brake when parking. In order to see the vehicle is completely stopped before secure the vehicle, always apply the electronic selection of the R (Reverse) position. The brake tronic parking brake in addition to the parkipedal must be depressed and the shift lever lock. button pressed to move the shift lever from

In the event of a malfunction of the vehicle electronics, the transmission may lock in the P (Park) position. Have the vehicle's electronics checked immediately. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

The P (Park) position is automatically engaged if:

- You switch off the ignition switch

- You open the driver side door when the tomatically. All forward gears are available. vehicle is stationary or driving at very low speed and the transmission is in the D (Drive) position or the R (Reverse) position.

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

R N Idle position N D/M P LSD2822

Manual shift gate

Manual shift mode

The transmission enters the manual shift mode by moving the shift lever again to the (Drive) position when the vehicle is in the D range.

You can select the manual shift range by pulling the right side or left side paddle shift (A) and (B). To cancel the manual shift mode, move the shift lever to the D (Drive) position again. The transmission returns to the automatic drive mode.

A B LSD2914

Paddle shifters

When the shift lever is shifted from D (Dr to the manual shift mode with the vehicle stopped or while driving, the transmission enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manually. Shift ranges can also be selected using the paddle shifters of the steering wheel. In the manual shift mode the shift range is displayed on the position indicator in the meter. When moving the slider to the manual shift mode, the position indicator displays 1 (1st) up to 8 (8th) depending on vehicle speed.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as foWhen shifting down

lows:

$$ 1 \Leftrightarrow 2 \Leftrightarrow 3 \Leftrightarrow 4 \Leftrightarrow 5 \Leftrightarrow 6 \Leftrightarrow 7 \Leftrightarrow 8 $$

Use the -(down) side paddle shifter. (Shifts to lower range.)

8 (8th)

Use this position for all normal forward driving at highway speeds.

7 (7th), 6 (6th) and 5 (5th)

The transmission will automatically downshift the gears. (For example, if you select the 3rd range, the transmission will shift down between the 3rd and 1st gears.)

Use this position when driving up long slopes, or for engine braking when driving down long slopes.

Moving the shift lever rapidly to the same side twice will shift the ranges in succession.

4 (4th), 3 (3rd) and 2 (2nd)

When canceling the manual shift mode

Use these positions for hill climbing or engine move the shift lever to the D (Drive) position braking on downhill grades. to return the transmission to the normal driv-

1 (1st)

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly or when driving slowly, or for maximum engine braking on steep downhill grades.

In the manual shift mode, the transmission may not shift to the selected gear. This helps maintain driving performance and reduces the chance of vehicle damage or loss of control.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time in lower than 7th gear. This reduces fuel economy.

When this situation occurs, the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) position indicator will blink and the chime will sound.

When shifting up

Use the + (up) side paddle shifter. (Shifts to higher range.)

5-22 Starting and driving

In the manual shift mode, the transmis-ing steep grades in high temperatures with repaired, if necessary. It is recommended sion may shift up automatically to a heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer) that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this higher range than selected if the engine engine power and, under some conditions, service.

speed is too high. When the vehicle speed will be decreased automatically, speed decreases, the transmission auto-to reduce the chance of transmission dramatically shifts down and shifts to 1st age. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the gear before the vehicle comes to a stop-accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited.

- CVT operation is limited to automatic speed may be limited. drive mode when CVT fluid temperature Fail-safe is extremely low even if manual shift mode is selected. This is not a malfunc-When the fail-safe operation occurs, the tion. When CVT fluid warms up, manual Continuously Variable Transmission will not mode can be selected. be shifted into the selected driving position.

- When the CVT fluid temperature is high, If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and than usual. This is not a malfunction. subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe sys-

Accelerator downshift - in D (Drive) position -

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection mode

This transmission has a high fluid tempera- return to its normal operating condition. If it ture protection mode. If the fluid temperatu does not return to its normal operating conbecomes too high (for example, when climbdition, have the transmission checked and

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation, or have it repaired if necessary.

• Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.
• Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.
• Do not use the shift lever in place of parking brake. When parking, be sure parking brake is fully engaged.

- To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

The electronic parking brake can be applied or released automatically or by operating the parking brake switch.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

The electronic parking brake will apply automatically if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position when the brake force is maintained by the automatic brake hold function.

The electronic parking brake is automatically released as soon as the vehicle starts and accelerator pedal is depressed.

the the The driver's seat belt needs to be fastened.

WARNING

• The electronic parking brake will not be automatically applied when the engine is stopped without using the ignition switch (for example, by engine stalling). Without the vehicle stationary, the electronic parking brake will not be automatically applied even if the engine is turned off with the ignition switch.
• Before leaving the vehicle, press the Park button to place the vehicle in the P (Park) position and check that the electronic parkingbrakewarninglight isilluminated to confirm that the electronic parking brake is applied. The electronic parking brake warning light will remain on for a period of time after the driver's door is locked.

CAUTION

When parking in an area where the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), donot apply the parking brake to prevent it from freezing.

For safe parking, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and securely block the wheels.

NOTE:

To apply: Pull the switch ①p The indicator light ② will illuminate.

When the electronic parking brake is frequently applied and released in a short N period of time, the parking brake may not operate in order to prevent the parking brake system from overheating. If this occurs, operate the electronic parking brake switch again after waiting approximately 1 minute.

If a malfunction occurs in the electronic, parking brake system (for example, due to battery discharge), it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.

To release: With the ignition switch in the ON position, depress the brake pedal and push the switch down②. The indicator light⑨ will turn off.

If the shift lever is moved to the P (position when the brake force is maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the electronic parking brake will apply automatically.

Before driving, check that the electronic parking brake warning light (P)

If the electronic parking brake must be applied while driving in an emergency, pull up and hold the parking brake switch. When you release the parking brake switch, the parking brake will be released.

- If the driver's seat belt is unfastened when the brake force is maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the electronic parking brake will apply automatically.

or goes out. For additional information, refer to "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.

- If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position when the brake force is maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the electronic parking brake will apply automatically.

MANUAL OPERATION

The electronic parking brake will not be automatically applied if the engine is stopped without using the ignition switch (for example, by engine stalling). In such a case, you have to apply the parking brake manually.

A buzzerwillsoundifthevehicleis driven without releasing the parking brake. For additional information, refer to "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.

While the electronic parking brake is applied or released, an operating sound is heard from the lower side of the rear seat. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.

While pulling up the electronic parking brake switch during driving, the parking brake is applied and a chime sounds. The electronic parking brake warning light in the meter and in the parking brake switch illuminates. This does not indicate a malfunction. The electronic parking brake warning light in the meter and in the parking brake switch turns off when the parking brake is released.

- When pulling the electronic parking brake switch up with the ignition switch, the braking force without the driver having in the OFF or AUTO ACC position, the depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is parking brake switch indicator light will stopped at a traffic light or intersection. As continue to illuminate for a short period of time. The automatic brake hold function maintains

WHEN TOWING A TRAILER

Depending on the weight of the vehicle and trailer and the steepness of the slope, there may be a tendency for the vehicle to move backwards when starting from a standstill. When this occurs, you can use the parking brake switch in the same way as a conventional lever type parking brake.

Before starting on sloping roads when towing a trailer, be sure to read the following to prevent the vehicle from moving backwards unintentionally.

- Release the parking brake switch as soon as the engine is delivering enough torque to the wheels.

released. The operating status of the automatic brake hold can be displayed on the vehicle information display.

WARNING

The automatic brake hold function is not designed to hold the vehicle on a steep h or slippery road. Never use the automatic brake hold when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill or slippery road. Failure to de so may cause the vehicle to move.

When the automatic brake hold function is activated but fails to maintain the vehicle at a standstill, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. If the vehicle unexpectedly moves due to outside conditions, the chime may sound and automatic brake hold warning may illuminate in the vehicle information display.

- Be sure to deactivate the automatic brake hold function when using a car wash or towing your vehicle.

• Make sure to place the shift lever in the P to (Park) position and apply the parking brake when parking your vehicle, riding on or off the vehicle, or loading luggage. Failuretodosocouldcause the vehicle to move or roll away unexpectedly and result in serious personal injury or property damage.

A CAUTION

- If any of the following conditions occur, the automatic brake hold function may not function. Have the system checked promptly. It is recommended that you wishit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

c - A warning message appears in the vehicle information display.

- The indicator light on the automatic brake hold switch does not illuminate when the switch is pushed.

The automatic brake hold function will not be activated if the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) indicator light, electronic parking brake warning light or master warning light illuminate and the chassis control system fault message appears in the vehicle information display.

- To maintain the braking force to keep the vehicle to a standstill, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

1 2 LSD2916

HOW TO ACTIVATE/ DEACTIVATE THE AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD FUNCTION

1. When the automatic brake hold function goes into standby, the automatic brake hold indicator light (white) illuminates.

To use the automatic brake hold function, following conditions need to be met:

The driver's seat belt is fastened.
The electronic parking brake is released.
The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position.
The vehicle is not parked on a steep hill

How to deactivate the automatic brake hold function

While the automatic brake hold function is activated, push the automatic brake hold switch to turn off the automatic brake hold

CAUTION

Make sure to firmly depress and hold the brake pedalwhenturningoff the automatic brake hold function while the brake force is applied. When the automatic brake hold function is deactivated, the brake force will be released. This could cause the vehicle to move or roll away unexpectedly and result in an accident.

HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC BRAKE HOLD FUNCTION

For additional information on using the automatic brake hold function, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.

To maintain braking force automatically

For additional information on activating and indicator light and deactivate the automatic deactivating the automatic brake hold func-brake hold function. To deactivate the auto- tion, refer to the instructions outlined in thismatic brake hold function while the brake section. force has been maintained by the automatic with the automatic brake hold function acti- vated and the automatic brake hold indicator light (white) illuminated on the meter, depress

How to activate the automatic brake hold function

1. With the ignition switch in the ON position, push the automatic brake hold switch ①. The indicator light on the automatic brake hold switch② illuminates.

With the automatic brake hold function activated and the automatic brake hold indicator light (white) illuminated on the meter, depress the braking pedal to stop the vehicle. The brake force is automatically applied without your foot depressed on the brake pedal. While the brake hold is maintained, the automatic brake hold indicator light (green) illuminates on the meter.

INFINITI DRIVE MODE SELECTOR

To start the vehicle from a standstNOTE:

With the shift lever not in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position, depress the accelerator pedal while the brake force is maintained. The brake force will automatically be released to restart the vehicle.

The automatic brake hold indicator light (white) on the meter illuminates and the automatic brake hold returns to standby.

Parking

When the shift lever is in the P (Park) posit with the brake force maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the parking brake will automatically be applied and the brake force of the automatic brake hold will be released. The automatic brake hold indicator light turns off. When the parking brake is applied with the brake force maintained by the automatic brake hold function, the brake force of the automatic brake hold will be released. The automatic brake hold indicator light turns off.

Under the following conditions, the parking brake will automatically be applied and the brake force of the automatic brake hold will be released:

• The braking force is applied by the automatic brake hold function for 3 minutes or longer
• The driver's seat belt is unfastened
• The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
• If a malfunction occurs in the automatic brake hold function

When the vehicle stops, but the brake force is not automatically applied, depress the brake pedal firmly until the tomatic brake hold indicator light (green) illuminates.

Automatic brake hold function display

The automatic brake hold function status can be checked in the "Chassis Control" mode in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.

D-MODE LSD2917

Drive Mode Selector switch

Four driving modes can be selected by using the Drive Mode Selector switch: STANDARD, SPORT, ECO and PERSONAL.

NOTE:

- When the Drive Mode Selector switch selects a mode, the mode may not switch quickly. This is not a malfunction.

- Select the STANDARD mode center for normal driving.

5-28 Starting and driving

STANDARD MODE

STANDARD mode is recommended for normal driving. Push the Drive Mode Selector switch until "STANDARD" appears in the vehicle information display. STANDARD mode will also be displayed in the upper display.

SPORT MODE

The SPORT mode adjusts the engine and transmission to enhance performance. Push the Drive Mode Selector switch to the SPORT position. "SPORT" appears in the vehicle information display. SPORT mode will also be displayed in the upper display.

NOTE:

In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may be reduced.

PERSONAL MODE

PERSONAL mode is used for adjusting the steering mode and drive modes. Turn the PERSONAL mode off for normal driving. Push the Drive Mode Selector switch until "PERSONAL" appears in the vehicle information display. PERSONAL mode will also be displayed in the upper display. For additional information, refer to the Infiniti InTouch™ Owner's Manual.

1 LSD2982

How to set the PERSONAL mode

Perform the following steps to set the PERSONAL mode:

1. Press the MENU button① and select "Infiniti Drive Mode Selector" on the lower display.

2. Select "Engine/Transmission", "Steering", "Active Trace Control" or "Active Engine Brake" and select each item. (See "Engine/Transmission", "Steering", "Active Trace Control" or "Active Engine Brake" about the feature of each item.)

3. Select "Back" or press the MENU button to finish the PERSONAL mode setting.

Engine/Transmission:

"Engine/Transmission" can be set to "Standard", "Sport" or "Eco."

Steering (models with Direct Adaptive Steering®):

Seven or four combinations of steering mode and steering response can be set.

Mode Response
	Dynamic+
Sport	Dynamic
	Default
Standard Default

^2 Steering (models without Direct Adaptive Steering):

"Steering" can be set to "Sport" or "Standard."

Active Trace Control:

"Active Trace Control" can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled). For additional information, refer to "Active Trace Control" in this section.

Active Engine Brake:

"Active Engine Brake" can be set to ON (erabled) or OFF (disabled). For additional information, refer to "Active Engine Brake" in the section.

Reset Settings:

Select "Reset Settings" and select "OK" to restore all the PERSONAL mode settings default.

ECO MODE

The ECO mode adjusts the engine and transmission to enhance fuel economy.

NOTE:

Selecting this drive mode will not necessarily improve fuel economy as many driving factors influence its effectiveness.

Operation

When the accelerator pedal is depressed within the range of economy drive, the ECO drive indicator light illuminates in green. When the accelerator pedal is depressed above the range of economy drive, the ECO drive indicator light turns off. For ECO pedal system equipped models, refer to "ECO pedal system" in this section.

^2 The ECO drive indicator light will not illuminate in the following cases:

• When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
• When the vehicle speed is below 3 mph (4.8 km/h) or over 90 mph (144 km/h).

When the Intelligent Cruise Control system (if so equipped) is operated.

ECO pedal system (if so equipped)

ECO drive indicator		Illuminates or blinks
		When the pedal is depressed within range of economy drive
		When the pedal is depressed almost over the range of economy drive
		When the pedal is depressed over the range of economy drive

When the ECO drive indicator illuminates in green, the accelerator reaction force is normal. When the ECO drive indicator light is blinking or turns off, the ECO pedal system increases the reaction force of the accelerator pedal.

Push the Drive Mode Selector switch to the ECO position. "ECO" appears in the vehicle to improve fuel economy by increasing the reaction force of the accelerator pedal. When information display and the ECO drive indicator light is blinking or illuminates on the instrument turns off, the ECO pedal system increases panel. ECO mode will also be displayed in the reaction force of the accelerator pedal. Upper display.

The ECO pedal system may not vary accelerator reaction force under the following conditions:

- When the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) or R (Reverse) position.

- When Intelligent Cruise Control (if so equipped) is being operated.

If the ECO pedal system malfunctions, it will cancel automatically. The ECO pedal system will not vary the reaction force of the accelerator pedal.

When the Drive Mode Selector switch is pushed and the drive mode changes from the ECO mode to another mode (STANDARD, SPORT or PERSONAL) while the ECO pedal system is operating, the ECO pedal system continues to operate until the pedal is released.

If the accelerator pedal is depressed quickly, the ECO pedal system will not increase the reaction force of the accelerator pedal. The ECO pedal system is not designed to prevent the vehicle from accelerating.

Adjusting the ECO pedal system reaction force

The ECO pedal system reaction force can be adjusted. The reaction force setting will be maintained until the setting is changed even if the engine is turned off.

LSD2965

Settings 10:58 Voice Recognition Camera/Sonar Drive Mode Enhancement Other LSD2695

Setting ECO pedal reaction force

1. Press the MENU① button and select "Settings" in the lower display.
2. Select "Drive Mode Enhancement."
3. Select "ECO Pedal" and then select either "OFF", "Soft" or "Standard" in the lower display. When the ECO pedal system is turned off, the accelerator will operate normally.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) (if so equipped)

Drive Mode Enhancement Settings ECO Pedal OFF LSD2696

Line drawing of a car with a numbered label pointing to the top section (no text or symbols on the car itself)

The LDW system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road.

The LDW system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera①unit located above the inside mirror.

The LDW system warns the driver with an indicator in the vehicle information display and the steering wheel will vibrate, indicating that the vehicle is beginning to leave the driving lane. For additional information, refer to "LDW system operation" in this section.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.

- This system is only a warning device to inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

5-32 Starting and driving

AUDIO MENU CLIMATE LSD3040

The LDW system provides a lane departure warning function when the vehicle is driven a speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above and the lane markings are clear. When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDW indicator on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver.

The warning function will stop when the vehicle returns inside of the lane markers.

LSD2919 AUDIO MENU CLIMATE Lane Assist Lane Departure Warning ON Lane Departure Prevention ON

5-34 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDW SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDW system:

1. Press the MENU button below the lower display screen.
2. Select "Driver Assistance."
3. Select "Lane Assist."
4. Select "ON" to turn the "Lane Departure Warning" system on or off.

LDW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the LDW system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDW system could result in serious injury or death.

- This system is only a warning device to inform the driver of a potential unintended lane departure. It will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

• The system will not operate at speeds below approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers.

• Do not use the LDW system under the following conditions as it may not function properly:

• During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

• When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow.
• When driving on winding or uneven roads.
• When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
• When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
• When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.
• When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels).
• When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
• When you are towing a trailer or other vehicle.

The system may not function properly under the following conditions:

On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
On roads where there are sharp curves.
On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDW system) could detect these items as lane markers
On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.

When the vehicle's traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.
When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.

When rain, snow, dirt or an object adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit.

When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.
- When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)
- When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then started, the LDW system may be deactivated automatically and the following message will appear in the vehicle information display: "Not available: High Camera Temp."

When the interior temperature is reduced, the LDW system will resume operating automatically.

The LDW system is not designed to warn under the following conditions:

• When you operate the lane change signal and change traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDW system will become operable again approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.)
• When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).

After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the LDW functions will resume.

1 LSD3075

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The lane camera unit for the LDW system is located behind the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the LDW system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:

· Always keep the windshield clean.
- Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

• Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's capability of detecting the lane markers.
• Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.

LANE DEPARTURE PREVENTION (LDP) (if so equipped)

Line drawing of a car with a numbered component (1) on top, no text or symbols present

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDP system could result in serious injury or death.

- The LDP system will not steer the vehicle or prevent loss of control. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

- The LDP system is primarily intended for use on well-developed freeways or highways. It may not detect the lane markers in certain road, weather, or driving conditions.

The LDP system will operate when the vehicle is driven at speeds of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) and above, and only when the lane markings are clearly visible on the road.

The LDP system warns the driver with a warning indicator in the vehicle information display, the steering wheel will vibrate and helps assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane by applying the brakes to the left or right wheels individually (for a short period of time).

The LDP system monitors the lane markers on the traveling lane using the camera ^① unit located above the inside mirror.

1 2 AUDIO MENU CLIMATE 3 LSD2918

5-38 Starting and driving

1. LDP indicator
2. Lower display buttons
3. Dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT™ Assist/Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT™ Assist)

The LDP system operates above approximately 37 mph (60 km/h). When the vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, the steering wheel will vibrate and the LDP indicator (orange) on the instrument panel will blink to alert the driver. Then, the LDP system will automatically apply the brakes for a short period of time to help assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane.

To turn on the LDP system, push the dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT™ Assist/Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT™ Assist) after starting the engine. The LDP indicator (green) on the instrument panel will illuminate. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT™ Assist/Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT™ Assist) again to turn off the LDP system. The LDP indicator will turn off.

LSD2919 AUDIO MENU CLIMATE Lane Assist Lane Departure Warning ON Lane Departure Prevention ON

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE LDP SYSTEM

When the LDP system is enabled in the low display, the system can be turned off temporarily by pushing the dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT™ Assist/Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT™ Assist).

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the LDP system.

1. Press the MENU button below the lower display screen.
2. Select "Driver Assistance."
3. Select "Lane Assist."
4. Select "ON" to turn the "Lane Departure Prevention" system on or off.

NOTE:

Turning on the ProPILOT™ Assist system (if so equipped) will turn on the LDP system at the same time. For additional information, refer to "ProPILOT™ Assist" in this section.

LDP SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the LDP system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the LDP system could result in serious injury or death.

• The LDP system may activate if you change lanes without first activating your turn signal or, for example, if a construction zone directs traffic to cross an existing lane marker. If this occurs you may need to apply corrective steering to complete your lane change.
• Because the LDP may not activate under the road, weather, and lane marker conditions described in this section, it may not activate every time your vehicle begins to leave its lane and you will need apply corrective steering.
• The LDP system will not operate at speeds below approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or if it cannot detect lane markers.

• Do not use the LDP system under the following conditions as it may not function properly:

• During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

• When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow.
• When driving on winding or uneven roads.
• When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
• When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.
• When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.
• When driving without normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, non-standard wheels).
• When the vehicle is equipped with to nonoriginal brake parts or suspension parts.

• When you are towing a trailer or other vehicle.
  The system may not function properly under the following conditions:

• On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

• On roads where discontinued lane markers are still detectable.
• On roads where there are sharp curves.
  On roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs. (The LDP system could detect these items as lane markers.)
• On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.
• When the vehicle's traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.
• When traveling close to the vehicle in erfront of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.
• When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of the lane camera unit.

- When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is adjusted properly.

- When the vehicle speed lowers to less than approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).

Condition C:

If the following messages appear in the vehicle information display, a chime will sound

- When strong light enters the lane camera unit. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset.)

After the above conditions have finished and the necessary operating conditions are satisfied, the warning and assist functions will

Land the LDP system will be turned off automatically:

- When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge.)

Condition B:

The assist function of the LDP system is not designed to work under the following conditions (warning is still functional):

"Not Available Poor Road Conditions": When the VDC system (except Traction Control System [TCS] function) or ABS operates.

- "Currently not available": When the VDC system is turned off.

While the LDP system is operating, you may hear a sound of brake operation. This is normal and indicates that the LDP system is operating properly.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

Condition A:

The warning and assist functions of the LDP system are not designed to work under the following conditions:

When the brake pedal is depressed.

When the steering wheel is turned as necessary for the vehicle to change lanes.

- When the vehicle is accelerated during LDP system operation.

When the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) approach warning occurs.

- When the hazard warning flashers are operated.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist, turn off the LDP system. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch (for vehicles without ProPILOT™ Assist/Steering Assist switch (for vehicles with ProPILOT™ Assist) again to turn the LDP system back on.

- When you operate the lane change signal and change the traveling lanes in the direction of the signal. (The LDP system after the above conditions have finished and be deactivated for approximately 2 seconds after the lane change signal is turned off.) When driving on a curve at high speed, the LDP system application of the brakes will resume.

Temporary disabled status at high temperature:

If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104°F [40°C]) and then the LDP system is turned on, the LDP system may be deactivated automatically and the following message will appear on the vehicle information display: "Not available: High Camera Temp." When the interior temperature is reduced, the system will resume operating automatically.

der s- LSD3075

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The lane camera unit for the LDP system is located behind the inside mirror. To keep the proper operation of the LDP system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:

· Always keep the windshield clean.
- Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

• Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's capability of detecting the lane markers.
• Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit. If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.

5-42 Starting and driving

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so equipped)

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system could result in serious injury or death.

- The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.

1 or and es. LSD2920

Top-down diagram of a parking lot layout with two cars and surrounding parking areas (no text or symbols)

The BSW system uses radar sensor ^3 installed near the rear bumper to detect a vehicles in an adjacent lane.

Detection zone

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

1 2 LSD2921

5-44 Starting and driving

1. Side Indicator Light

2. BSI/BSW/BCI/RCTA Indicator

The BSW system operates above approximately 20 mph (32 km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side indicator light① illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. The side indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone.

The side indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The brightness of the side indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the side indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, refer to "BSW driving situations" in this section.

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Warning ● ON Blind Spot Intervention ● ON Side Indicator Brightness - Standard + AUDIO MENU CLIMATE LSD2922

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system.

1. Press the MENU button below the lower display screen.
2. Select "Driver Assistance."
3. Select "Blind Spot Assist."
4. Select "ON" to turn the "Blind Spot Warning" system on or off.

NOTE:

• When enabling/disabling the system, the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted.
  The RCTA system (if so equipped) is integrated into the BSW system. There is not a separate selection in the lower display for the RCTA system. When the BSWisdisabled, the RCTA system is also disabled.
  When the BSW system is turned on, the BSI/BSW/BCI/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle information display illuminates.

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the BSW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

• The BSW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.

• The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as:

• Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.

• Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.

- Oncoming vehicles.

• Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate from a stop.
• A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle.

• A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.

• A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.

• A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.
• When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.

- The radar sensors' detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width.

e-When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.

• The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects; however, objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.

• The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:

• Severe weather

• Road spray

• Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle

• Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
• Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

Top-down diagram of a vehicle layout with two cars, directional arrows, and surrounding parking areas (no text or symbols)

Illustration 1 - Approaching from behind BSW DRIVINGSITUATIONS

Indicator

on

Indicator

off

Indicator

flashing

Another vehicle approaching from behind

Illustration 1: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

Top-down diagram of a car layout with two cars and surrounding road markings, no text or symbols present.

Illustration 2 - Approaching from behind Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal when another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.

If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

Starting and driving

Top-down schematic of a vehicle layout with two cars and surrounding parking areas (no text or symbols)

Top-down diagram of a car layout with two cars and surrounding vehicle lanes, no text or symbols present.

If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

Illustration 3 - Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 4 - Overtaking another vehicle Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 4: If the driver activates the tur

Illustration 3: The side indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds. signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. NOTE:

NOTE:

• When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
  The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

5-48 Starting and driving

Top-down architectural layout diagram of a vehicle showing multiple cars and surrounding road networks (no text or symbols)

Illustration 5 - Entering from the side Entering from the side

Top-down diagram of a multi-lane vehicle parking lot with no visible text or symbols

Illustration 6 - Entering from the side

Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection

Illustration 5: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side.

NOTE:

If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.

A Unavailable Side Adapter Obstruction LSD3036

5-50 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The "Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction" warning message will appear and the BSI/BSW/BCI/RCTA indicator (white) will blink Ⓐ in the vehicle information display.

The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

Malfunction

If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSI/BSW/BCI/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit INFINITI retailer for this service.

1 TA e LSD2920

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors ^① for the BSW and RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the red sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by terrary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC: OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the FC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

BLIND SPOT INTERVENTION® (BSI) (if so equipped)

For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05-24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSI system could result in serious injury or death.

• The BSI system is not a replacement for proper driving procedure and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the sideand rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSI system.
• There is a limitation to the detection capability of the radar or the sonar. Not every moving object or vehicle will be detected. Using the BSI system under some road, ground, lane marker, traffic or weather conditions could lead to improper system operation. Always rely on your own operation to avoid accidents.

Build 1 2 LSD2924

The BSI system helps alert the driver of a vehicle in adjacent lanes when changing lanes and helps assist the driver to return vehicle to the center of the traveling lane.

The BSI system uses radar sensors ^② installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane. In addition to the radar sensors, the BSI system uses a camera ^① installed behind the windshield to monitor the lane markers of your traveling lane.

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

Top-down diagram of a parking lot with two cars and surrounding parking areas (no text or symbols)

Detection zone

1 2 3 Unobservable Side Radar Obstruction LSD2923

Starting and driving

1. Side indicator light
2. BSI/BSW/BCI/RCTA indicator light
3. Dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT™ Assist)/Steering Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT™ Assist)

The BSI system operates above approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side indicator light① illuminates.

If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. The side indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone.

If the BSI system is on and your vehicle approaches a lane marker while another vehicle is in the detection zone, the system chimes (three times) and the side indicator light. The BSI system provides achime and turns on flashes. The BSI system activates to help rear flashes the side indicator light even if the turn the vehicle back to the center of the BSW system is off. driving lane. The BSI system operates regardless of turn signal usage.

5-54 Starting and driving

NOTE:

BSI warning and system application will only be activated if the side indicator light is already illuminated when your vehicle approaches a lane marker. If another vehicle comes into the detection zone after your vehicle has crossed a lane marker, no BSI warning or system application will be activated. For additional information, refer to "BSI driving situations" in this section.
The BSI system is typically activated earlier than the Lane Departure Prevention (LDP) system when your vehicle is approaching a lane marker.

The BSI system turns on when the dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without

ProPILOT™Assist)/Steering Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT™Assist) is pushed when the "Blind Spot Intervention" is enabled in the "Driver Assistance" menu in the

lower display. The BSI ON indicator light on the instrument panel illuminates when the BSI system is turned on.

The BSI system provides achime and turns on ear flashes the side indicator light even if the BSW system is off.

d-

[Non-Text]

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Warning ● ON Blind Spot Intervention ● ON Side Indicator Brightness - Standard + AUDIO MENU CLIMATE LSD2922

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSI SYSTEM

When the BSI system is enabled in the lower display, the system can be turned off temporarily by pushing the dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT™ Assist)/Steering Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT™ Assist).

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSI system:

1. Press the MENU button below the lower display screen.
2. Select "Driver Assistance."
3. Select "Blind Spot Assist."
4. Select "ON" to turn the "Blind Spot Intervention" system on or off.
5. Select the "-" or the "+" to change the "Side Indicator Brightness" and set it to either "Standard", "Bright" or "Dark."

BSI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the BSI system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

• The BSI system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.

• The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSI when certain objects are present such as:

• Pedestrians, bicycles, or animals.

• Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.
• Oncoming vehicles.
• Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate from a stop. For additional information, refer to "BSI driving situations" in this section.

• A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle. For additional information, refer to "BSI driving situations" in this section.

• A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind. For additional information, refer to "BSI driving situations" in this section.

• A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly. For additional information, refer to "BSI driving situations" in this section.
• A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.

• When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.

• The radar sensors' detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
  The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects; however, objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal driving condition.

• The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other s vehicles:

• Severe weather
• Road spray
• Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle
• Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.

• The camera may not detect lane markers in the following situations and the BSI system may not operate properly:

• On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; yellow painted lane markers; non-standard lane markers; lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

• On roads where discontinued lane markers are still detectable.

• On roads where there are sharp curves.

• On roads where there are sharply trasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams or lines remaining after road repairs.

• On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.
• When the vehicle's traveling direction does not align with the lane markers.
• When traveling close to the vehicle in front of you, which obstructs the lane camera unit detection range.
• When rain, snow or dirt adheres to the windshield in front of a lane camera unit.
• When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if aiming is not adjusted properly.
• When strong light enters a lane camera unit (e.g., light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset).
• When a sudden change in brightness occurs (e.g., when the vehicle enters exits a tunnel or under a bridge).

Do not use the BSI system under the lowing conditions because the system may not function properly:
- During bad weather (e.g., rain, fog, snow, etc.).
- During bad weather (e.g., rain, fog, snow, etc.).
- When driving on slippery roads, such as on ice or snow, etc.
- When driving on winding or uneven roads.
- When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.
- When driving in a makeshift lane.
- When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.
- When driving with a tire that is not within normal tire conditions (e.g., tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels).
- When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
- Do not use the BSI system when towing a trailer.
fol- Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

Top-down diagram of two cars parked in a row with surrounding parking areas (no text or symbols)

Illustration 1 - Approaching from behind BSI DRIVINGSITUATIONS

Another vehicle approaching from behind

Illustration 1: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

However, if the overtaking vehicle is traveling much faster than your vehicle, the indicator light may not illuminate before the detected vehicle is beside your vehicle. Always use the

side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes.

the is SSD1031

Illustration 2 - Approaching from behind Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal then the system chimes a sound (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

5-58 Starting and driving

Top-down diagram of two cars parked in a row with parking lotes on both sides (no text or symbols)

Top-down view of a parking lot with two cars and surrounding parking areas (no text or symbols)

Top-down view of a parking lot layout with two cars and surrounding parking areas (no text or symbols)

Illustration 3 - Approaching from behind
Illustration 4 - Accelerate from a stop
Illustration 5 - Overtaking another vehicle Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 3: If the BSI system is on and yNOTE:

vehicle is approaching a lane marker and a vehicle is in the detection zone, the system chimes a sound (three times), and the side indicator light flashes. Then the BSI system slightly applies the brakes on one side to h return the vehicle back to the center of the driving lane.

Illustration 4: If you accelerate from a st with a vehicle in the detection zone, the other vehicle may not be detected.

Illustration 5: The side indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 3 seconds.

The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

Top-down diagram of two cars on a road with traffic lights, no text or symbols present

Top-down diagram of two cars parked in a parking lot with surrounding parking areas (no text or symbols)

Illustration 6 - Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 7 - Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turnIllustration 7: If the BSI system is on and your signal while another vehicle is in the detection vehicle approaches a lane marker while anzone, then the system chimes a sound (twice)ther vehicle is in the detection zone the sys-and the side indicator light flashes. tem chimes a sound (three times) and the side

Top-down diagram of a car layout with multiple lanes and parking areas, no text or symbols present.

SSD1036

Illustration 8 - Overtaking several vehicles

NOTE:

Illustration 8: When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.

Top-down view of a multi-lane road with cars positioned in sequence, surrounded by lane markings (no text or symbols)

LSD2050

Illustration 9 - Entering from the side Entering from the side

Illustration 9: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side.

NOTE:

The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle whichistravelingataboutthesamespeedas your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.

SSD1038

SSD1094

Top-down diagram of a parking lot with multiple cars and parking areas (no text or symbols)

Illustration 10 - Entering from the side Illustration 11 - Entering from the side Illustration 12 - Entering from the side Illustration 10: If the driver activates the tullllustration 11: If the BSI system is on and NOTE:

signal while another vehicle is in the detectionour vehicle approaches the lane marker zone, then the side indicator light flashes and while another vehicle is in the detection zone, a chime will sound twice. the side indicator light flashes and a chime

NOTE:

If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when another vehicle is detected.

Illustration 12: The BSI system will not operate if your vehicle is one lanemarker when another vehicle enters the detection zone. In this case, only the BSW system operates.

- BSI braking will not operate or will stop operating and only a warning chime will sound under the following conditions:

- When the brake pedal is depressed.

- When the vehicle is accelerated during BSI system operation.

5-62 Starting and driving

• When steering quickly.
• When the ICC, DCA, PFCW or FEB with Pedestrian Detection warnings sound.
• When the hazard warning flashers are operated.
• When driving on a curve at a high speed.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

When any of the following messages appearing on the vehicle information display, a chime will sound and the BSI system will be turned off automatically.

• "Not Available Poor Road Conditions": When the VDC system (except traction control system function) or ABS operates.
• "Currently Not Available": When the VDC system is turned off.
• "Not Available: High Camera Temp": When the camera detects that the interior temperature is high (over approximately 104°F [40°C]).
• "Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction": When side radar blockage is detected.

Turn off the BSI system and turn it on again when the above conditions no longer exist. SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

When the BSI system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound and the BSI system warning light (orange) will illuminate.

Action to take: Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light (orange) continues to illuminate, have

the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service

② ① LSD2924

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The lane camera un① for the BSI system is located above the inside mirror. The two radar sensors② for the BSI system are located near the rear bumper. To keep the proper operation of the BSI system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:

Always keep the windshield and the area near the radar sensors clean.

BACKUP COLLISION INTERVENTION (BCI) (if so equipped)

• The radar sensors may be blocked by This device complies with part 15 of the FCC temporary ambient conditions such as Rules. splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked operation is subject to the following two condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the harmful interference, and (2) this device must radar sensors. Check for and remove object acceptance any interference received, including objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors. Interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the camera unit or radar sensors.
• Do not place reflective materials, such as the equipment. white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's capability. Applicable law: Canada 310 of detecting the lane markers. This device complies with industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
• Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located or conditions: (1) This device may not cause the camera unit. It is recommended that harmful interference, and (2) this device may visit an INFINITI retailer if the camera accept any interference received, including unit and/or area around the radar sensor- interference that may cause undesired op-sors is damaged due to a collision. Operation of the device.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC: OAYSRR3B

5-64 Starting and driving

Frequency bands: 24.05–24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

CC 1 st 2 LSD2925

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BCI system could result in serious injury or death.

- The BCI system is not a replacement for proper driving procedure, is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects and does not provide full brake power. When backing out of a parking space, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction you will move. Never rely solely on the BCI system.

- There is a limitation to the detection capability of the radar or the sonar. Using the BCI systems under some road, ground, lane marker, traffic or weather conditions could lead to improper system operation. Always rely on your own operation to avoid accidents.

The BCI system can help alert the driver of approaching vehicle or objects behind the vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space.

an park- LSD2026

Top-down line drawing of a car with a numbered annotation (3) pointing to its side, no text or symbols on the car itself.

The BCI system uses radar sensors ^① installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle and sonar sensors to detect objects in the rear.

The radar sensors① detect an approaching vehicle from up to approximately 49 ft (15 m) away. The sonar sensor② detect stationary objects behind the vehicle up to approximately 4.9 ft (1.5 m).

2 3 AUDIO MENU CLIMATE 1 LSD2927

5-66 Starting and driving

1. Side indicator light
2. Vehicle information display
3. Lower display buttons

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the BCI system operates.

If the radar detects a vehicle approaching from the side or the sonar detects close stationary objects behind the vehicle, the system gives visual and audible warnings. If the driver does not apply the brakes, the system automatically applies the brake for a moment when the vehicle is moving backwards. After the automatic brake application, the driver must depress the brake pedal to maintain brake pressure. If the driver's foot is on the accelerator pedal, the system pushes the accelerator upward before applying the brake. If you continue to press the accelerator, the system will not engage the brake.

When the shift lever is placed in the R (Reverse) position, the ●● key appears in the upper display. The BCI system can be turned off temporarily by touching the BCI system key on the upper display.

Check surroundings for safety. MOD P4A MOD Change View MOD A LSD2967

If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from the side, the system chimes a sound N (single beep), the side indicator light on the side of the approaching vehicle flashes and a yellow rectangular frame appears in the display A.

graph TD
    A["Top: Cars"] --> B["Shaded Area"]
    B --> C["Left: Car 1"]
    B --> D["Right: Car 2"]
    B --> E["Bottom: Car 3"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#cff,stroke:#333

Illustration 1

Diagram showing four cars parked in a row with directional arrows indicating movement or flow, labeled 'LSD2044' at bottom right (no text on diagram itself)

Illustration 2

NOTE:

In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be sounded by the BCI system after the first vehicle passes the sensors.

• The sonar system chime sounds
• The side indicator light on the side of the approaching vehicle flashes and
• A yellow rectangular frame appears in the display

The sonar system chime indicating there is an approaching vehicle or object behind the an object behind the vehicle has a higher vehicle is detected when your vehicle is back-priority than the BCI chime (single beep) ing up, a red frame will appear in the display indicating an approaching vehicle. If the ⑧ and the system will chime three times. sonar system detects an object behind the then, the brakes will be applied momentarily. vehicle and the BCI system detects an after the automatic brake application, the proaching vehicle at the same time the following indicators are provided:

Starting and driving

If the driver's foot is on the accelerator pedal, the system moves the accelerator pedal upward before the braking is applied. However, if you continue to accelerate, the system will not engage the brakes.

dal, or, will Check surroundings for safety. MOD MOD Pia MOD Change View A LSD2709

The system does not operate if the object is very close to the bumper.

AUDIO MENU CLIMATE Camera Back-up Collision Intervention ●ON Moving Object Detection ●ON MOD Volume — Mid + Non-viewable Area Reminder ●ON Predictive Course Lines ●ON Automatic Display with Sonar ●ON Check surroundings for safety. MOD Pru MOD Change View LSD2926

TURNING THE BCI SYSTEM ON/OFF

The BCI system automatically turns on every time the engine is started.

The BCI system can be turned off temporarily by touching the BCI system key on the upper display. The indicator on the BCI ON key turns off. When the shift lever is placed the R (Reverse) position again, the BCI system is turned on.

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BCI system.

1. Press the MENU button below the lower display screen.
2. Select "Camera/Sonar Settings."
3. Select "Camera."
4. Select "ON" to turn the "Back-up Collision Intervention" system on or off.

When the BCI system is disabled by selecting "Back-up Collision Intervention," the BCI system does not turn on automatically by the following operations:

• When the shift lever is placed in the R (Reverse) position.
• When the engine is restarted.

graph TD
    A["Stage a: Car Intersection"] --> B["Stage b: Car Collision"]
    B --> C["Stage c: Vehicle Collision"]
    C --> D["Stage d: Car Accident"]
    D --> E["Stage e: Car Disruption"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

BCI SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the BCI system. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BCI system could result in serious injury or death.

• The BCI system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.

• Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:

• Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles

• A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 15 mph (24 km/h)

- The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:

• Illustration a: When a vehicle parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor.

• Illustration b: When the vehicle is parked in an angled parking space.

• Illustration c: When the vehicle is parked on inclined ground.

• Illustration d: When an approaching vehicle turns into your vehicle's parking lot aisle.

• Illustration e: When the angle formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small.

• The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects; however, objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.

• The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:

• Severe weather

• Road spray
• Ice/frost/dirt build up on the vehicle
• Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near theradarsensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.

- The sonar sensors detect stationary objects behind the vehicle. The sonar sensor may not detect:

• Small or moving objects
• Wedge-shaped objects
• Objects close to the bumper (less than approximately 1 ft [30 cm])
• Thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.

The brake engagement by the BCI system is not as effective on a slope as it is on ground. When on a steep slope the system may not function properly.

Do not use the BCI system under the following conditions because the system may not function properly:
- When driving with a tire that is not within normal tire conditions (e.g., tire wear, low tire pressure, installation of spare tire, tire chains, non-standard wheels).
- When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake parts or suspension parts.
- Do not use the BCI system when towing trailer.

- Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY NOT AVAILABLE

If the following messages appear on the vehicle information display, a chime will sound and the BCI system will be turned off automatically:

"Unavailable: High Accelerator Temp."
If the vehicle is parked in direct sunlight under high temperature conditions (over approximately 104^ F [ 40^ C]) and then started, the BCI system may be deactivated automatically and the "Unavailable: High Accelerator Temp" message will appear in the vehicle information display for a period of time.
When the interior temperature is reduced, turn off the BCI system and turn on again.
"Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction": When side radar blockage is detected.
When the blockage is removed, turn off the BCI system and turn it on again.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the BCI system malfunctions, it will turn automatically, a chime will sound and the B system warning light (orange) will illuminate.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the working light (orange) continues to illuminate, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

off Cl arn- d 1 2 LSD2925

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The radar sensors ^① and the sonar sensors ^② for the BCI system are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

For USA

FCC: OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

5-72 Starting and driving

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA) (if so equipped)

For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Frequency bands: 24.05 - 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA system could result in serious injury or death.

- The RCTA system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a parking space, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move. Never rely solely on the RCTA system.

The RCTA system will assist you when backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

1 2 LSD2921

5-74 Starting and driving

1. Side indicator light

2. BSI/BSW/BCI/RCTA indicator

The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space.

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational.

If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from.

LSD2216

Line drawing of a car rear view with labeled component (no text or symbols on the diagram itself)

The RCTA system uses radar sensor ^15 installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle.

The radar sensors ① can detect an approaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) away.

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Warning ● ON Blind Spot Intervention ● ON Side Indicator Brightness — Standard + AUDIO MENU CLIMATE LSD2922

5-76 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RCTA SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system.

1. Press the MENU button below the lower display screen.
2. Select "Driver Assistance."
3. Select "Blind Spot Assist."
4. Select "ON" to turn the "Blind Spot Warning" system on or off.

When the RCTA system is turned on, the BSI/BSW/BCI/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle information display illuminates.

NOTE:

The RCTA system is integrated into the BSW system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the RCTA system. When the BSW is disabled, the RCTA system is also disabled.
- When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

graph TD
    A["Stage a: Car collision with arrow"] --> B["Stage b: Car collision with arrow"]
    B --> C["Stage c: Car collision with arrow"]
    C --> D["Stage d: Car collision with arrow"]
    D --> E["Stage e: Car collision with arrow"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

• Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:
• Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles
• A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 19 mph (30 km/h)
• A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
• The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:
• Illustration a: When a vehicle parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor.

• Illustration b: When the vehicle is parked in an angled parking space.

• Illustration c: When the vehicle is parked on inclined ground.

• Illustration d: When an approaching vehicle turns into your vehicle's parking lot aisle.
• Illustration e: When the angle formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small.

- The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:

- Severe weather

- Road spray

- Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the vehicle NOTE:

graph TD
    A["Top view: Parking at 100% width"] --> B["Left side: Parking at 100% width"]
    B --> C["Right side: Parking at 100% width"]
    C --> D["Left side: Parking at 100% width"]
    D --> E["Right side: Parking at 100% width"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

Illustration 1

Top-down diagram of a parking lot with cars and directional arrows indicating lanes (no text or symbols)

Illustration 2

- Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles. In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be sounded by the RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the sensors.

- Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

A Unsaddle Side Rudder Destruction LSD3036

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The "Unavailable: Side Radar Obstruction" warning message will appear and the BSI/BSW/BCI/RCTA indicator (white) will blink Ⓐ in the vehicle information display.

The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

Malfunction

When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSI/BSW/BCI/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working.

Action to take

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

1 TA k- e LSD2920

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors ^① for the BSW and RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the ra sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by terrary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. (FCC Number UR8100261)

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment. Such modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

For Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-310.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Frequency of operation: 24,05GHz - 24,25GHz

Field Strength: Not greater than 2.5V/m peak (0.25V/m average) at a distance of 3m

- If the cruise control system malfunctions, will cancel automatically.

The indicator in the vehicle information display will blink to warn the driver.

• If the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the cruise control system will be canceled automatically.
  If the 📋 indicator blinks, turn the Cruise control 📋 switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
  The 🎨 indicator may sometimes blink when the Cruise control 🎨 switch is turned on while pushing the RES+, SET- o CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise control system, perform the steps below.

A WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:

• When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed
• In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed
  it On winding or hilly roads
• On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
• In very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

Starting and driving

The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the Cruise control switch on. The indicator in and the indicator in the vehicle information display will illumination display goes out if:

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET-switch and release it. The indicator in the vehicle information display will illuminate. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.

Tap the brake pedal; the 📋 indicator goes out.

Push the Cruise control switch off. The indicator in the vehicle information display go out.

e cruise control is automatically canceled d the 📋 indicator in the vehicle informa- n display goes out if:

You depress the brake pedal while pushing the RES+ or SET- switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory.

The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:

- Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it.

- Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed.

- Push and release the SET- switch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re- lease the RES+ switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ- to the following three methods:

- The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control. - Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch. - Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods:

- Push the CANCEL switch; the indicator in the vehicle information display goes out.

- Push and release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

5-82 Starting and driving

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) (for vehicles without ProPILOT™ Assist) (if so equipped)

60mm RES + CANCEL SET - A LSD3050

Ⓐ ICC switch

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ICC system cou result in serious injury or death.

• The ICC system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
• Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.
• Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ICC system. Read and understand the Owner's Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle's speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

- In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime will not sound to warn you if you are too close the vehicle ahead. Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.

Push the ICC switto® to choose the cruise control mode between the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode and the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.

The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you within the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed can be always confirm the setting in the ICC system selected by the driver between 20 to 90 mplay. (32 to 144 km/h).

The vehicle travels at a set speed when the mode, refer to "Vehicle-to-vehicle distance road ahead is clear. control mode" in this section.

The ICC system can be set to one of two cruise control modes: For the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, refer to "Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode" in this section.

- Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: For maintaining a selected distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you up to the preset speed

- Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: For cruising at a preset speed

5-84 Starting and driving

① 60 mph ② 60 mph LSD3051

Line drawing of a sedan car with grille and license plate (no text or symbols)

HOW TO SELECT THE CRUISE CONTROL MODE

Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode: To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ①, quickly push and release the ICC switch.

Selecting the conventional (fixed speed)

cruise control mode: To choose the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the ICC swit for longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For additional information, refer to "Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode" in this section.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the ICC system automatically maintains a selected distance from the vehicle traveling in front of you according to that vehicle's speed (up to the set speed), or at the set speed when the road ahead is clear.

The ICC system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.

If the radar sens® detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance.

The system automatically controls the throttle and applies the brakes (up to approximately 40% of vehicle braking power) if necessary.

The detection range of the sensor is approximately 650 ft (200 m) ahead.

60mm RES+ CANCEL SET - LSD3052

5-86 Starting and driving

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the speed to match a slower vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the vehicle, as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicle's total braking power.

This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action.

The system will cancel and a warning chime will sound if the speed is below approximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle is not detected ahead. The system will also disen-The ICC system does not control vehicle gage when the vehicle goes above the maxspeed or warn you when you approach stadium set speed. stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must

For additional information, refer to "Approach warning" in this section.

e following items are controlled in the nicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).

When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges a standstill with a warning chime.

When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved out from its lane of travel, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed.

tionary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion.

SSDO254

Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal which deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always alert when using the ICC system.

or en d- stay 1 RES+ 3 CANCEL 5 SET - 2 4

When driving on the freeway at a set speed and approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE SWITCHES

The system is operated by the ICC switch and four control switches, all mounted on the steering wheel.

1. RES+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.

5-88 Starting and driving

2. DISTANCE switch:

Changes the vehicle's following distance:

· Long
· Middle
- Short

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed.

4. ICC switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

5. SET- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally.

1 60 mph CRUISE 2 3 4 LSD2718

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode display and indicators

The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.

1. This indicator indicates the ICC system status depending on a color:

2. ICC system ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the ICC switch is on.

3. ICC system SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set.

4. ICC system warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system.

5. Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.

1. Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance between vehicles set with the distance switch.

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front of you.

B 60--- CRUISE A LSD3054

60 mph CRUISE C REST CANCEL SET - LSD3055 LSD2743

mph

Operating vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle when the SET- switch is pushed under the to the desired speed, push the SET- switch following conditions, the system cannot be © and release it. The ICC system set indicator set and the ICC indicators will blink for ap-

To turn on the cruise control, quickly push tor (green), vehicle ahead detection indicator proximately 2 seconds:

and release the ICC switch. The ICC sys- set distance indicator and set vehicle speed
tem ON indicator (gray), set distance indica-indicator Ⓑ will come on. Take your foot off. When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) tor and set vehicle speed indicator Ⓠ come the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will main- and a vehicle ahead is not detected
on in a standby state for setting. tain the set speed. . When the shift lever is not in the D (Dri

When the SET- switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set.

A warning chime will sound and a message will pop up:

- When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC system, turn on the VDC system. Push the ICC switch to turn off the ICC system and reset the ICC switch by pushing the ICC switch again.)

For additional information about the VDC system, refer to "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" in this section.

- When VDC is operating

- When a wheel is slipping (To use the system, make sure the wheels are no ger slipping.)

① 60 mph CRUISE ② 60 mph CRUISE LSD2719

① System set display with vehicle ahead
② System set display without vehicle ahead

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed based on the road conditions. The ICC system maintains the set vehicle speed, similar standard cruise control, as long as no vehicle is detected in the lane ahead. The ICC system displays the set speed.

Vehicle detected ahead

ahead. The system then controls the vehicle speed based on the speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver selected distance.

NOTE:

The stop lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system.
When thebrakeoperates, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC system will also display the set speed and selected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected

When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by _a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to the set vehicle speed or any time the controlling the throttle and applying the ICC system is in operation, the system contrakes to match the speed of a slower vehicle. This is the distance to that vehicle.

When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.

Starting and driving

When a vehicle is no longer detected under approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the system will be canceled.

B 60 mph LSD2720

How to change the set vehicle speed

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following methods:

• Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
• Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.
• Turn the ICC switch off. The ICC indicators will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following methods:

When passing another vehicle, the set speed indicator Ⓑ will flash when the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.

Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch.

of Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set vehicle speed will increase by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).

- Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following methods:

• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it.
• Push and hold the SET- switch. The set vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).
• Push, then quickly release the SET-switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h).

Res + CANCEL SET - A LSD3056

How to change the set distance to the vehicle ahead

1 2 3 LSD2752

Distance Approximate distance at 60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be 1. selected at any time depending on the traffic conditions.

Long 200 (60)

Middle 150 (45)

1. Short 100 (30)

Each time the distance ⚡ switch Ⓐ is pushed, the set distance will change to long, middle, short and back to long again, in that sequence.

The distance to the vehicle ahead will change according to the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance.

If the engine is stopped, the set distance becomes "long." (Each time the engine is started, the initial setting becomes "long.")

Approach warning

The warning chime will not sound when:

Automatic cancellation

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and ICC s tem display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:

- The vehicle approaches other vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.

A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled:

• The chime sounds.
• The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.

The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:

• When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing.
• When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing.
• When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle driven with some damage).

The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when the ICC sensor detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on the side of the road. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when entering or exiting a curve. In these cases you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being

- When the vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)

When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill

When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive position or Manual mode

When the electronic parking brake system is applied

• When the VDC system is turned off
• When VDC operates

When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to the sensor

• When a wheel slips
• When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

• The ICC system is primarily intended for . use on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is not advisable to use the ICC system in city traffic or congested areas.

• The ICC system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system should be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.

• As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the ICC system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.

• If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the htvehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel once it judges that the vehicle has come to a standstill and sound a warning chime. To prevent the vehicle from moving, the driver must depress the brake pedal.
• Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The ICC system may not be able to maintain the selected distance between vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some circumstances.

-The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or weather conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system under the following conditions:

• On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves
• On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc.
• During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
• When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around the distance sensor
• On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent braking may result in overheating the brakes)
• On repeated uphill and downhill roads
• When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration
• Interference by other radar sources

- Do not use the ICCsystem if you are towing a trailer. The system may not detect vehicle ahead.

- In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. Always stay alert and avoid using the ICC system where not recommended in this warning section.

- When your vehicle is towing a trailer, etc. A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the centerline of the The ICC system is designed to automatically lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead check the sensor's operation within the limi-may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane.

The radar sensor will not detect the following actions of the system.

objects:

• Stationary and slow moving vehicles
- Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
- Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
- Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane

The sensor generally detects the signals returned from the vehicle ahead. Therefore, if the sensor cannot detect the reflection from the vehicle ahead, the ICC system may not maintain the selected distance.

When the sensor is covered with dirt or is if obstructed, the system will automatically be by canceled. If the sensor is covered with ice, ing transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect them. In these vehicle instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean the sensor regularly.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from vehicle traveling ahead.

The following are some conditions in which the sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead and the system may not operate properly:

The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.

- When snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor's detection.

graph TD
    A["Top Left Road"] --> B["Left Car"]
    B --> C["Right Car"]
    C --> D["Bottom Right Road"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    note right of A "SSD0252"

Diagram showing multiple cars on curved road with two black triangular obstacles, no text or symbols present

When driving on some roads, such as wind if this occurs, the ICC system may warn you ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads by blinking the system indicator and sound- which are under construction, the radar sending the chime unexpectedly. You will have to sor may detect vehicles in a different lane, manually control the proper distance away may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling from the vehicle traveling ahead. ahead. This may cause the radar system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

60km/h LSD2938

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

The following are conditions in which the ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead.

Condition A

Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set:

• When the VDC system is turned off
• When the VDC operates
• When a vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)
• When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill
• When the shift lever is not in the D (Driv or Manual mode
• When the electronic parking brake is applied
• When a wheel slips
• When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted

Starting and driving

Action to take

When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the switch. Turn the ICC system back on to use the system.

Condition B

When the radar sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed the ICC system will automatically be canceled.

The chime will sound and the "Unavailable: Front Radar Blocked" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

Unavailable Front Radar Blocked LSD2985

Action to take

When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the ICC system warning (yellow) and display the "Unavailable: Front Radar Blocked" message.

Action to take

When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the ICC system back on to use the system.

Condition C

When the ICC system is not operating properly, a chime sounds and the ICC system warning light (orange) will come on.

If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, press the Park button to place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area of the front bumper and restart the engine. If the "Unavailable: Front Radar Blocked" warning message continues to be displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

60 mph CRUISE LSD2833

Line drawing of a sedan car with grille and license plate (no text or symbols on the car itself)

Action to take
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the sensor for the ICC system is located on the front of the vehicle.

the engine, resume driving and set the ICC system again.

To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

If it is not possible to set the system or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system is malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Always keep the sensor area clean.

Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.

. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Information:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

5-102 Starting and driving

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to oper-

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL MODE

This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

A WARNING

• In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn you if you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.
• Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.
• Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.

• Do not use the conventional (fixed speed) uncruise control mode when driving under the following conditions:

• When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed

• In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed
• On winding or hilly roads
• On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
• In very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

1 3 CANCEL SET - RES + 2 4 LSD3057

1 60 mph 2 LSD2724

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switches

1. CANCEL switch: Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed
2. RES+ switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally
3. SET- switch: Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally
4. ICC switch: Master switch to activate the system

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators

The display is located in the vehicle information display.

1. Cruise indicator:

This indicator indicates the condition of the ICC system depending on a color.

• Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the ICC switch is on
• Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set

- Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system

1. Set vehicle speed indicator:

This indicator indicates the set vehicle speed. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.

B 60 mph A LSD3058

off. When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off.

To use the ICC system again, quickly push and release the ICC switch (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ICC switch off when not using the ICC system.

Operating conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the ICC switch Ⓐ for longer than about 1.5 seconds.

When pushing ICC switch on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators® are displayed in the vehicle information display. After you hold ICC switch on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns off. The cruise indicator appears. You can now set your desired cruising speed. Pushing the ICC switch again will turn the system completely

5-104 Starting and driving

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET- © switch and release it. (The color of the cruise indicator changes to green and set vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one following methods: of the following three methods:

1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
3. Turn the ICC switch off. Both the cruise indicator and vehicle speed indicator will turn off.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:

1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it.
2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.

3. Push, then quickly release the SET-switch. Each time you do this, the set of speed will decrease by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

4. Depress the accelerator pedal. When t vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch.

To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed

1. Push and hold the RES+ switch. When is the vehicle attains the desired speed, release the switch.
2. Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

60 MPH LSD2942

5-106 Starting and driving

System temporarily unavailable

A chime sounds under the following conditions and the control is automatically canceled:

• When the vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed
• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or manual shift mode
• When the electronic parking brake is applied
• When the VDC operates (including the traction control system)
• When a wheel slips

When the system is not operating properly, the chime sounds and the color of the cruise indicator will change to orange.

Action to take

If the color of the cruise indicator changes to orange, stop the vehicle in a safe place and press the Park button to place the vehicle in the P (Park) position. Turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving, and then perform the setting again.

PROPILOT™ ASSIST (if so equipped)

If it is not possible to set or the indicator stays on, it may indicate that the system malfunctioning. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the ProPILOT Assist system could result in serious injury or death.

• ProPILOT Assist is nota self-driving system. Within the limits of its capabilities, as described in this manual, it helps the driver with certain driving activities.
  The ProPILOT Assist system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded driving. ProPILOT Assist will not always steer the vehicle to keep it in the lane. The Pro PILOT Assist system is not designed to prevent loss of control. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

• There are limitations to the ProPILOT Assist system capability. The ProPILOT Assist system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather, and road conditions. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drivesafely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

• The ProPILOT Assist system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device.

• The ProPILOT Assist system is for highway use only and is not intended for city driving. Failure to apply the brakes or steer the vehicle when necessary may result in a serious accident.
• Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.
• Never take your hands off the steering wheel when driving. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and drive your vehicle safely.
  The ProPILOT Assist system does not react to stationary and slow moving vehicles.
  nd Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ProPILOT Assist system. Read and understand the Owner's Manual thoroughly before using the ProPILOT Assist system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system prevent accidents or to control the vehicle's speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ProPILOT Assist system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

A B LSD2943

keep the vehicle centered in the traveling lane when clear lane markings are detected.

The ProPILOT Assist system is intended to enhance the operation of the vehicle when following a vehicle traveling in the same lane and direction.

The ProPILOT Assist system uses a multi-sensing front camera ^A installed behind the windshield and a radar sensor located on the front of the vehicle ^B to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane and to monitor the lane markers. If the vehicle detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance. The system will also help

5-108 Starting and driving

1 2 3 4 LSD2996

1. Steering-wheel-mounted control (left)
2. Vehicle information display
3. Steering-wheel-mounted control (right)
4. ProPILOT Assist switch

The ProPILOT Assist system has the following two functions:

1. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

The ICC system can be set to one of tv cruise control modes:

- Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode: For cruising at a preset speed

NOTE:

Steering assist is not available in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.

- Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode: The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you within the speed range of 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to set speed. The set speed can be selected by the driver between 20 to

Starting and driving 5-109

90 mph (32 to 144 km/h). When theNOTE:

vehicle ahead slows to a stop, your vehicle gradually decelerates to a standstill. When the vehicle is stopped the ICC system maintains braking force to keep your vehicle stopped.

Even if the Forward Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection setting is turned off by the driver using the "Driver Assistance" menu in the lower display, Forward Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection will be automatically turned on when ICC is used.

NOTE:

When your vehicle is stopped for less than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to move, your vehicle will start moving again automatically.

• When the vehicle ahead begins to move forward, push the RES+ switch on the steering-wheel-mounted control or lightly depress the accelerator pedal to release the brake. The ICC system will restart to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you.

• When no vehicle is detected ahead within the driver selected distance, the vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The speed must be above 20 mph (32 km/h) to use this function.

• Steering Assist

The Steering Assist function controls the steering system to help keep your vehicle within the traveling lane.

When there is no vehicle ahead, Steerin Assist is not available at speeds under 37 mph (60 km/h).

① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ ⑦ ⑧ LSD2945

ProPILOT™ Assist switches

1. DISTANCE switch:

2. Long

3. Middle
4. Short

Line drawing of a car interior showing steering wheel, dashboard, and steering wheel (no text or symbols)

6. Steering Assist switch:

Turns the Steering Assist function on or off

6 7 8 9 60 mph CRUISE 5 4 3 2 1

2. RES+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally

3. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the ProPILOT Assist system

4. SET- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally

5. ProPILOT Assist switch:

Turns the ProPILOT Assist system on or off

The ProPILOT™ Assist system display and indicators

1. Lane marker indicator

Indicates whether the system detects lane markers

• No lane markers displayed: Steering Assist is turned off
• Lane marker indicator (gray): No lane markers detected
• Lane marker indicator (green): Lane markers detected
• Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane departure is detected

Starting and driving 5-111

2. Set distance indicator

Displays the selected distance

3. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

Indicates whether the system detects a vehicle in front of you

4. Steering Assist indicator

Indicates the status of the Steering Assist function by the color of the indicator

• Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering Assist standby
• Steering Assist indicator (green): Steering Assist active
• Steering Assist indicator (orange): Steering Assist malfunction

5. ProPILOT Assist activation

Displays once the ProPILOT Assist system is activated

6. ProPILOT Assist status indicator

Indicates the status of the ProPILOT Assist system by the color of the indicator

- ProPILOT Assist status indicator (white): ProPILOT Assist is on but in standby.

- ProPILOT Assist status indicator (blue): ProPILOT Assist active

7. Steering Assist status indicator/warning

Displays the status of the Steering Assist by the color of the indicator/warning

• No Steering Assist status indicator displayed: Steering Assist is turned off
• Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering Assist standby
• Steering Assist indicator (green): Steering Assist active
• Steering Assist indicator (yellow): Steering Assist malfunction

8. Speed control status indicator/warning

Displays the status of speed control by the color and shape of the indicator/warning

- Speed control status indicator/warning (gray): ICC standby

• Speed control status indicator/warning (solid green): ICC (distance control mode) is active (vehicle detected ahead). Your vehicle matches the speed of the vehicle ahead.
• Speed control status indicator/warning (green outline): ICC (maintain speed control mode) is active (no vehicle detected ahead). Your vehicle maintains the driver-selected set speed.
• Speed control status indicator/warning (solid yellow): ICC malfunction

9. Set vehicle speed indicator

Indicates the set vehicle speed

5-112 Starting and driving

TURNING THE CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL MODE ON

NOTE:

ProPILOT™ Assist provides no approach warnings, automatic braking, or steering assist in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.

To choose the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the Pro-PILOT Assist switch for longer than approximately 1.5 seconds. For additional information, refer to "Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode" in this section.

B mph A RED+ CANCEL OFF- LSD2946

E 60 mph CRUISE D C LSD2947

OPERATING PROPILOT™ ASSIST

1. Push the ProPILOT Assist switch Ⓐ. This turns on the ProPILOT Assist system and displays the status of the ProPILOT Assist system on the vehicle information display Ⓑ.
2. Accelerate or decelerate your vehicle to the desired speed.
3. Push the SET-switch. The ProPILOT Assist system begins to automatically maintain the set speed. The ProPILOT Assist activation indicator and ProPILOT Assist status indicator illuminate (blue). When a vehicle ahead is traveling

at a speed of 20 mph (32 km/h) or bel- and the SET- switch is pushed, the set speed of your vehicle is 20 mph (32 km/h).

NOTE:

Turning the ProPILOT Assist system on will turn on the Lane Departure Prevention system at the same time. For additional information, refer to "Lane Departure Prevention" in this section.

MPH LSD2987

• When the VDC system is off. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" in this section.
• When the VDC system (including the traction control system) is operating
• When a wheel is slipping
• When any door is open
• When the driver's seat belt is not fastened

RES+ CANCEL SET-

When the SET-switch is pushed under the following conditions, the ProPILOT Assist system cannot be set and the set vehicle speed indicator ① blinks for approximately 2 seconds:

• When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is not detected
• When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position or manual shift mode
• When the electronic parking brake is applied
• When the brakes are operated by the driver

5-114 Starting and driving

How to change the set vehicle speed

The set vehicle speed can be adjusted.

To change to a faster cruising speed:

• Push and hold the RES+ switch. The set vehicle speed increases by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).
• Push, then quickly release, the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

To change to a slower cruising speed:

• Push and hold the SET- switch. The set vehicle speed decreases by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h).
• Push, then quickly release, the SET-switch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

How to momentarily accelerate or decelerate

• Depress the accelerator pedal when acceleration is required. Release the accelerator pedal to resume the previously seven vehicle speed.
• Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required. Control by the ProPILOT™ Assist system is canceled. Push the RES+ switch to resume the previously set vehicle speed.

WARNING

When the accelerator pedal is depressed and you are approaching the vehicle ahead, the ICC system will neither control the brake nor warn the driver with the chime and display. The driver must manually control the vehicle speed to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead. Failure to do so could result in severe personal injury or death.

NOTE:

When you accelerate by depressing the accelerator pedal or decelerate by pushing the SET- switch and the vehicle travels faster than the speed set by the driver, the set speed vehicle indicator will blink.

RES+ CANCEL SET- A

LSD2949

How to change the set distance to the vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be selected at any time.

Each time the DISTANCE switch Ⓐ is pushed, the set distance will change to long, middle, short and back to long again in that sequence.

1 CRUISE 2 CRUISE 3 CRUISE

LSD2806

Distance Approximate distance at 60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

1. Long 200 (60)
2. Middle 150 (45)
3. Short 90 (30)

The distance to the vehicle ahead changes automatically according to the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, the longer the distance.
- If the engine is stopped, the set distance becomes "long." (Each time the engine is started, the initial setting becomes "long.")

Steering Assist Steering Assist • ON AUDIO MENU CLIMATE LSD2950

① Lower display buttons
② Lower display
③ Steering Assist switch

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE STEERING ASSIST

Use the following methods to enable or disable the Steering Assist.

Steering Assist switch:

To turn the Steering Assist on or off, push t Steering Assist switch③ on the instrument panel.

NOTE:

When the Steering Assist switch is used to turn the system on or off, the system remembers the setting even if the ignition switch is cycled. The switch must be pushed again to change the setting to on or off.
The Steering Assist switch changes the status of the "Steering Assist" selection made in the "Settings" screen in the lower display.

Setting in the lower display:

1. Press the MENU button below the lower display screen.
2. Select "Driver Assistance."
3. Select "Steering Assist."
4. Select "ON" to turn the "Steering Assist" system on or off.

NOTE:

• When the Cruise screen is displayed on the vehicle information display, press the OK button on the steering wheel to call up the "Driving Aids" setting display in the upper display.
• When enabling/disabling the system through the lower display, the system retains the current settings even if the engine is restarted.

How to cancel the ProPILOT™ Assist system

To cancel the ProPILOT Assist system, use one of the following methods:

• Push the CANCEL switch.
• Tap the brake pedal (except at a standstill).

5-118 Starting and driving

- Push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn, the system off. The ProPILOT Assist status indicator will go out.

When the ProPILOT Assist system is canceled while the vehicle is stopped, the electronic parking brake is automatically activated.

WARNING

When you leave the vehicle, make sure to push the ProPILOT Assist switch to turn the system off, place the shift lever in the (Park) position, and turn the engine off.

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) (for vehicles with ProPILOT™ Assist)

A WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the CC system could result in serious injury or death.

The ICC system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is for highway use only and it is not intended for congested areas or city driving. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

• There are limitations to the ICC system capability. The ICC system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather, and road conditions. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
• Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.
• The ICC system does not react to stationary and slow moving vehicles.

Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ICC system. Read and understand the Owner's Manual thoroughly before using the ICC system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle's speed in emergency situations. Do not use the ICC system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

• The ICC system is only an aid to assist driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is for highway use only and it is not intended for congested areas or city driving. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
• There are limitations to the ICC system capability. The ICCsystemdoesnotfunction in all driving, traffic, weather, and road conditions. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be control of the vehicle at all times.
• Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.
• The ICC system does not react to stationary and slow moving vehicles.

ICC system operation

The ICC system is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the speed to match a slower vehicle ahead. The system decelerates the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicle's total

braking power. This system should only be The ICC system operates as follows:

used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the ICC system sounds a warning chime and blinks the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action.

The ICC system cancels and a warning chime sounds if the speed is below approximately 15 mph (24 km/h) and a vehicle is not detected ahead.

When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the ICC system maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).

When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the ICC system adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. Once your vehicle stops, the ICC system keeps the vehicle stopped.

• When your vehicle is at a standstill for more than 3 seconds and the vehicle ahead begins to accelerate, push the RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelerator pedal. The ICC system starts to follow the vehicle ahead.
• When the vehicle traveling ahead moves to a different traveling lane, the ICC system accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates or traffic congestion.

SSD0254

Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, the system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead.

Depress the accelerator to properly accelerate your vehicle when acceleration is required for a lane change. Depress the brake pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead due to sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC system.

When driving on the freeway at a set speed and approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the ICC system adjusts the speed to maintain the distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, the ICC system accelerates and maintains the speed up to the set speed. Pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the set speed on winding or hilly roads. If this occurs, you will have to manually control the vehicle speed.

60 mph CRUISE LSD2988

System set display with no vehicle detected System set display with vehicle ahead ahead Vehicle detected ahead

No vehicle detected ahead

The driver sets the desired vehicle speed the ICC system decelerates the vehicle by based on the road conditions. The ICC sys-controlling the throttle and applying the tem maintains the set vehicle speed, similar brakes to match the speed of a slower v standard cruise control, as long as no vehiclehead. The ICC system then controls the is detected in the lane ahead. The ICC syste ride speed based on the speed of the ve displays the set speed. ahead to maintain the driver selected dis-

When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, vehicle information display.

NOTE:

The stop lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system.

When thebrake is applied by the system, a noise may be heard. This is not a mal function.

When the ICC system detects a vehicle ahead, the vehicle ahead detection indicator and the speed control status indicator (distance control mode) illuminates (solid green 📐).

Vehicle ahead stops

When the vehicle ahead decelerates to stop, your vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the system capability. Once your vehicle stops, the ICC system automatically applies the brakes to keep the vehicle stopped. When your vehicle is at a standstill, the "(RES+) Press to start" message is displayed on the

NOTE:

When your vehicle stops for less than 3 seconds, your vehicle will automatically follow the vehicle as it accelerates from a stop.

Vehicle ahead accelerates

When your vehicle is stopped and the vehicle ahead begins to accelerate, push the RES+ switch or lightly depress the accelerator pedal. The ICC system starts to follow the vehicle ahead.

Starting and driving

Vehicle ahead not detected

When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC system then maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off and speed control status indicator (maintain speed control mode) illuminates (green outline 📄).

The ICC system gradually accelerates to the set speed, but you can depress the accelerator pedal to quickly accelerate. When a vehicle is no longer detected and your vehicle traveling under approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the ICC system automatically ca cels.

B 60 mph

LSD2720

When passing another vehicle, the set speed indicator ⑧ flashes when the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed. Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC system, you can depress the accelerator pedal when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle rapidly.

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system

warns the driver with the chime and ICC system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:

• The chime sounds.
• The vehicle ahead detection indicator and set distance indicator blink.
• You judge it necessary to maintain a safe distance.

The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:

When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing.

When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing.

When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle. e warning chime will not sound when:

- Your vehicle approaches other vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.

The accelerator pedal is depressed, over-riding the system.

5-122 Starting and driving

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may flash when the radar sensor detects objects on the side of the vehicle or on the side of the road. This may cause the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The radar sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding, narrow, or hilly roads or when the vehicle is entering or exiting a curve. In these cases, you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle conditions (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).

ICC system limitations

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the ICC system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death:

- The ICC system is primarily intended for use on straight, dry, open roads with light traffic. It is not advisable to use the ICC system in city traffic or congested areas.

The ICC system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. This system should be used in evenly flowing traffic. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves or on icy roads, in heavy ra or in fog.

As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the ICC system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded driving or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Deelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.

- When the ICC system automatically brings the car to a stop, your vehicle can automatically accelerate if the vehicle is stopped for less than approximately 3 seconds. Be prepared to stop your vehicle if necessary.

Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manually control the proper following distance. The ICC system may not be able to maintain the selected distance between vehicles (following distance) or selected vehicle speed under some circumstances.

- The system may not detect the vehicle in airfront of you in certain road or weather conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the ICC system under the following dis-conditions:

• On roads with heavy, high-speed traffic or sharp curves
• On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc.
• During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)
• When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the bumper around the distance sensor
• On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set vehicle speed and frequent braking may result in overheating the brakes)

• On repeated uphill and downhill roads

• When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration

• Interference by other radar sources.
• Do notuse the ICCsystem if you are towing a trailer. The system may not detect a vehicle ahead.
• In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. Alwaysstay alert and avoid using the ICC system where not recommended in this warning section.
  The ICC system will not detect the following objects:
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane
• Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane
  The following are some conditions in which The detection zone of the radar sensor is the radar sensor cannot properly detect a limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detect-vehicle ahead and the system may not operation zone for the ICC system to maintain the ate properly: selected distance from the vehicle ahead. A
• When the sensor detection is reduced (conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms, and road spray from other vehicles)
• Driving on a steep downhill slope or roof with sharp curves
• Driving on a bumpy road surface, such an uneven dirt road
• If dirt, ice, snow or other material is co ering the radar sensor area
  A complicated-shaped vehicle such as a car carrier trailer or flatbed truck/trailer near the vehicle ahead.
  • Interference by other radar sources
• When your vehicle is towing a trailer, et
• When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or cargo area of your vehicle.
  The ICC system is designed to automatically check the radar sensor's operation within the limitations of the system.
  The detection zone of the radar sensor is limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the ICC system to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead. A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the center line of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane.
  If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime. The driver may have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.
  The ICC system (with ProPILOT™ Assist) uses a multi-sensing front camera. The following are some conditions in which the camera may not properly detect a vehicle and detection of a vehicle ahead may be delayed:

• Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms, and road spray from other vehicles)
  The camera area of the windshield is fogged up or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc.

• Strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) enters the front camera

• Strong light causes the area around the pedestrian to be cast in a shadow, making it difficult to see
• A sudden change in brightness occurs (for example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or shaded area or lightning flashes)

graph TD
    A["Top Left: Car"] --> B["Arrow to Center"]
    C["Top Right: Car"] --> D["Arrow to Center"]
    B --> E["Downward Arrow"]
    D --> F["Downward Arrow"]
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#dfd,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#dfd,stroke:#333

Diagram showing multiple cars on curved road with two black triangular obstacles, no text or symbols present

When driving on some roads, such as wind-If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads by blinking the system indicator and sounding which are under construction, the radar senthe chime unexpectedly. You will have to sor may detect vehicles in a different lane, manually control the proper distance away may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling from the vehicle traveling ahead. ahead. This may cause the radar system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. Automatic cancellation

The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. The following are conditions in which the ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead.

Condition A

Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set:

• Any door is open.
• The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
• The vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
• Your vehicle has been stopped by the ICC system for approximately 3 minutes or longer.

The shift lever is not in the D (Drive) position or manual shift mode.

• The electronic parking brake is applied.
• The VDC system is turned off.

© The Forward Emergency Braking with Pedestrian Detection applies harder braking.

VDC (including the traction control system) operates.

· A wheel slips.

• When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to the sensor.

• When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted.

• When distance measurement becomes impaired due to adhesion of dirt or obstruction to the sensor.

• When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted.

bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls), the system may illuminate the system warning light and display the "Unavailable: Front Radar Blocked" message.

Action to take:

Action to take:

Condition B

When the above driving conditions no longer exist, turn the system back on.

When the conditions listed above are no long when the radar sensor of the front bumper present, turn the system off using the covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC ProPILOT™ Assist switch. Turn the ProPI- system will automatically be canceled.

LOT Assist system back on to use the syst

The chime will sound and the "Unavailable: Front Radar Blocked" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

ICC system malfunction

If the ICC system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, and the speed control status warning (orange) will illuminate.

NOTE:

When the ICC system is canceled under t following conditions at a standstill, the el tronic parking brake is automatically activ- vated:

• Any door is open.
  The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
• Your vehicle has been stopped by the system for approximately 3 minutes or longer.
• The shift lever is not in the D (Drive) sition or manual shift mode.
  · The VDC system is turned off.

Action to take:

Action to take:

If the warning message appears, stop the vehicle in a safe place, press the Park button to place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, in a safe place. Turn the engine off, restart and turn the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor is not possible to set the ICC system or the sor area of the front bumper and restart the indicator stays on, it may be a malfunction.

engine. If the "Unavailable: Front Radar Although the normal driving can be contin-Blocked" warning message continues to be used, the ICC system should be inspected. It is displayed, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

For this service.

Condition C

When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long

ICC sensor maintenance

The radar sensor is located on the front of 1 vehicle.

Starting and driving

To keep the ICC system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:

· Always keep the sensor area clean.
- Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.
- Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure or malfunction.

- Do not attach metallic objects near the accident, it is recommended that you visit an sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could INFINITI retailer.

- Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bumper.

Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.

The camera sensor is located above the inside mirror.

To keep the proper operation of the systems and prevent a system malfunction, be sure to observe the following:

· Always keep the windshield clean.
- Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.

Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's capability and of detecting the lane markers.

- Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit.

If the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.

STEERING ASSIST

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Steering Assist could result in serious injury or death.

- The Steering Assist is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded driving. The Steering Assist will not always steer the vehicle to keep it in the lane. It is not designed to prevent loss of control. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

As there is a performance limit to the Steering Assist's capability, never rely solely on the system. The Steering Assist does not function in all driving, traffic, weather, and road conditions. Always drive safely, pay attention to the operation of the vehicle, and manually control your vehicle appropriately.

- The Steering Assist is intended for use on well-developed freeways or highways with gentle (moderate) curves. To avoid risk of an accident, do not use this system on local or non-highway roads.

- The Steering Assist only steers the vehicle to maintain its position in the center of a lane. The vehicle will not steer to avoid objects in the road in front of the vehicle or to avoid a vehicle moving into your lane.

It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, keep the vehicle in the traveling lane, and be in control of the vehicle at all times. Never take your hands off the steering wheel when driving. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and drive your vehicle safely.

5-128 Starting and driving

- Always drive carefully and attentively when using the Steering Assist. Read and understand the Owner's Manual thoroughly before using the Steering Assist. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle's speed in emergency situations. Do not use the Steering Assist except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

Steering Assist operation

The Steering Assist controls the steering system to help keep your vehicle near the center of the lane when driving. The Steering Assist is combined with the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system. For additional information, refer to "Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (with ProPILOT™ Assist)" in this section.

The Steering Assist can be activated when the following conditions are met:

• The ICC system is activated.
• Lane markers on both sides are clearly detected.
• A vehicle ahead is detected (when the vehicle is driven at speeds under 37 mph [60 km/h])
• The driver grips the steering wheel.

The vehicle is driven at the center of the lane.

The turn signals are not operated.

The windshield wiper is not operated in the low (LO) or high (HI) speed operation (the steering assist function is disabled after the wiper operates for approximately 10 seconds).

① 60 mph CRUISE ② ③ LSD2990

Steering Assist display and indicators

1. Steering Assist status indicator/warning

Displays the status of the Steering Assist by the color of the indicator/warning

• Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering Assist standby
• Steering Assist indicator (green): Steering Assist active
• Steering Assist indicator (yellow): Steering Assist malfunction

2. Steering Assist indicator

Indicates the status of the Steering Assist by the color of the indicator

• Steering Assist indicator (gray): Steering Assist standby
• Steering Assist indicator (green): Steering Assist active

3. Lane marker indicator

Indicates whether the system detects the lane marker

• Lane marker indicator (gray): Lane markers not detected
• Lane marker indicator (green): Lane markers detected
• Lane marker indicator (yellow): Lane departure is detected

When the Steering Assist is in operation, the Steering Assist status indicator ^④ , the Steering Assist indicator ^② , and the lane marker indicator ③ on the vehicle information display turn green. A chime sounds when the Steering Assist initially activates.

When the Steering Assist deactivates, the Steering Assist status indicator ^① , the Steering Assist indicator ^② , and the lane marker indicator ③ on the vehicle information display turn gray and a chime sounds twice.

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)

When a curve or strong cross wind exceeds the capabilities of the Steering Assist and your vehicle approaches either the left or the right side of the traveling lane, a warning chime sounds and the LDP indicator light (orange) on the instrument panel flashes to alert the driver. Then, the LDP system automatically applies the brakes for a short period of time to help assist the driver to return the vehicle to the center of the traveling lane. This action is in addition to any Steering Assist actions.

60 mph 1 Warning LSD2972

Hands on detection

When the Steering Assist is activated, it monitors the driver's steering wheel operation.

If the steering wheel is not operated or the driver takes his/her hands off the steering wheel for a period of time, the warning appears in the vehicle information display.

If the driver does not operate the steering wheel after the warning has been displayed, an audible alert sounds and the warning flashes in the vehicle information display, followed by a quick brake application to request the driver to take control of the vehicle again

If the driver still does not respond, the ProPI LOT™ Assist turns on the hazard flasher and slows the vehicle to a complete stop.

The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time by steering, braking, accelerating, or operating the ProPILOT Assist switch.

WARNING

Steering Assist is not a system for a hands-free driving. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and drive your vehicle safely. Failure to do so could cause a collision resulting in serious personal injury or death.

NOTE:

If the driver softly touches (instead of firmly grips) thesteeringwheel,theSteering Assist may not detect the steering wheel operation and the warning may be displayed. When the driver holds and operates the steering wheel again, the warning turns off and the Steering Assist resumes automatically.

Steering Assist limitations

WARNING

- In the following situations, the camera may not detect lane markers correctly or may detect lane markers incorrectly and the Steering Assist may not operate properly:

• When driving on roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers, lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly, nonstandard lane markers, or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.
• When driving on roads with discontinued lane markers
• When driving on roads with a widening or narrowing lane width
• When driving on roads where there are multiple lanes or unclear lane markers due to road construction
• When driving on roads where there are sharply contrasting objects, such as shadows, snow, water, wheel ruts, seams, or lines remaining after road repairs (the Steering Assist could detect these items as lane markers)
• When driving on roads where the traveling lane merges or separates

Do not use the Steering Assist under the following conditions because the system may not properly detect lane markers.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

• During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, dust, etc.)
• When rain, snow, sand, etc., is thrown up by the wheels of other vehicles
• When dirt, oil, ice, snow, water, or another object adheres to the camera unit
• When the lens of the camera unit is foggy
• When strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) shines on the camera
• When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or the headlights are off in tunnels or darkness
• When a sudden change in brightness occurs (for example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or is under a bridge)
• When driving on roads where the traveling lane merges or separates or where there are temporary lane markers because of road construction

- When there is a lane closure due to road repairs

• When driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road
• When driving onsharp curves or winding roads
• When driving on repeated uphill and downhill roads
• Do not use the Steering Assist under the following conditions because the system will not operate properly:
• When driving with a tire that is not within normal tire conditions (for example, tire wear, abnormal tire pressure, installation of a spare tire, tire chains, nonstandard wheels)
• When the vehicle is equipped with non-original brake or suspension parts
• When an object that obstructs the camera unit detection range is attached
• When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or luggage of your vehicle
• When the vehicle load capacity is exceeded
• When towing a trailer or other vehicle

- Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the beep may not be heard.

- For the ProPILOT™ Assist system to operate properly, the windshield in front of the camera must be clean. Replace worn wiper blades. The correct size wiper blades must be used to help make sure the windshield is kept clean. Only use Genuine INFINITI wiper blades, or equivalent wiper blades, that are specifically designed for use on your vehicle model and model year. It is recommended that you visit your INFINITI retailer for the correct parts for your vehicle.

Steering Assist temporary standby

Automatic standby due to driving operation:

When the driver activates the turn signal, the Steering Assist is temporarily placed in a standby mode. (The Steering Assist restarts automatically when the operating conditions are met again.)

Automatic standby:

In the following cases, a warning message is displayed along with the chime, and the Steering Assist is placed in a temporary

standby mode. (The Steering Assist restarts automatically when the operating conditions are met again.)

When lane markers on both sides are no longer detected

When a vehicle ahead is no longer detected under approximately 37 mph (60 km/h)

Steering Assist cancel

Under the following conditions, the Steering Assist cancels, and the Steering Assist status indicator and the Steering Assist indicator turn off:

- When unusual lane markers appear in the traveling lane or when the lane marker cannot be correctly detected for some time due to certain conditions (for example, a snow rut, the reflection of light on a rainy day, the presence of several unclear lane markers)

When the windshield wiper operates in the low (LO) or high (HI) speed operator (the Steering Assist is disabled when the wiper operates for more than approximately 10 seconds)

Action to take:

Turn the ICC system off using the CANCEL switch. When the conditions listed above are

no longer present, turn the ICC system on again.

Steering Assist malfunction

When the system malfunctions, it turns off automatically. The Steering Assist status warning illuminates (orange). A chime may sound depending on the situation.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off, restart the engine, resume driving, and set the Intelligent Cruise Control system again. If the warning (orange) continues to illuminate, the Steering Assist is malfunction. If ing. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked. In It is recommended that you visit an INFINITY retailer for this service.

Steering Assist maintenance

The camera sensor is located above the inside mirror.

To keep the proper operation of the system and prevent a system malfunction, be sure observe the following:

· Always keep the windshield clean.
- Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material) or install an accessory near the camera unit.
Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's capability of detecting the lane markers.

Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. Do not touch the camera lens or remove the screw located on the camera unit.

the camera unit is damaged due to an accident, it is recommended that you visit an NFINITI retailer.

Radio frequency statement

For USA/Canada

Model: ARS4-A

IC: 4135A-ARS4A

FCC ID: OAYARS4A

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Information:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.

5-134 Starting and driving

The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

CONVENTIONAL (fixed speed) CRUISE CONTROL MODE

NOTE:

ProPILOT™ Assist provides no approach warnings, automatic braking, or steering assist in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode.

This mode allows driving at a speed between 25 to 90 mph (40 to 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

WARNING

• In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, a warning chime does not sound to warn you if you are too close the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-un vehicle distance is detected.
• Pay special attention to the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you or a collision could occur.
• Always confirm the setting in the ICC system display.

Do not use the conventional (fixedspeed) cruise control mode when driving under the following conditions:

• When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed
• In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed
• On winding or hilly roads
• On slipperyroads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)
• In very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.

to

1 3 RES + - CANCEL SET - 2 4

LSD3076

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control switches

1. CANCEL switch:
   Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed
2. RES+ switch:
   Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally
3. SET- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed incrementally

1. ProPILOT ^™ Assist switch:

Master switch to activate the system

1 60 mph 2 LSD2724

LSD3077

Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicators

The display is located in the vehicle information display.

1. Cruise indicator:

This indicator indicates the condition of the ICC system depending on a color.

• Cruise control ON indicator (gray): Indicates that the ProPILOT™ Assist switch is on
  · Cruise control SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set

5-136 Starting and driving

- Cruise control warning (yellow): Indicates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system

1. Set vehicle speed indicator:

This indicator indicates the set vehicle speed. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.

B 60 mph A

Operating conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push and hold the Pro-PILOT™ Assist switch Ⓐ for longer than about 1.5 seconds.

When pushing the ProPILOT Assist switch on, the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode display and indicator® are displayed in the vehicle information display. After you hold the ProPILOT Assist switch on for longer than about 1.5 seconds, the ICC system display turns off. The cruise indicator appears. You can now set your desired cruis-

ing speed. Pushing the ProPILOT Assist switch again will turn the system completely off. When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position, the system is also automatically turned off.

To use the ICC system again, quickly push and release the ProPILOT Assist switch (vehicle-to vehicle distance control mode) or push and hold it (conventional cruise control mode) again to turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control, make sure to turn the ProPILOT Assist switch off when not using the ICC system.

60 mph C LSD3078

To set cruising speed, accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET- switch and release it. (The color of the cruise indicator changes to green and set vehicle speed indicator comes on.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will main- 3. tain the set speed.

To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, manually maintain vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of the following methods:

1. Push the CANCEL switch. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
2. Tap the brake pedal. The vehicle speed indicator will turn off.
3. Turn the ProPILOT Assist switch off. Both the cruise indicator and vehicle speed indicator will turn off.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one the following three methods:

1. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET- switch.

Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, release the switch.

Push, then quickly release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

DISTANCE CONTROL ASSIST (DCA) (if so equipped)

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:

1. Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET-switch and release it.
2. Push and hold the SET- switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.
3. Push, then quickly release the SET-switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and release, the RES+ switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the DCA system could result in serious injury or death.

- Always drive carefully and attentively when using the DCA system. Read and understand the Owner's Manual thoroughly before using the DCA system. To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent accidents or to control the vehicle's speed in emergency situations. Do not use the DCA system except in appropriate road and traffic conditions.

The system is only an aid to assist the driver and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

• As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the DCA system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.
• Always pay attention to the operation of the vehicle and be ready to manually decelerate to maintain the proper following distance. The DCA system may not be able to decelerate the vehicle under some circumstances.

This system only brakes and moves the accelerator pedal upward to help assist the driver to maintain a following distance from the vehicle ahead. Acceleration should be operated by the driver.

- The DCA system does not control the vehicle speed or warn you when you approach stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to maintain proper distance from vehicles ahead.

• The DCA system automatically decelerates your vehicle to help assist the driver to maintain a following distance from the vehicle ahead. Manually brake when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance upon sudden braking by the vehicle ahead or when a vehicle suddenly appears in front of you. Always stay alert when using the DCA system.
• If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. The system will cancel with a warning chime once it judges that the vehicle has come to a standstill. To prevent the vehicle from moving, the driver must depress the brake pedal.

The DCA system is intended to assist the driver in keeping a following distance from the vehicle ahead traveling in the same lane and direction.

If the radar sensor detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed to help assist the driver to maintain a following distance.

1 10:00 AM 20 V 100MPW Safety Shield Forward Line Wind Spin SINJAMU 999999 miles D 1999 miles 2 AUDIO MENU CLIMATE 3 LSD3033

5-140 Starting and driving

1. Vehicle information display
2. Lower display buttons
3. Dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT™ Assist)/Steering Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT™ Assist)

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the DCA system could result in serious personal injury or death.

• When the vehicleahead detection indicator light is not illuminated, the system will not control the vehicle or warn the driver.
• Never place your foot under the brake pedal. Your foot may be caught when the system controls the brake.
• Depending on the position of the accelerator pedal, the system may not be able to assist the driver to release the accelerator pedal appropriately.

The DCA system brakes and moves the accelerator pedal upward according to the distance from and the relative speed of the vehicle ahead to help assist the driver in maintaining a following distance. The system will decelerate as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the DCA system can only apply up to approximately 40% of the vehicle's total braking power. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or in a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the DCA system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this occurs, the DCA system will sound a warning chime and blink the system display to notify the driver to take necessary action. For additional information, refer to "Approach warning" in this section.

Safety Shield STANDARD 999999 miles D 1999 miles LSD2991

The DCA system helps assist the driver to keep a following distance to the vehicle ahead by braking and moving the accelerat pedal upward in the normal driving condition

When vehicle approaches a vehicle ahead:

• If the driver's foot is not on the accelerator pedal, the system activates the brakes to decelerate smoothly as necessary. If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system.
• If the driver's foot is on the accelerator pedal, the system moves the accelerator pedal upward to assist the driver to release the accelerator pedal.

When brake operation by driver is required:

The system alerts the driver by a warning chime and blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator. If the driver's foot is on the accelerator pedal after the warning, the system moves the accelerator pedal upward to assist the driver to switch to the brake pedal

When a vehicle is detected ahead:

The vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on.

NOTE:

The stop lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the DCA system.
- When the brakeoperates,anoise may be heard. This is not a malfunction.

Overriding the system:

The following driver's operations override the system operation:

• When the driver depresses the accelerator pedal even further while the system is moving the accelerator pedal upward, the DCA system control of the accelerator pedal is canceled.
• When the driver's foot is on the accelerator pedal, the brake control by the system is not operated.
• When the driver's foot is on the brake pedal, neither the brake control nor the alert by the system operates.
• When the ICC system is set, the DCA system will be canceled.

- The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.

The warning chime may not sound in some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are:

When the vehicles are traveling at the same speed and the distance between vehicles is not changing

When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between vehicles is increasing

- When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle. The warning chime will not sound when you vehicle approaches vehicles that are parked or moving slowly.

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound and the system display may blink when the radar sensor detects objects on the side of the road. This may cause the DCA system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The radar sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding roads, narrow roads, hilly roads or when entering or exiting a curve. In these cases you will have to manage control the proper distance ahead of your vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage).

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the driver with the chime and DCA system display. Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to maintain a safe vehicle distance if:

- The chime sounds.

5-142 Starting and driving

Forward Assist Distance Control Assist ●ON AUDIO MENU CLIMATE LSD2953

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE DCA SYSTEM

To turn on the DCA system, push the dynam driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT™ Assist)/Steering Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT™ Assist) after starting the engine. The DCA system switch indicator light in the vehicle information display will illuminate. Push the dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT™ Assist)/Steering Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT™ Assist) again to turn off the DCA system. The DCA system switch indicator light will turn off.

The system will start to operate after the vehicle speed becomes above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).

The dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT™ Assist)/Steering Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT™ Assist) is used for the LDP, DCA and BSI systems. When the dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT™ Assist)/Steering Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT™ Assist) is pushed, the LDP system will also turn on or off simultaneously. The DCA system can be individually set to on or off on the display. If the system is set to off, the system will not

Starting and driving

turn on even if the dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT™ Assist)/Steering Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT™ Assist) is pushed to on. For additional information, refer to "Setting DCA system to ON/OFF" in this section.

Setting DCA system to ON/OFF:

The DCA can be turned on/off in the lower display.

1. Press the MENU button below the lower display screen.
2. Select "Driver Assistance."
3. Select "Forward Assist."
4. Select "ON" to turn the "Distance Control Assist" system on or off.

If the LDP, BSI and DCA systems are set to 1 in the lower display and the dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT™Assist)/Steering Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT™Assist) is pushed, the LDP indicator light, BSI ON indicator light, and the DCA system switch indicator light will blink for approximately 2 seconds.

For additional information on LDP and BSI, refer to "Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)" and "Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)" in this section.

5-144 Starting and driving

1 2

DCA system display and indicators

The display is located between the speedometer and tachometer.

1. DCA system switch indicator (green):
   Indicates that the dynamic driver assistance switch (for models without ProPILOT™ Assist)/Steering Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT™ Assist) is on.

2. DCA system warning light (orange):

The light comes on if there is a malfunction in the DCA system.

DCA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations of the DCA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

• This system will not adapt automatically to road conditions. Do not use the system on roads with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain or in fog.
• The DCA system will not apply brake control while the driver's foot is on the accelerator pedal.

As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the DCA system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absent-minded driving, or overcome poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles.

- The system may not detect the vehicle in front of you in certain road or weather conditions. To avoid accidents, never use the DCA system under the following conditions:

- On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves

- On slippery road surfaces such as on ice or snow, etc.

- On off-road surfaces such as on sand or rock, etc.

- During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)

- When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the sensor area of the front bumper

- On steep downhill roads (frequent braking may result in overheating brakes)

- On repeated uphill and downhill roads

- When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration

- When towing a trailer or other vehicle

- Interference by other radar sources

In some road or traffic conditions, a vehicle or object can unexpectedly come into the sensor detection zone and cause automatic braking. You may need to control the distance from other vehicles using the accelerator pedal. Always stay alert and avoid using the DCA system when it is not recommended in this section.

The radar sensor will not detect the following objects:

- Stationary and slow moving vehicles

- Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

- Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

- Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane

the The following are some conditions in which the sensor cannot detect the signals:

When the snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor's visibility

- When excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the luggage room of your vehicle

SSD0252

DCA Detection Zone

DCA DRIVINGSITUATIONS

the system indicator and sounding the

chime. The driver may have to manually con-

The detection zone of the sensor is limited. A trol the proper distance away from the vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for the system to operate.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detection zone due to its position within the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from the center line of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the lane ahead may not be detected until the vehicle has completely moved into the lane. If this occurs, the system may warn you by blinking

5-146 Starting and driving

Diagram showing multiple cars on curved road with two black triangular obstacles, no text or symbols present

DCA Detection Zones On Winding Roads

When driving on some roads, such as wind distance away from the vehicle traveling in, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads ahead.

which are under construction, the sensor may detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause the system to work inappropriately.

The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs, the system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will have to manually control the proper

Not available Not Available Poor Road Conditions LSD2968

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

Condition A:

Under the following conditions, the DCA system is automatically canceled. The chime will sound and the DCA system switch indicator will blink. The system will not be able to be set.

• When the VDC system is off (To use the DCA system, turn on the VDC, then push the dynamic driver assistance switch [for models without
  ProPILOT™Assist]/Steering Assist switch [for models with ProPILOT™Assist.])
  For additional information about the VDC system, refer to "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" in this section.
• When ABS or VDC (including the TCS) operating
• When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted

e sh Is Unavailable Front Radar Blocked LSD2992

Condition B:

the engine off. When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted, clean the sensor area and restart the engine. If the "Unavailable: Front Radar Blocked" warning continues to be displayed, have the DCA system checked. It is recommended you visit and INFINITI retailer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor for the DCA system is common with ICC and is located behind the front bumper.

For additional information, refer to "Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)" in this section.

For USA/Canada

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off with the dynamic driver assistance switch (for model without ProPILOT™Assist)/Steering Assist switch (for models with ProPILOT™Assist). Turn the DCA system back on to use the system.

When the radar sensor area is covered with Model: ARS4-A dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the DCA system is IC: 4135A-ARS4A automatically canceled.

The chime sounds and the DCA system warning light (orange) will come on and th "Unavailable: Front Radar Blocked" warning will appear.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired in a safe place, press the park button to place the vehicle in the P (Park) position and turn operation of the device.

FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING (FEB) WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM

WARNING

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Information:

This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system could result in serious injury or death.

• The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system is a supplemental aid to the driver. I is not a replacement for the driver's attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.
• The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.

The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system can assist the driver when there is a risk of forward collision with the vehicle ahead in th traveling lane or with a pedestrian.

B A LSD2954

The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system uses a radar sens ^A located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane. For pedestrians, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system uses a camera ^B installed behind the windshield in addition to the radar sensor.

1 Visual 2 3 LSD2955

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. FEB with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator
3. FEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light

SYSTEM OPERATION

The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system operates at speeds above approximately

3 mph (5 km/h). For the pedestrian detection function, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system operates at speeds between 6 - 137 mph (10 - 60 km/h).

If a risk of a forward collision with a vehicle detected, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system will first provide a warning to the driver by flashing the vehicle ahead detection indicator and providing an audible alert. In addition, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system pushes the accelerator pedal up, and

then the system applies partial braking. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and force-

fully, but the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system detects that there is still the possibl of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force.

If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, and the driver does not take action, the FE with Pedestrian Detection system issues the

second warning to the driver by flashing their may help mitigate the consequences if a FEB with Pedestrian Detection emergency collision should be unavoidable. If the driver is warning indicator (red), providing an audible handling the steering wheel, accelerating or warning, and then automatically applies braking, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection harder braking. system will function later or will not function.

If a risk of a forward impact with a pedestrian automatic braking will cease under the is detected, the FEB with Pedestrian Detec-following conditions:

tion system will provide a warning to the driver by flashing the FEB with Pedestrian Detection emergency warning indicator (red),

provides an audible alert and the system will. When the accelerator pedal is depressed, apply partial baking. If the driver applies the . When there is no longer vehicle or a

brakes quickly and forcefully but the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system detects

that there is still the possibility of a forward the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system impact with a pedestrian, the system will aim as stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will re-tomatically increase the braking force. If themain at a standstill for approximately 2 sec-risk of collision becomes imminent and the onds before the brakes are released.

driver does not take action, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system automatically applies harder braking.

he NOTE:

The vehicle's brake lights come on when any braking is performed by the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision

When the steering wheel is turned to avoid a collision.

When the accelerator pedal is depressed.

When there is no longer a vehicle or a pedestrian detected ahead.

AUDIO MENU CLIMATE Emergency Assist Forward emergency braking • ON LSD2956

5-152 Starting and driving

TURNING THE FEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system.

1. Press the MENU button below the lower display screen.
2. Select "Driver Assistance."
3. Select "Emergency Assist."
4. Select "ON" to turn on the "Forward emergency braking" system on or off.

When the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system is turned off, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.

The Predictive Forward Collision Warning (PFCW) system (if so equipped) is integrated into the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system. There is not a separate selection in the lower display for the PFCW system. When the FEB with Pedestrian Detection is turned off, the PFCW system is also turned off.

FEB WITH PEDESTRIAN DETECTION SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

- The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system cannot detect all vehicles or pedestrians under all conditions.

- The radar sensor FEB with Pedestrian Detection system does not detect the following objects:

- Small pedestrians (including small children), animals and cyclists.

• Pedestrians in wheelchairs or using mobile transport such as scooters, child-operated toys, or skateboards.
• Pedestrians who are seated or otherwise not in a full upright standing or walking position.
• Oncoming vehicles
• Crossing vehicles
• Obstacles on the roadside

- The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system has some performance limitations.

- If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle's path, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).

- For pedestrian detection, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) or below approximately 6 mph (10km/h).

- The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system will not function for pedestrians in darkness or in tunnels, even if there is street lighting in the area.

• For pedestrians, the FEBwith Pedestrian Detection system will not issue the first warning and will not push the accelerator pedal up.
• The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if the vehicle ahead is narrow (for example, a motorcycle).
• The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function if speed difference between the two vehicles is too small.

• The radar sensor FEB with Pedestrian Detection system may not function properly or detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions:

• Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, snow, fog, dust storms, sandstorms, and road spray from other vehicles).

• Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.
• Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road.
• If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the radar sensor area.

• Interference by other radar sources.

• The camera area of the windshield is fogged up, or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc.

• Strong light (for example, sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) enters the front camera. Strong light causes the area around the pedestrian to be cast in a shadow, making it difficult to see.
• A sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or a shaded area or lightning flashes.)
• The poor contrast of a person to the background, such as having clothing color or pattern which is similar to the background.
• The pedestrian's profile is partially obscured or unidentifiable due to the pedestrian transporting luggage, wearing bulky or very loose-fitting clothing or accessories.

- The system performance may degrade in the following conditions:

- The vehicle is driven on a slippery road.

- The vehicle is driven on a slope.

- Excessively heavy baggage is loaded in the rear seat or the trunk room of your vehicle.

- The system is designed to automatically check the sensor's (radar and camera) functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect blockage of fi-sensor areas covered by ice, snow or stickers, for example. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear sensor areas regularly.

- In some road and traffic conditions, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system may unexpectedly apply partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.

- Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

Diagram showing multiple cars on curved road with two black triangular obstacles, no text or symbols present

When driving on some roads, such as wind. The detection of vehicles may also be afing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads affected by vehicle operating (steering maneuver which are under construction, the sensor mayer or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or detect vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not detect a vehicle traveling vehicle condition. If this occurs, the system may warn you by blinking the system indicator and sounding the chime unexpectedly. This may cause the system to work for and sounding the chime unexpectedly. Inappropriately. You will have to manually control the proper distance away from the vehicle traveling ahead.

LSD2957

5-156 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

Condition A:

In the following conditions, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light blinks and the system will be turned off automatically.

• The radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source.
• The camera area of the windshield is misted or frozen.
• Strong light is shining from the front.
  The cabin temperature is over approximately 104°F (40°C) in direct sunlight.
  The camera area of the windshield glass is continuously covered with dirt, etc.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system will resume automatically.

NOTE:

When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long

Pedestrian Detection system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI re-

When the inside of the windshield or came

area is misted or frozen, it will take a per

of time to remove it after A/C turns ON.

dirt appears on this area have it checked. Action to take

recommended that you visit an INFINITI re

tailer for this service.

Condition B:

When the above conditions no longer exist, the FEB with pedestrian detection system will resume automatically.

NOTE:

If the FEBwithPedestrian Detection system stops working, the PFCW system (if so equipped) will also stop working.

In the following conditions, the FEB with P

destrian Detection system warning light will

illuminate, the system will be turned off au-

tomatically and the "Unavailable: Front Rada

Blocked" warning message will appear in the

vehicle information display.

- The sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed.

Action to take

NOTE:

If the FEBwithPedestrian Detection system stops working, the PFCW system (if so -equipped) will also stop working.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take

the

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop

the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine

off and restart the engine. If the warning light

"continues to illuminate, have the FEB with

B A LSD2954

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The radar senso ^A is located on the front of the vehicle. The camer ^B is located on the upper side of the windshield.

To keep the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:

• Always keep sensor areas of the front bumper and windshield clean.

• Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensors (ex. Bumper, windshield).

• Do not cover or attach stickers, or install device must accept any interference, includ-any accessory near the sensors. This ing interference that may cause undesired could block sensor signals, and/or cause operation of the device. failure or malfunction.
  Do not attach metallic objects near the radar sensor (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.
  Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. The reflection of sunlight may adversely affect the camera unit's detection capability.
  Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.
  Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
  Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Information:

Radio frequency statement

For USA/Canada

Model: ARS4-A

IC: 4135A-ARS4A

FCC ID: OAYARS4A

This device complies with Part 15 of the Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) that

This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the PFCW system could result in serious injury or death.

- The PFCW system can help warn the driver before a collision occurs but will not avoid a collision. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The PFCW system can help alert the driver when there is a sudden braking of a second vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

Line drawing of a modern sedan with grille and side-mounted grille (no text or symbols)

LSD2952

The PFCW system uses a radar sensor ^® located behind the lower grille of the front bumper to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.

1 Visual 2 LSD2958

5-160 Starting and driving

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator
2. FEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light

1st vehicle 2nd vehicle

LSD2263

The PFCW system operates at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).

If there is a potential risk of a forward collision, the PFCW system will warn the driver by blinking the vehicle ahead detection indicator, and sounding an audible alert.

AUDIO MENU CLIMATE Emergency Assist Forward emergency braking • ON LSD2956

5-162 Starting and driving

Perform the following steps to turn the PFCW system on or off.

1. Press the MENU button below the lower display screen.
2. Select "Driver Assistance."
3. Select "Emergency Assist."
4. Select "ON" to turn the "Forward emergency braking" system on or off.

When the PFCW system is turned off, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

The PFCW system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.
The PFCW system (if so equipped) is integrated into the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system. There is not a separate selection in the lower display for the PFCW system. When the FEB with Pedestrian Detection is turned off, the PFCW system is also turned off.

Top-down diagram of a vehicle with three cars and a central object, no text or symbols present

Illustration A

Three cartoon cars with different shapes and motion indicators, including a tow truck and a triangular object (no text or symbols)

LSD2265

Illustration B

PFCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the PFCW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

• The PFCW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.

• The radar sensor does not detect the following objects:

• Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway

• Oncoming vehicles

• Crossing vehicles

• (Illustration A) The PFCW system does not function when a vehicle ahead is a narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle.

• The radar sensormay not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions:

• Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor.

• Interference by other radar sources.
• Snow or road spray from traveling vehicles.
• Driving in a tunnel

• (Illustration B) When the vehicle ahead is being towed.

• (Illustration C) When the distance to the vehicle ahead is too close, the beam of the radar sensor is obstructed.

• (Illustration D) When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.

• The system is designed to automatically check the sensor's functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstruction of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly.

• Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.

LSD2266

Illustration C

5-166 Starting and driving

Top-down diagram of three cars on curved surfaces with a shaded triangular area, no text or symbols present

Illustration D

LSD2957

5-168 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

Condition A

When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the PFCW system is automatically turned off.

The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist, the PFCW system will resume automatically.

Condition B

When the sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the PFCW system is automatically turned off.

The FEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the "Unavailable: Front Radar Blocked" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.

Action to take

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stopf the PFCW system malfunctions, it will be the vehicle in a safe place, press the Park turned off automatically, a chime will sound button to place the vehicle in the P (Park) the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system position and turn the engine off. Clean the warning light (orange) will illuminate and the radar cover on the lower grille with a soft warning message [Malfunction] will appear cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning in the vehicle information display. light continues to illuminate, have the PFCW system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. If the warning light (orange) comes on stop

- When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to long walls). the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the PFCW system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITE retailer for this service.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist the PFCW system will resume automatically

NOTE:

If the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system stops working, the PFCW system (if so equipped) will also stop working.

Line drawing of a car front view with no text or symbols on the car itself

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor Ⓐ is located behind the lower grille of the front bumper.

To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:

• Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper clean.
Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.
Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.

Starting and driving

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

• Do not attach metallic objects near the le brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom- sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This coulettre le fonctionnement.
  cause failure or malfunction.
• Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer.
  Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Information:
  This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

For USA/Canada

Model: ARS4-A

IC: 4135A-ARS4A

FCC ID: OAYARS4A

This device complies with Part 15 of the Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subjected to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) the device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 30 cm between the radiator and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.

• Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 RPM.
• Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
• Avoid quick starts.
• Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
  Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.

5-170 Starting and driving

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake Pedal Application

• Avoid rapid starts and stops.
• Use smooth, gentle accelerator and brake application whenever possible.
• Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

• Look ahead to try and anticipate and minimize stops.
• Synchronizing your speed with traffic lights allows you to reduce your number of stops.
• Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel efficiency.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher Vehicle Speeds

Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load.

• Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerodynamic drag.
• Recirculating the cool air in the cabin when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances

• Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic drag.
• Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking.
• Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes.
• Select a gear range suitable to road conditions.

5. Use Cruise Control

- Using cruise control during highway driving helps maintain a steady speed.

- Cruise control is particularly effective in providing fuel savings when driving on flat terrains.

6. Plan for the Shortest Route

- Utilize a map or navigation system to determine the best route to save time.

7. Avoid Idling

- Shutting off your engine when safe for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads

- Automated passes permit drivers to use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

• Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel economy.
• Vehicles typically need no more than 30 seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil before driving.
• Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling.

Starting and driving 5-171

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY INTELLIGENT ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so equipped)

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

• Park your vehicle in a covered parking area or in the shade whenever possible.

• When entering a hot vehicle, opening the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C system.

• Keep your engine tuned up.

• Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance.
• Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
• Keep all the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
• Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. For additional information, refer to "Engine oil and oil filter recommendations" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

If any malfunction occurs in the Intelligent AWD system while the engine is running, messages are displayed in the meter.

5-172 Starting and driving

AWD AWD Error: See Owner's Manual AWD High Temp. Stop vehicle AWD Tire Size Incorrect: See Owner's Manual LSD2082 LSD2083 LSD2084

If the AWD error warning message is dis- played, there may be a malfunction in the Intelligent AWD system. Reduce vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. The AWD high temperature message may be displayed while trying to free a stuck vehicle due to increased oil temperature. The driving mode may change to 2-wheel drive. If this message is displayed, stop the vehicle with the engine idling, as soon as it is safe to do so. Then if the message turns off, you can continue driving. The tire size message may be displayed if there is a large difference between the diameters of front and rear wheels. Pull off the road in a safe area, with the engine idling. Check that all tire sizes are the same, that the tire pressure is correct and that the tires are not excessively worn.

If any warning messages continue to be displayed, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

WARNING

• Do not drive beyond the performance capability of the tires. Accelerating quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control, even with Intelligent AWD engaged.
• For AWD equipped vehicles, do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious personal injury or vehicle damage.
• Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing) or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure that you inform the test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is placed on dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious personal injury or vehicle damage.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine on a free rolle when any of the wheels are raised.
If you use the free roller, rotate four wheels withthesame speed without raising any wheels.
If an AWD warning message is displayed while driving there may be a malfunction in the AWD system. Reduce the vehicle speed immediately and have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
The powertrain may be damaged if you continue driving when the AWD temperature or tire size incorrect messages are displayed.
If the AWD high temperature message is displayed while you are driving, pull off the road in a safe area, and idle the engine. The driving mode will change to 2WD to prevent the AWD system from malfunctioning. If the warning message turns off, you can drive again.

• If the tire size incorrect message is displayed while you are driving, pull off the road in a safe area with the engine idling. Check that all tire sizes are the same, that the tire pressure is correct and that the tires are not excessively worn.
• If a warning message continues to be displayed after the above operations, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

A B C WSD0050

WARNING

• Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste-paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.
• Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed into P (Park). Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.

- Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.

To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

1. Apply the electronic parking brake.

2. Press the Park button to place the vehicle in the P (Park) position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
   · HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB Ⓐ:
   Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
   · HEADED UPHILL WITH CUR®:
   Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
   · HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO CURB©:
   Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.
   Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.

POWER STEERING

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING TYPE

WARNING

• If the engine is not running or isturned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.
• When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle, but the steering will be harder operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

The power steering system is designed to provide power assist while driving to operate the steering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or driving at a very low speed, the power assist for steering wheel will be reduced. This is to p vent overheating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged. While the power assist is reduced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. When the temperature of the power steering system goes down, the power assist level will

5-176 Starting and driving

return to normal. Avoid repeating such steer DIRECT ADAPTIVE STEERING® ing wheel operations that could cause the power steering system to overheat.

You may hear a sound when the steering wheel is operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunction.

If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI re-mler for this service.

When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering, but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

For additional information, refer to "Power steering warning light" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.

WARNING

- When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, the power assist for the steering will cease operation. You will still have control of the vehicle, but the steering will be harder to operate.

If wheels or tires other than the INFINITI recommended ones are used, Direct Adaptive Steering may not operate properly and the power steering warning light may illuminate.

Do not modify the vehicle's suspension parts such as chock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not INFINITI recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, Direct Adaptive Steering may not operate properly and the power steering warning light may illuminate.

• Do not modify the vehicle's steering. If steering parts are not INFINITI recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, Direct Adaptive Steering may not operate properly and the power steering warning light may illuminate.
• If the VDC warning light illuminates, the power steering warning light may also luminate at the same time. Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine and restart the engine. If the power steering warning light continues to illuminate, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINI retailer for this service. For additional formation, refer to "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" in this section.

CAUTION

• Do not place the ignition switch in the ON position while the steering wheel or a ti is removed.
• Do notturn the steeringwheel as much as possible while the ignition switch is any position other than the ON position.
• Installing an accessory on the steering wheel, or changing the steering wheel, may reduce the steering performance.

Direct Adaptive Steering is designed to con-Under the following conditions, the steering trol the steering force and steering angle aowheel may turn slightly even when driving on cording to the vehicle speed and amount of a straight road. This is due to a protection turning of the steering wheel. mechanism for Direct Adaptive Steering. The

The steering characteristic can be selected using the INFINITI Drive Mode Selector. F

additional information, refer to "INFINITI Drive Mode Selector" in this section.

If the VDC system is turned off, the setting of steering becomes Standard mode. When the engine is stalled or likely to be stalled

If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate that Direct Adaptive Steering is not

Functioning properly and may need servicing. When the battery is discharged Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this position, stop the vehicle in a safe location service. For additional information, refer to and stop operating the steering wheel. Then "Power steering warning light" in the "Instru drive the vehicle for a short period of time."

ments and Controls" section of the manual.

When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, the power assist for the steering will cease operation. You will still have control of the vehicle. However, greater steering effort will be needed, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

If Direct Adaptive Steering is malfunctioning, the steering wheel may turn slightly even when driving on a straight road.

- When the steering wheel is held in the full lock position or when the front tire touches an obstruction

. When the battery is discharged

To return the steering wheel to the normal position, stop the vehicle in a safe location and stop operating the steering wheel. Then drive the vehicle for a short period of time.

Condition B:

- When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or driving at a very low speed. In this case, the power assist for the steering wheel will be reduced.

To return the steering wheel to the normal position, stop the vehicle in a safe location and wait for a period of time, without operating the steering wheel, until the temperature of Direct Adaptive Steering cools down. Avoid repeated steering wheel operations that could cause Direct Adaptive Steering to overheat.

When the vehicle is tested on the 2-wheel dynamometer, the power steering warning light may illuminate. To turn off the power steering warning light, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off, restart the You may hear a noise under the following engine, and then drive the vehicle for a period of conditions. However, this is not a malfunction of time.

The following conditions do not indicate a malfunction of Direct Adaptive Steering:

- You may notice wider steering play when the ignition switch is in the OFF or AU ACC position compared to when it is in the ON position.

- After the engine is started, the steering wheel may turn slightly even when driving a straight road. To return to the normal position, drive the vehicle on a straight road for a period of time.

After the engine is started, the steering wheel may move if the steering wheel was turned to the fully locked position while the ignition switch was in the Of position.
After the vehicle is tested on the 4-wh dynamometer, the steering wheel may turn slightly even when driving on a straight road. To return the steering wheel to the normal position, drive the vehicle on a straight road for a period time.

When the engine is started or stopped.
When the steering wheel is turned in the full lock position.

ARK WITH EASY STEERING (if \$ equipped)

The Park with Easy Steering system provid lighter steering effort at speeds of approximately 10 mph (15 km/h) and under.

The Park with Easy Steering system can be set to on or off through the Infiniti InTouch™ display. When enabling/disabling the Park with Easy Steering system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.

NOTE:

The Park with Easy Steering system will not activate under the following conditions:

of When the Direct Adaptive Steering® system malfunctions ordoesnotoperate normally (including activating protection mechanism).

- When the ProPILOT™ Assist system Steering Assist activates.

When the ProPILOT Assist system malfunctions or does not operate normally, the Park with Easy Steering system may not be activated.

When the Park with Easy Steering system is enabled/disabled, the system may not activate/deactivate immediately. This is not a malfunction.

BRAKE SYSTEM

The Park with Easy Steering system cannot be set to on or off under the following conditions: The brake system has two separate hydraulic deficits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels.

• When the Direct Adaptive Steering system malfunctions or does not operate normally (including activating the protection mechanism).
• When the Infiniti InTouch™ system malfunctions or does not operate normally.
• While driving (the vehicle is not stopped).

\*BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going do a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

- While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.

If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brake return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best brake performance.

Starting and driving

This procedure is described in the INFINITI Service Manual. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

• The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.
• Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness.

- When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.

• When installing aspare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to "Tire and Loading Information label" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
• For additional information, refer to "Wheels and tires" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-

- The ABS controls the brakes so the wheel not lock during hard braking or when brake on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The Anti-lock Braking System will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Normal operation

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 - 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

When the ABS senses that one or more The VDC system uses various sensors to When the VDC system operates, the wheels are close to locking up, the actuator monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. UnIndicator in the instrument panel flashes to rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres- der certain driving conditions, the VDC sys-note the following: sure. This action is similar to pumping the tem helps to perform the following functions:

brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force.

WARNING

The brake assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely, and be in control of the vehicle at all time Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non-slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control function).

- Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions:

• Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input)
• Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.

The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path
You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly.
Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.

For additional information, refer to "Slip indicator light" and "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the ① and ② indicator lights come on in the instrument panel. The VDC system automatically turns off when these indicator lights are on.

The lower display is used to turn off the VD system. The indicator illuminates to indicate the VDC system is off.

When the lower display is used to turn off a system, the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non-slipping drive wheel. The indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC functions are off and the indicator will not flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the OFI position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you state the engine and move the vehicle forward or reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

• The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain controllability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.

Do not modify the vehicle's suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not INFINITI recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the indicator may flash or both the and indicator lights may illuminate.

If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not INFINITI recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and both the 🎩 and the 🎩 indicator lights may illuminate. If engine control related parts are not INFINITI recommended or are extremely deteriorated, both the 🎩 and 🎩 indicator lights may illuminate.

If When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator may flash or both the and indicator lights may illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads.

• When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the indicator may flash or both the and indicator lights may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.
• If wheels or tires other than the INFINITI recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator may flash or both the and indicator lights may illuminate.
• The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

During braking while driving through turns, the system optimizes the distribution of force to each of the four wheels depending on the radius of the turn.

WARNING

• The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain controllability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.

• Do not modify the vehicle's suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not INFINITI recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the indicator may flash or both the and indicator lights may illuminate.

• If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not INFINITI recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and both the 🎨 and the 🌘 indicator lights may illuminate.

• If engine control related parts are not INFINITI recommended or are extremely deteriorated, both the 🎥 and 🎥 indicator lights may illuminate.
• When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator may flash or both the and indicator lights may if illuminate. Do not drive on these types of roads.
• When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the indicator may flash or both the and indicator lights may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.

If wheels or tires other than the INFINITI recommended ones are used, the VDC system may not operate properly and the indicator may flash or both the and indicator lights may illuminate.

The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

CHASSIS CONTROL

The chassis control is an electric control model ACTIVE ENGINE BRAKE

ule that includes the following functions:

• Active Trace Control
• Active Engine Brake
• Active Ride Control

ACTIVE TRACE CONTROL (if so equipped)

This system senses driving based on the er's steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and controls brake pressure at individual wheels to help smooth vehicle response.

When the lower display is used to turn off VDC system, the Active Trace Control system is also turned off.

If the Active Trace Control is not functioning properly, the FEB with Pedestrian Detection system warning indicator light illuminates in the instrument panel.

The Active Trace Control can be set to on (enabled) or off (disabled) through the lower display "Infiniti Drive Mode Selector" menu option.

The Active Engine Brake function adds subtle deceleration by controlling Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) gear ratio, depending on the cornering condition calculated from the driver's steering input and plural sensors. This benefit is for easier traceability and less workload of adjusting speed with braking at corners.

The Active Engine Brake also enhances braking feel by adding subtle deceleration with CVT gear ratio control according to the driver's brake pedal operation

The Active Engine Brake can be set to on (enabled) or off (disabled) through the lower display "Infiniti Drive Mode Selector" menu option.

Chassis Control

Diagram of a car on a curved grid surface (no text or symbols)

Chassis Control

Top-down line drawing of a car on a grid-patterned surface (no text or symbols)

Chassis Control

Top-down illustration of a car driving on a curved grid surface (no text or symbols)

LSD2185

When the Active Engine Brake is operated at corners and the "Chassis Control" mode is selected in the lower display, the Active Engine Brake graphics are shown in the vehicle information display.

If the chassis control warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it may indicate that the Active Engine Brake not functioning properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer this service.

WARNING

The Active Engine Brake may not be effective depending on the driving condition. Always drive carefully and attentively.

When the Active Engine Brake is operating, the needle of the tachometer will rise up at you may hear an engine noise. This is norm and indicates that the Active Engine Brake is operating properly.

ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL

This system senses upper body motion (based on wheel speed information) and controls engine torque and four wheel brake pressure. This will enhance ride comfort in an effort to restrain uncomfortable upper body movement when passing over undulated road surfaces. This system comes into effect above 25 mph (40 km/h).

When the lower display is used to turn off t VDC system, the Active Ride Control is also turned off.

If the Integrated Dynamics-control Module warning message appears in the vehicle information display, it may indicate that the Active Ride Control is not functioning properly. Have the system checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

WARNING

• Never rely solely on the hill start assist by system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
• The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to go backwards and may result in a collision of serious personal injury.
• The hill start assist system may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backward in the time it takes driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator.

The hill start assist system will operate automatically under the following conditions:

The transmission is shifted to a forward or reverse gear.

The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by applying the brake. The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back on the hill start assist system will stop operating completely.

The hill start assist system will not operate When the sonar system is turned on, the when the shift lever is placed in the N (Nesonar view will automatically appear in the trail), the Park button is pressed to place the center display when the camera is activated.

vehicle in the P (Park) position or on a flat and level road.

hill the o- hill and LSD2993 The sonar system sounds a tone to inform the driver of obstacles near the bumper.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the sonar system could result in serious injury or death.

- The sonar system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects.

• The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers. Always look around and check that it is safe to do so before parking.
• This function is designed as an aid to the rear obstacles when the driver in detecting large stationary objects (Reverse) position.

If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarm.

CAUTION

• Excessive noise (such as audio system volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not heard.
• Keep the sonar sensors (located on the bumper fascias) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt. Do not clear the sensors with sharp objects. If the sensors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar function will be diminished.

	FR Sensor RR Sensor
Range	Sound	Display	Sound	Display
P	x	†	x	†
R	o	o	o	o
N	x	†	x	†
D	o	o	x
o - Display/Beep when detect
† - Display on camera view
x - No Display and Beep

The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds when an obstacle is detected by only the corner sensor and the distance does not change. The tone will stop when the obstacle get away from the vehicle.

When the object is detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of the blinking increases. When the vehicle is very close to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red, and the tone sounds continuously.

†

A B LSD2136

A y LSD2137

When the corner of the vehicle moves close, the system indicators will appear when to an object, the corner sonar indicator the vehicle moves closer to an object. Appears. When the center of the vehicle moves close to an object, the center sonar (if so equipped) indicator appears.

Sonar Sonar FR Sensor Only Interrupt Display Sonar Sensitivity Sonar Volume

LSD2697

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE SONAR SYSTEM

The system is automatically activated when the ignition is in the ON position and the sh lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

Perform the following steps to enable or disable the sonar system:

1. Press the MENU button below the lower display screen.
2. Select "Settings."
3. Select "Camera/sonar."
4. Select "Sonar."
5. Select P ^w ▲ to turn the "Sonar" system on or off.

SONAR LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for the sonar system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

• Read and understand the limitations of the sonar system as contained in this solution. Inclement weather may affect the function of the sonar system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
• The system is deactivated at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds.
• Inclement weather or ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car wash, a truck compressed-air brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect the function of the system; this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
• The system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects. A ways move slowly. The system will not detect small objects below the bumper on the ground.
• The system may not detect the following objects: fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.; thin objects such as rope, wire and chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.

- The system may not detect objects at sec-speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE

When sonar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically.

The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.

The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, S) frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

Top-down line drawing of a car viewed from the side, showing front, rear, and side views (no text or symbols)

LSD2993

,SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sonar sensors are located on the front and rear bumpers. Always keep the area near the sonar sensors clean.

The sonar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the sonar sensors.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the sonar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around sonar sensors. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer if the area around the sonar sensors is damaged due to a collision.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKDRAININGOF COOLANT WATER

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply if the vehicle is to be left outside without de-icer through the key hole. If the lock be anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, includ-themes frozen, heat the key before inserting in the engine block. Refill before operating into the key hole, or use the INFINITI Intellent Key. The vehicle. For additional information, refer to "Changting engine coolant" in the "Do-it-

"ANTIFREEZE

to "Changing engine coolant" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32^ F ( 0^ C), check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, refer to "Engine cooling system" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. For additional information, refer to "Battery" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

eTIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, INFINITI recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for the tire type size, speed rating and availability information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires

1. Tire chains may be used. For additional information, refer to "Tire chains" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter:

• A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades.
• A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.
• A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-, drifts.

- Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. DRIVINGON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

• Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), very coldsnow or ice can be slick and v hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or "grip" under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.
• Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even no traction.
• Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.
• Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.
• Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.

- Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads. - Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.

# ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20^ F ( -7^ C) or lower.

A WARNING

• Do not use your engine block heater with an ungrounded electrical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connection.
• Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury.

ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION/ ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT

- Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.

Diagram of a car interior showing dashboard and seat compartments with labeled controls and a numbered indicator '1'

LSD2959

Front Microphone
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION

1 LSD2960

Rear Microphone

This system uses microphone ^① located inside the vehicle to detect engine booming noise. The system then automatically generates a noise canceling sound through the speakers and woofer (if so equipped) to reduce engine booming noise.

NOTE:

To operate the active noise cancellation system properly:

Do not cover the speakers or woofer (if so equipped).
Do not cover the microphones.

Starting and driving 5-193

Do not change or modify speakers including the woofer (if so equipped) and any audio related components such as the amplifier.
- Do not make any modification including sound deadening or modifications around the microphones or speakers.

ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT

Active sound enhancement enhances existing engine sounds according to the engine speed and driving modes through the speakers and woofer (if so equipped).

5-194 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch....6-2

Roadside assistance program 6-2

Emergency engine shut off 6-3

Flat tire 6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)....6-3

Run-flat tires....6-4

Jump starting 6-5

Push starting....6-7

If your vehicle overheats....6-7

Towing your vehicle 6-8

Towing recommended by INFINITI....6-8

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .....6-11

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM

Simple geometric diagram showing a large triangle with an arrow pointing downward (no text or symbols)

LIC0394

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

In the event of a roadside emergency, roadside assistance service is available to you. Please refer to your Warranty Information Booklet (U.S.) or the Warranty & Roadside Assistance Information Booklet (Canada) for details.

WARNING

• If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.
• Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.
• Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.

6-2 In case of emergency

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

FLAT TIRE

To shut off the engine in an emergency ation while driving, perform the following procedure:

• Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
• Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.

tFIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare time. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. The system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the vehicle information display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional information, refer to "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" in the "Instruments and controls" section and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the "Starting and driving" sections of this manual.

WARNING

- Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a re.pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you haveaflattire,replaceitwith a replacement tire as soon as possible.

• When replacing a wheel without TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for these services.
• Replacing tires with those not originally specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
• Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol sealant into the tires, as this may cause malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

RUN-FLAT TIRES

This vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires. Run-flat tires can be used temporarily if they are punctured. When the "Flat Tire - Visit Dealer" warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is punctured. For additional information, refer to "Run-flat tires" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

For additional information, refer to the tire safety information in the Warranty Information Booklet.

WARNING

Although you can continue driving with a punctured run-flat tire, remember that vehicle handling stability is reduced, which could lead to an accident and personal injury. Also, driving a long distance at high speeds may damage the tires.
- Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not drive more than approximately 93 miles (150 km) with a punctured run-flat tire. The actual distance the vehicle can be driven on a flat-tire depend on outside temperature, vehicle load, road conditions and other factors.

- Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid hard cornering or braking, which may cause you to lose control of the vehicle. If you detect any unusual sounds or vibrations while driving with a punctured run-flat tire, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. The tire may be seriously damaged and need to be replaced.

CAUTION

a Never install tire chains on a punctured run-flat tire, as this could damage your vehicle.

Avoid diving over any projection or pot-hole, as the clearance between the vehicle and the ground is smaller than normal.

- Do notenteran automated car washwith a punctured run-flat tire.

Have the punctured tire inspected by an INFINITI retailer or other authorized repair shop. Replace the tire as soon as possible if the tire is seriously damaged.

6-4 In case of emergency

JUMP STARTING

To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.

WARNING

• If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.
• Explosive hydrogen gas is always present. in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.
• Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.
• Keep battery out of the reach of children.
• The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.

Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.

The automatic engine cooling fan (if so equipped) may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, keep hands and other objects away from it.

D Vehicle being jump started A LIFT C B Vehicle with battery for booster LCE2223

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the 2 vehicles to bring their batteries near each other.

Ensure the vent caps are level and tight

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

Connect the jumper cables in the sequence illustrated Ⓐ, Ⓑ, Ⓒ, Ⓓ).

1. Apply the parking brake. Engage the P (Park) position. Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

CAUTION

• Always connect positive (+) to positive (+) and negative (−) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) – not to the battery.

• Make sure thejumpercables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal.

• Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.

• Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

1. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable.

6-6 In case of emergency

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

CAUTION

• Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models cannot be push-started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.
• Do not push start this vehicle. The three-way catalyst may be damaged.

WARNING

• Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.
• To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator or coolant reservoir cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.
• Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the following steps.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and engage the P (Park) position.

Do not stop the engine.

1. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.

2. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen f steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.
   Open the engine hood.

A WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the engine stand clear to prevent getting burned.

Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

1. After the engine cools down, check the When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictions For additional information, refer to "Flat coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir and local regulations for towing must be followed" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual. coolant to the engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. TOWING RECOMMENDED BY INFINITI applicable laws and procedures for towing. INFINITI recommends towing your vehicle To assure proper towing and to prevent acquired based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-cidental damage to your vehicle, INFINITI tional information, refer to the diagrams in recommends having a service operator tow this section to ensure that your vehicle is your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service properly towed. operator carefully read the following precautions:

WARNING

• Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed.
• Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

• When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply, dollies or a flat-bed tow truck must be used.
• Always attach safety chains before towing.

6-8 In case of emergency

Diagram showing car parking and wheelbarrow arrangements with crossed-out symbols indicating restriction or clearance.

LCE2370

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

INFINITI recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck.

CAUTION

Never tow AWD models equipped with a Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) with any of the wheels on the ground as this maycauseseriousandexpensive damage to the transfer case and transmission.

LCE2371

Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) models with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

INFINITI recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed t as illustrated.

NOTE:

If the electronic parking brake is released, the rear wheels can be grounded while towing. If the electronic parking brake is not released, towing dollies should be used. For additional information, refer to "Electronic parking brake" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

CAUTION

- Never tow Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels.

- When towing Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models with the rear wheels on the ground or on towing dollies:

- Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism (for models with a steering lock mechanism).

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle:

• Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure.
• Tow chains or cables must be attached only to main structural members of the vehicle.
• Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle.
• Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer's instructions.
• Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle.
• Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer's instructions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

- Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

towf your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward.

- Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).

• Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.
• Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).

• Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55 km/h).

• If the vehicle cannot be freed after a ferries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

MEMO

6-12 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior 7-2

Washing 7-2

Waxing 7-2

Removing spots 7-3

Underbody....7-3

Glass 7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels 7-3

Chrome parts 7-3

Tire dressings 7-3

Cleaning interior 7-4

Leather cleaning kit (if so equipped) 7-4

Air fresheners 7-5

Power moonroof (if so equipped) 7-5

Floor mats (if so equipped) 7-5

Seat belts....7-6

Cleaning the seat tracks 7-7

Corrosion protection 7-7

Most common factors contributing to

vehicle corrosion 7-7

Environmental factors influence the rate

of corrosion....7-7

Protect your vehicle from corrosion 7-7

CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of you WASHING vehicle, it is important to take proper care of

it.

To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle as soon as you can:

• After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain.
• After driving on coastal roads.
• When contaminants such as soot, bird droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface.
• When dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface, when putting on or removing the body cover.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plen of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

• Do not use car washes that use acid in detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used.
  Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
  Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunliger, or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.
• Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.
An INFINITI retailer can assist you in choosing the proper product.

- Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.

or. Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.

7-2 Appearance and care

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish r dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting day or staining. Special cleaning products are available at an INFINITI retailer or any auto-motive accessory store. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for these products.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or red window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

it is

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels:

Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acidic or alkali contents to clean the wheels.

Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.

Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

INFINITI does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tire it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions:

- Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil-based tire dressing.

Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).

Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

- Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by tire dressing manufacturer.

CLEANING INTERIOR

This vehicle has new and unique surfaces on the center console and door pull finishers. If cleaning is required use mild soap and water. However if mild soap and water won't clean the center console and door pull finishers, use Genuine INFINITI Vinyl and Leather Cleaner (or equivalent).

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer's recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens.

Use a slightly moist (with water) microfiber cloth to clean the wood trim. If necessary, water with natural soap or wood dedicated cleaning products, such as furniture polish.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification series. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

CAUTION

- Never use benzine, thinner, or any similar material on the interior surfaces or surface damage may occur. Such damage is not covered under the INFINITI warranty.

- Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather's natural finish.

- Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.

Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

LEATHER CLEANING KIT (if so equipped)

Spray onto leather cleaning cloth, then gently wipe the surface of the leather. Use a dry towel to absorb any excess moisture.

Clean light-colored leather more frequently because soiling on such surfaces is much more visible.

Always follow the manufacturer's instructions supplied with the leather cleaning kit.

*You can obtain the leather cleaning kit from an INFINITI retailer or other authorized repair shop.

CAUTION

Do not leave the leather cleaning kit inside the vehicle. The leather cleaning kit left in a closed vehicle can become very hot.

7-4 Appearance and care

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precautions:

• Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface.
• Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer's instructions before using the air fresheners.

POWER MOONROOF (if so equipped)

The sunshade is made from a tricot material.

CAUTION

To help prevent damaging the moonroof while cleaning:

- Do not rub the material with a cloth. Doing so can damage the surface of the material or cause a stain to spread.

• Never use benzine, thinner or any similar chemical to clean the sunshade. This may discolor the moonroof and damage the surface.
• Clean water based stains by patting the surface with a clean soft cloth dampened in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth onto the surface to remove as much dampness as possible and then let air dry.
• Clean oil based stains by patting the surface with a clean soft cloth dampened in warm water. Press a clean dry cloth onto the surface to remove as much dampness as possible and then let air dry.

Line drawing of two car seats with a magnified inset showing seat details (no text or symbols)

LAI2094

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision, injury or death:

• NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or backwards.

• Use only Genuine INFINITI floor mats or equivalent floor mats, specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.

• Properly position the mats in the floor-well using the floor mat positioning hook. For additional information, refer to "Floor mat installation" in this section.

• Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation.
• Periodically check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.
• After cleaning the vehicle interior, check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.

The use of Genuine INFINITI floor mats can 3 extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat retainer clips. The number and shape of the floor mat retainer clips for each seating portion varies depending on the vehicle. When installing Genuine INFINITI floor mats follow the installation instructions provided with the mat and the following:

1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the shift lever in P (Park) position and with the parking brake fully applied, position the floor mat in the floorwell so that the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with the retainer clips.
2. Secure the grommet holes into the clips and ensure that the floor mat is properly positioned.

Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition still in the OFF position, the shift lever in the P (Park) position and with parking brake applied, fully apply and release all pedals. The floor mat must interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position.

It is recommended that you visit an INFINI retailer for details about installing the floor mats in your vehicle.

Top-down line drawing of a car with a circular component and a pointer pointing to the front panel (no text or symbols)

LAI2095

Retainer clips

The illustration shows the location of the floor mat retainer clips.

not SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. For additional information, refer to "Seat belt maintenance" in the "Safety-Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section of this manual.

CORROSION PROTECTION

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS

A CAUTION

Periodically clean the seat tracks to prevent reduction of ability to move the seats.

Clean periodically with a high-powered vacuum cleaner. Dirt and debris may reduce the ability to adjust the seat. A wet cleansi agent may be used if necessary.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE the CORROSION

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

• The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.
• Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION

Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean.

· Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible.
- Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation.

Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

• NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is recommended that you consult an INFINITI retailer.

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions....8 - 2

Engine compartment check locations....8-3

Engine cooling system.... 8 - 4

Checking engine coolant level....8 - 5

Changing engine coolant 8-5

Engine oil 8-6

Checking engine oil level....8-6

Changing engine oil 8-7

Changing engine oil filter 8-8

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid....8-9

Brake fluid 8-10

Windshield-washer fluid....8-10

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir....8-10

Battery 8-11

Jump starting 8-12

Variable voltage control system.... 8-12

Drive belt 8-13

Spark plugs 8-14

Replacing spark plugs 8-14

Air cleaner 8-14

In-cabin microfilter 8-15

Windshield wiper blades.... 8-15

Cleaning 8-15

Replacing 8-16

Brakes 8-18

Fuses....8-18

Engine compartment 8-19

Passenger compartment....8-20

Battery replacement.... 8-21

INFINITI Intelligent Key.... 8-21

Lights 8-23

Headlights 8-23

Fog lights (if so equipped) 8-23

Exterior and interior lights 8-23

Wheels and tires 8-25

Tire pressure 8-25

Tire labeling....8-28

Types of tires 8-31

Tire chains 8-34

Changing wheels and tires....8-34

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

• Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
• Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.
• If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.
• It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.
• Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.
If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery.
Because the fuel lines on gasoline engine models are under high pressure even when the engine is off, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITretailer for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.

CAUTION

Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.

• Avoid contact with used engine oil and in coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, the engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always, conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.
• Never leave the engine or Continuously ed Variable Transmission (CVT) related s component harnesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• Never connect or disconnect the battery arrayor any transistorized component while with the ignition switch is in the ON position.

This "Do-it-yourself" section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A Genuine INFINITI service manual is also available. For additional information, refer to "Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it is recommended that you have it done by an INFINITI retailer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LDI3173 8 9

KR20DDET engine

1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Drive belt location
3. Air filter
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Battery
6. Fuse/Fusible link box
7. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
8. Engine oil filler cap
9. Engine oil dipstick

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

• Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. For additional information on precautions, refer to "If your vehicle overheats" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual.
• The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

• Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.
• When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN LongLifeAntifreeze/Coolant(blue)concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer's instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system.

- The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.

LDI3157

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.

If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

For additional information on the location of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to "Engine compartment check locations" in this section.

- Never remove the radiator or engine coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.

Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.

Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the MIN level⑧, add coolant to the MAX An INFINITI retailer can change the engine level A. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the improper servicing can result in reduced radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to heater performance and engine overheating. the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level WARNING

WARNING

- To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.

ENGINE OIL

LDI3158

A B C LD 0371

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H (High) and L (Low) mark. This is the normal operating oil level range. If the oil level is below the L (Low) mark, remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not fill oil level above H (High) mark

6. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.

A LDI3186

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with labeled components (B, LD13176, LD13178), no readable text or symbols beyond labels.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler co by turning it counterclockwise.

4. Remove clips® and under-engine protector.

5. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug ©.

6. Remove the drain plu© with a wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil.
   If the engine oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. For additional information, refer to "Changing engine oil filter" in this section.
   Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
7. Check your local regulations.

WARNING

• Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
• Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
• Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.

1. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque: 25 ft-lb (34 N·m)

1. Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler cap securely.

For additional information on drain and refill capacity, refer to "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.

CAUTION

Damage to engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the INFINITI New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

1. Start the engine. Check for leakage around the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as required.

2. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with no visible text or symbols

LDI3182

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Remove clipsⒶ and under-engine protector.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

Mechanical assembly diagram showing a motor and gear assembly (no text or labels)

1. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter. ⑧.
2. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. 10. Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

• Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to engine damage.

• The dipstick must be inserted in place to prevent oil spillage from the dipstick hole when filling the engine with oil.

• Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil.

• Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

• Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required.

• Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if necessary.

CAUTION

INFINITI recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in INFINITI CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.

Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission fluid in an INFINITI CVT, asit may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under INFINITI's New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

- Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may also damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under INFINITI's New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid i required, we recommend an INFINITI retailer for servicing.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.

1. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag.

BRAKE FLUID

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

Technical diagram of a car engine compartment with hoses and a water level indicator (no text or symbols)

WARNING

• Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle's stopping ability.
• Clean the filler cap before removing.
• Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the brake fluid is below the MIN® in the brake warning light will illuminate. Add brake fluid up to the MAX lin®. For additional information on the recommended type of brake fluid, refer to "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the brake system should be thoroughly checked. It is recommended that you visit a INFINITI retailer for this service.

For additional information on the location of the brake fluid reservoir, refer to "Engine compartment check locations" in this section

Technical diagram showing mechanical components and a circular component with a central hub, no readable text or symbols present.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR

aFill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when the "Low Washer Fluid" warning message shows on the vehicle information display. n.To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the mixture ratio.

8-10 Do-it-yourself

BATTERY

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

• Do not substitute engine antifreeze coolant for windshield-washer fluid. This may result in damage to the paint.
• Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
• Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

If the battery is labeled "do not open" it maintenance free and battery fluid should not be checked. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer or a qualified specialist workshop to confirm the battery's performance.
- Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.
- Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened.
- If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 d or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING

• Do not expose the battery to flames, an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to contactyourskin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery o battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
• Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion.
• When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.
• Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
• Keep battery out of the reach of children
  Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent caps tight and the battery level.

Line drawing of a battery with grid pattern and two terminals (no text or symbols)

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, refer to "Jump starting" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual. If the engine does not start I jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM

on by in

NOTE:

Do not try to open the top of the battery.

This battery is not equipped with removable vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

CAUTION

• Do not ground accessories directly to the batteryterminal.Doingso will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely.
• Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system. This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.

8-12 Do-it-yourself

DRIVE BELT

The current sensor Ⓐ is located near the battery along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area.

eᵢ 1 5 4 3 2 WDI0638

1. Automatic tensioner pulley
2. Generator pulley
3. Water pump pulley
4. Air conditioner compressor pulley
5. Crankshaft pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poor condition, have it replaced. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition.

SPARK PLUGS AIR CLEANER

SDI1895

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

SDI1895 LDI3165

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped spark plugs as frequently as conventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.

• Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.

Technical diagram of a vehicle engine bay with labeled components and a marked section A

WARNING

- Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner filter not only cleans the intake air, it also stops the flame if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner is not installed and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Never drive with the air cleaner filter off. Be cautious working on the engine when the air cleaner is off.

8-14 Do-it-yourself

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

- Never pour fuel into the throttle body of attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury. If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. CLEANING If your windski windshield-waters when run

To remove the filter from the air cleaner, push the tabsⒶ and pull the cover upward.

The viscous paper type filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.

When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner filter, make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing and latch the clips.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. For additional information on change intervals, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.

If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after clearing the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.

OFF OFF A LDI2476

1. Rapidly lift the windshield wiper and washer lever Ⓐ upwards twice within 0.5 seconds. This action will cause the wipers to automatically take the service position.

Diagram showing a mechanical linkage or cable assembly with labeled components A, B, and C, including an arrow indicating direction.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow the procedure below:

1. When ignition switch is ON or within 60 seconds after placing the ignition switch from the ON to OFF position, place the windshield wiper and washer lever into the OFF position.

2. Once the wipers are in the service position, push the release to.

3. Move the wiper blade dow(B) and remove.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
5. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove.

OFF OFF OFF D LDI2477

1. Finally, lift the windshield wiper and washer lever to the mist position and release. This action will cause the wipers to resume the set position.

CAUTION

• After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.
• Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.

E F LDI3189

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle. This may cause clogging or improper windshield-washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin.

Rear window wiper blade

If checking or replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

BRAKES FUSES

If the brakes do not operate properly, it is Under some driving or climate conditions, or recommended that you have the brakes occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise checked. It is recommended that you visit away be heard. Occasional brake noise during INFINITI retailer for this service. light to moderate stops is normal and does

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.

Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.

LDI2997

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.

Fuses are used in the passenger and engine compartment. Spare fuses are provided and can be found in the passenger compartment fuse box.

When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

8-18 Do-it-yourself

Technical line drawing of a vehicle engine compartment with no visible text or symbols

1. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tabs and lifting the cover up.
2. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the fuse block in the passenger compartment.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the head-light switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.

A B

1. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse.
2. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITE retailer for this service.

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

Diagram showing car interior with a hand holding a tool, labeled with 'A' and directional arrow indicating rotation or movement.

Technical diagram of an internal combustion engine component with labeled parts and a circular annotation B

Hand holding a small mechanical component with no visible text or symbols

LDI3167|LDI3203

Technical diagram showing two labeled mechanical components with circular indicators C and D

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of higher or lower amper age rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The fuse box is located on the driver's side the instrument panel.

1. If the fuse is open, replace it with an equivalent good fuse.

2. Push the fuse box cover to install.

3. Be sure the ignition switch and the head-a new fuse also opens, have the electrical light switch are OFF. system checked and repaired. It is recom-

4. Remove the fuse box cover® with a suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the trim.

mended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

1. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.

NOTE:

1. Remove the fuse with the fuse power

Your vehicle may not be equipped with all fuses listed on the fuse label.

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts.

graph TD
    A["Air intake"] --> B["Process Step"]
    B --> C["Product Air"]
    C --> D["Final Exhaust"]

    subgraph Stage1
    E["Top air intake"] --> F["Downward arrow"]
    F --> G["Downward arrow"]
    G --> H["Downward arrow"]
    H --> I["Downward arrow"]

    subgraph Stage2
    J["Bottom air intake"] --> K["Downward arrow"]
    K --> L["Downward arrow"]
    L --> M["Downward arrow"]

    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#ccf,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style E fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style F fill:#cff,stroke:#333
    style G fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style H fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style I fill:#fcc,stroke:#333
    style J fill:#ffc,stroke:#333
    style K fill:#cfc,stroke:#333
    style L fill:#fcc,stroke:#333

INFINITI INTELLIGENT KEY

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver ^A into the slit ^B of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. Place a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the casing.

LDI2637

8-22 Do-it-yourself

1. Replace the battery with a new one. Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent.

2. Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction.

3. Hold the battery by the edges. Hold the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity.

4. Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the lower part.

5. Close the lid securely as illustrated with Ⓒ and Ⓓ.

6. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

If you need assistance with replacement, it recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCG Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation ^1 is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

LIGHTS

HEADLIGHTS

For additional information on headlight bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.

Replacing the LED headlight bulb

If LED headlight bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

For additional information on fog light bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.

Replacing the LED fog light bulb

If LED fog light bulb replacement is required it is recommended that you visit an INFINITE retailer for this service.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.
Headlight assembly*
High/Low --
Park/Daytime running --
Turn --
Side marker	--
Fog light (if so equipped)	--
Door mirror turn signal light*	--
Map light assembly*
Dome lights*	--
Map lights*	--
Courtesy light (if so equipped)*	--
Vanity mirror light*	2 -
Footwell light*	--
Welcome light*	--
Personal light*	--
Glove box light*	1.4	-
Front step lights*	5	168
Rear step lights (if so equipped)* 5	168
dCargo lights*	5 -
THigh-mounted stop light*	--
Rear combination light
Tail*	--
Stop*	--
Turn*	--
Backup (reversing) assembly*
Tail*	--
Turn*	--
Backup*	--
License plate light*	--

* It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for replacement.
Always check with the Parts Department at an INFINITI retailer for the latest parts informat

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LDI3204 13 12 11 10 9 8

8-24 Do-it-yourself

1. Headlight assembly
   2 Map light assembly
   3 Personal light
   4 Door mirror turn signal light
2. High-mounted stop light
3. Cargo light
4. License plate light
5. Backup (reversing) assembly
6. Rear combination light
7. Rear step light (if so equipped)
8. Front step light
9. Welcome light
10. Fog light (if so equipped)

A B C D WD10263

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, light and/or cover using a cloth and suitable tool.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, refer to "Flat tire" play screen by sending a signal from driver side center pillar. Tire pressures the "In case of emergency" section of this sensor that is installed in each wheel should be checked regularly because: manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

Most tires naturally lose air over time.

Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.

For additional information, refer to "Low tire pressure warning light" in Instruments and controls" section, "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the "Starting and driving" section and "Flat tire" in the "In cas

The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Section and Flat tire in the "in" section. Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) "emergency" section of this manual.

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

It monitors tire pressure of all tires

except the spare. When the low tire

pressure warning light is lit and the

"Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warn

appears in the vehicle information di

play, one or more of your tires is s

nificantly under-inflated. If equipped,

the system also displays pressure of

tires (except the spare tire) on the c

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long

ndstance trips. The recommended tire

pressure specifications are shown on

the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label or the Tire and Loading In-

formation label under the "Cold Tire

iPressure" heading. The Tire and Load

ing Information label is affixed to the

TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle for inflating the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. For additional information, refer to "TPMS with Tire Inflation Indicator" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect entire life and vehicle handling.

Do-it-yourself 8-25

WARNING

• Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident.
• The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.
• Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.

- For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

1 RE AND LOADING INFORMATION MENTS SUR LES PNEUS ET LE CHARGEMENT SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL X FRONT AVANT X NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL REAR ARRUÈRE X TIRE PNEU SIZE DIMENSIONS COLD TIRE PRESSURE PRESSION DES PNEUS À FROID FRONT AVANT XXXX/XXXXXX XXXX XXX kPa, XXPSI REAR ARRUÈRE XXXX/XXXXXX XXXX XXX kPa, XXPSI SPARE DE SECOURS None Aucun The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. Le poids total des occupants et du chargement ne doit jamais dépasser XXX kg ou XXX lb. 6 4 3 SEE OWNER'S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION VOIR LE MANUEL DE L'USAGER POUR PLUS DE RENSEIGNEMENTS LDI3172

Tire and Loading Information label

① Seating capacity: The maximum number of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.
② Original tire size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

③ Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle's GVWR.

④ Tire size - refer to "Tire labeling" i this section.
⑤ Spare tire size.
⑥ Vehicle load limit: Refer to "Vehicle loading information" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

Technical line drawing of a mechanical assembly with concentric rings and a central hub (no text or symbols)

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of a escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, re-position the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Front and RearOriginal Tire:P235/55RF19	33 psi, 230 kPc
Front and RearOriginal Tire:P255/45RF20	33 psi, 230 kPc
Spare Tire: none

too of - WDIO394

Example
TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the Tire Identification Number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

P215/65R15 95H

P 215 65 R 15 95 H 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

WD10395

1. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire's load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is required by law.

2. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

Example

① Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The "P" indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not all tires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tire's ratio of height to width.

4. R: The "R" stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

DOT XX XX XXX XXXX DOT — ↑ 1 XX — ↑ 2 XX — 3 XXX — 4 XXXX — 5

LDI2786

Example

② TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the "Department Of Transportation". The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer's identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

8-30 Do-it-yourself

1. Three-digit code: Tire type code < (Optional).

2. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. These numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the tire.

③ Tire ply composition and material The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester and others.

④ Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.

⑤ Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

⑥ Term of "tubeless" or "tube type" Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube ("tube type") or not ("tubeless").

⑦ The word "radial"

The word "radial" is shown if the tire has radial structure.

⑧ Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

- When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. An INFINITI retailer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.

Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

- Replacing tires with those not originally specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the low tire pressure warning system.

• Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which can cause the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system to malfunction resulting in personal injury or death, excessive tire wear and may damage the trans mission, transfer case and differential gears.
• For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

CAUTION

- ONLY use spare tires specified for the AWD model.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and

corrected as necessary. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

All season tires

INFINITI specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all yed including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tire have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

INFINITI specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating "M&S" on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snow icy conditions, INFINITI recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on a four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load ratio to the original equipment tires. If you do it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. state and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

Run-Flat Tires

Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires and is not equipped with a spare tire, or and tool kit. The jack and tool kit may be purchased at the dealer. Please consult an INFINITI retailer for additional information.

You can continue driving to a safe location If the vehicle is being driven with one or more even if the run-flat tires are punctured. Al- flat tires, the low tire pressure warning light gways use run-flat tires of the specified size with illuminate continuously and a chime will

at) four wheels. Mixing tire sizes or construction may reduce vehicle handling stability. If necessary, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

frequently check the tire pressure and adjust pressure of each tire properly. The tire pressure can be also checked in the vehicle information display.

It can be difficult to tell if a run-flat tire is under-inflated or flat. Check the tire pressures as described in this section. If the tire becomes under-inflated while driving, the

low tire pressure warning light will illuminate and the "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display. If the tire becomes flat while driving, the low tire pressure warning light and the "Flat Tire - Visit dealer" warning will appear.

Low tire pressure:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate and the "Tire Pressure Low - Adek Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display.

Flat tire:

If the vehicle is being driven with one or more flat tires, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate continuously and a chime will

8-32 Do-it-yourself

sound for 10 seconds. A "Flat-Tire - Visit dealer" warning also appears in the vehicle information display.

The chime will only sound at the first indication of a flat tire and the warning light will illuminate continuously. When the flat tire warning is activated, have the system reset and the tire checked and replaced if necessary. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. Even if the tire is inflated to the specified COLD tire pressure, the warning light will continue to illuminate until the system is reset. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates continuously and the "Flat Tire - Visit dealer" warning appears in the vehicle information display:

• Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Increase your following distance to allow for increased stopping distances.
• Avoid sudden maneuvers, hard cornering and hard braking.

WARNING

• Although you can continue driving with a punctured run-flat tire, remember that vehicle handling stability is reduced, which could lead to an accident and personal injury. Also, driving a long distance at high speeds may damage the tire.
• Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not drive more than approximately 93 miles (150 km) with a punctured run-flat tire. The actual distance the vehicle can be driven on a flat-tire depends on outside temperature, vehicle load, read conditions and other factors.
• Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid hard cornering or braking, which may cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
• If you detect any unusual sounds or vibrations while driving with a punctured run-flat tire, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. The tire may be seriously damaged and need to be replaced.

CAUTION

Never install tire chains on a punctured run-flat tire, as this could damage your vehicle.

Avoid driving over any projection or pot-hole, as the clearance between the vehicle and the ground is smaller than normal.
- Do not enter an automated car wash with a punctured run-flat tire.

Have the punctured tire inspected by an INFINITI retailer or other authorized repair shop. Replace the tire as soon as possible if the tire is seriously damaged.

• Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission, transfer case and differential gears (AWD models).
• ONLY use spare tires specified for the AWD model.

- If excessive tirewear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be replaced with tires of the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables should not be installed on 255/45R20 size tires. Installation of the tire chains/cables on 255/45R20 size tires will cause damage to the vehicle. If plan to use tire chains/cables, you should install 235/55R19 size tires on your vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer's suggestions. Use only SAEclass "S" chains. Class "S" chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class "S" chains are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the

8-34 Do-it-yourself

closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.

graph TD
    A[" "] --> B[" "]
    B --> C[" "]
    C --> D[" "]
    D --> A
    style A fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style B fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style C fill:#f9f,stroke:#333
    style D fill:#f9f,stroke:#333

WDI0258

'CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

^9 Tire rotation

INFINITI recommends rotating the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

For additional information on tire replacing procedures, refer to "Flat tire" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque: 83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.

A WARNING

• After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.
• Retighten thewheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
• Do not include the spare tire in tire rotation.
• For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

is e 1 2 WDIO259

Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark

A WARNING

- Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced.

• The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.
• Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury.
• Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
• For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information"
• (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. For additional information, refer to "Wheels and tires in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

WARNING

• The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, VDC system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.

• For 2WD models, if your vehicle was originally equipped with four tires that were the same size and you are only replacing two of the four tires, install the new tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury.

• If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear. For additional information on wheel off-set dimensions, refer to "Wheels and tires" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

• When replacing a wheel without the TPMS, such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tirepressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
• Replacing tires with those not originally specified by INFINITI could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
  The TPMS sensor may be damaged if not handled correctly. Be careful when handling the TPMS sensor.

When replacing the TPMS sensor, the ID registration may be required. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for ID registration.

Do not use a valve stem cap that is not specified by INFINITI. The valve stem cap may become stuck.

• Be sure that the valve stem caps are correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may be clogged up with dirtandcauseamalfunction or loss of pressure.
• Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.

The use of retread tires is not recommended.

- For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

• Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.
• Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.
• Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.
• Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
• INFINITI recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

MEMO

8-38 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements 9 - 2

General maintenance 9-2

Scheduled maintenance 9 - 2

Where to go for service 9-2

General maintenance 9 - 2

Explanation of general maintenance items 9 - 2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items .....9-5

Emission control system maintenance: 9 - 5

Chassis and body maintenance: 9-6

Maintenance schedules....9-7

Additional maintenance items for severe

operating conditions....9-7

Oil control system 9-7

Standard maintenance 9-9

Emission control system maintenance .....9-9

Chassis & body maintenance....9-11

Maintenance under severe operating

conditions 9-13

Severe driving conditions 9-13

Maintenance log 9-14

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Some day-to-day and regular maintenance essential to maintain your vehicle good mechanical condition, as well as its emissions and engine performance.

It is the owner's responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a f general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, an INFINITI retailer.

iSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

The maintenance items listed in this section are required to be serviced at regular intervals. However under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the s tems checked and serviced. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer this service.

INFINITI technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up-to-date with the best service information through technical fieldins, service tips and training programs. They are completely qualified to work on INFINITI vehicles before work begins.

You can be confident that an INFINITI services service department can perform the service needed to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have it checked promptly. In addition, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer if you think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the "Maintenance precautions" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following items with " * " is found in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the secondary

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

latch keeps the hood from opening when primary latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt or corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and install securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking

the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are ring, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km). If your vehicle is equipped with different sized tires in the front and rear, tires cannot be rotated.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge of repair facility.

ten and always prior to long distance trips, necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) transmitter components: Replace the TPM

the transmitter grommet seal, valve core and ca when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment.

df the steering wheel or seat vibrates at no mal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualify

If Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, it is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints/headrests move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped hold securely in all latched positions.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel).

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Battery (except for maintenance free bat- Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking teries): Check the fluid level in each cell. It the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the should be between the MAX and MIN linesengine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil Vehicles operated in high temperatures or to drain back into the oil pan.

under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

the NOTE:

eCare should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MAX and MIN line on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belt*: Make sure the drive bel not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected. It is recommended what you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service. For additional information, refer to "Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, oth-

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

erwise rust may form on the floor pan, from the following descriptions are provided to fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At give you a better understanding of the schedule the end of winter, the underbody should beuled maintenance items that should be regulated thoroughly flushed with plain water, being larly checked or replaced. The maintenance is careful to clean those areas where mud and dust may accumulate. For additional information, schedule indicates at which mileage/time in-dirt may accumulate.

tion, refer to the "Appearance and care" section of this manual.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

In addition to scheduled maintenance, your vehicle requires that some items be checked during normal day-to-day operation. For additional information, refer to "General maintenance" in this section.

Items marked with “**” are recommended by INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. You are not required to perform maintenance of these items in order to maintain the warranties which come with your INFINITI. Other maintenance items and intervals are required

When applicable, additional information can be found in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

NOTE:

INFINITI does not advocate the use of non-OEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on an INFINITI product. Many of the aftermarket flushing systems use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of which has not been validated by INFINITI.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, grease, and refrigerant, refer to "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

Drive belt*: Check engine drive belt for wear, fraying or cracking and for proper tension. Replace any damaged drive belt.

Engine air filter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, check/replace the filter more frequently.

Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

Maintenance and schedules

equivalent with the proper mixture. (For ad-CHASSIS AND BODY ditional information on the proper mixture for MAINTENANCE:

your area, refer to "Engine cooling system" the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.)

NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant the use of non-distilled water may reduce the recommended service interval of the coolant.

Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscosity refer "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if valve noise increases. Adjust valve clearance if necessary.

Evaporative emissions control vapor lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping an connections for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs of the same type as originally equipped.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for chafing, crack deterioration, and signs of leaking. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, replace the filter more frequently.

Propeller shaft(s): Check for damage, looseness, and grease leakage. (AWD)

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts, drive shaft boots: Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, inspect more frequently.

Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) according to the instructions under "Explanation of general

"maintenance items" in this section. When ro-stating tires, check for damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.

Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil and transfer case oil: Visually inspect for signs of

*Replace at specified intervals.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

To help ensure smooth, safe and economical driving, INFINITI provides two maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to 90,000 miles

(144,000 km)/144 months. For most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule.

After 90,000 miles

(144,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS

Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles OIL CONTROL SYSTEM

(16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.

Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go, "rush hour" traffic.

Extensive idling and/or low speed driving ^th for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

Driving in dusty conditions.

Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread roads.

Towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier.

NOTE:

For vehicles operated in Canada, both standard and severe maintenance items should be performed at every interval.

Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions should be performed on vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle under the following conditions:

- Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).

How driving conditions affect OCS display timing

Conditions Driving Scene Display timing
Light · Freeway driving	· City driving (flat/moderate hills)· No towing or heavy loads· No extended engine idling
Extreme · Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).· Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.· Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go "rush hour" traffic.· Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.· Towing a trailer or caravan, or using a car-top carrier.· Driving with frequent use of braking or in mountainous areas.· Sustained high speed driving.	Normal

CAUTION

• If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km).
• Operating your vehicle with deteriorated oil can damage the engine.
• If your oil replacement indicator resets prematurely or becomes inoperative, please change the oil within six months or 3,750 miles (6,000 km) from your last oil change.

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

The following tables show the standard maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces, individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be required. After

90,000 miles (144,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval.

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATIONPerform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000(km x 1,000)Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

3.75(6)6

7.5(12)12

11.25(18)18

15(24)24

18.75(30)30

22.5(36)36

26.25(42)42

30(48)48

33.75(54)54

37.5(60)60

41.25(66)66

45(72)72

Drive belt See NOTE (1) I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R

EVAP vapor lines

I*

I*

I*

Fuel lines

I*

I*

I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant*

See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil

See NOTE (6)

R R R

R R R

Engine oil filter

See NOTE (6)

R R R

R R R

Spark plugs

See NOTE (7)

Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances*

See NOTE (8)

Drive belt See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil See NOTE (6) R R R R R R

Engine oil filter See NOTE (6) R R R R R R

Spark plugs See NOTE (7)

Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances*

See NOTE (8)

NOTE:
(1) After 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found damaged.
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.
(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months.
(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant.
(6) If the oil replacement indicator is displayed, change the engine oil and filter within two weeks or less than 500 miles (800 km)
(7) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.045 in (1.15 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage.
(8) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.

* Maintenance items and intervals with “**” are recommended by INFINITI for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

CHASSIS & BODY

MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATIONPerform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000(km x 1,000)Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

3.75(6)6

7.5(12)12

11.25(18)18

15(24)24

18.75(30)30

22.5(36)36

26.25(42)42

30(48)48

33.75(54)54

37.5(60)60

41.25(66)66

45(72)72

Brake lines & cables | | | | | |

Brake pads & rotors★| |

|

|

|

|

Brake fluid★RRR

CVT fluid See NOTE (1) | | | | | |

Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) | | | | | |

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts★

III

Tire rotation

See NOTE (3)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD models)★

|

|

|

|

|

|

Exhaust system★

III

In-cabin microfilter

R

R

R

R

Intelligent Key battery

|

R

R

R

MAINTENANCE OPERATIONPerform at number of miles, kilometers or monthwhichever comes first.

Miles x 1,000(km x 1,000)Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

48.75(78)78

52.5(84)84

56.25(90)90

60(96)96

63.75(102)102

67.5(108)108

71.25(114)114

75(120)120

78.75(126)126

82.5(132)132

86.25(138)138

90(144)144

Brake lines & cables I IIIII

Brake pads & rotors★IIIIII

Brake fluid★RRR

CVT fluid See NOTE (1) I IIIII

Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I IIIII

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts★III

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD models)★

I

I

I

I

I

I

Exhaust system★III

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

Intelligent Key battery R R

R

R

NOTE:

Maintenance items with "★" should be performed more frequently according to "Maintenance under severe driving conditions".

(1) If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every 60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer for this service.
(2) If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.
(3) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to "General maintenance" in this section.

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS

The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

- Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).

Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles Driving in dusty conditions.

(16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread roads.

- Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go "rush hour" traffic. Using a car-top carrier.

- Extensive idling and/or low speed driving Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval
Brake fluid Replace Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months
Brake pads & rotors	Inspect	Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts	Inspect	Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (AWD models)	Inspect	Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Exhaust system	Inspect	Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE LOG

3,750 Miles (6,000 km) or 6MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:	7,500 Miles (12,000 km) or 12MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:	11,250 Miles (18,000 km) or 18MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:
15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 24MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:	18,750 Miles (30,000 km) or 30MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:	22,500 Miles (36,000 km) or 36MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:
26,250 Miles (42,000 km) or 42MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:	30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 48MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:	33,750 Miles (54,000 km) or 54MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

37,500 Miles (60,000 km) or 60 MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:	41,250 Miles (66,000 km) or 66 MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:	45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 72 MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:
48,750 Miles (78,000 km) or 78 MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:	52,500 Miles (84,000 km) or 84 MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:	56,250 Miles (90,000 km) or 90 MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:
60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 96 MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:	63,750 Miles (102,000 km) or 102 MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:	267,500 Miles (108,000 km) or 108 MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:
71,250 Miles (114,000 km) or 11 MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:	475,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 12 MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:	078,750 Miles (126,000 km) or 126 MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:
82,500 Miles (132,000 km) or 13 MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:	286,250 Miles (138,000 km) or 13 MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:	890,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 144 MonthsRetailer Name:Date:Mileage:RetailerStamp:

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . 10-2

Fuel recommendation 10-3

Engine oil and oil filter recommendations.....10-6

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations 10-7

Specifications 10-8

Engine....10-8

Wheels and tires 10-9

Dimensions and weights....10-9

When traveling or registering in another

country 10-10

Vehicle identification 10-10

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate . . . 10-10

Vehicle identification number (chassis number) 10-10

Engine serial number 10-11

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label....10-11

Emission control information label .....10-11

Tire and Loading Information label.....10-12

Air conditioner specification label .....10-12

Installing front license plate....10-12

Vehicle loading information....10-14

Terms 10-14

Vehicle load capacity 10-15

Securing the load....10-16

Loading tips 10-17

Measurement of weights 10-17

Towing a trailer 10-18

Maximum load limits 10-19

Towing load/specification 10-22

Towing safety 10-23

Flat towing for front wheel drive vehicle (if so equipped)....10-28

Flat towing for all-wheel drive vehicle (if so equipped)....10-28

Uniform tire quality grading....10-29

Emission control system warranty 10-30

Reporting safety defects 10-30

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test....10-31

Event Data Recorders (EDR)....10-32

Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information 10-33

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/ LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the "Do-it-yourself" section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
Fuel 60 L 15-7/8 gal 13-1/4 gal					· For additional information, refer to "Fuel recommendation" in this section.
Engine oil*1Drain and refill*1 For additional information, refer to "Engine oil" in the "Do-it yourself" section of this manual	With oil filter change	4.7 L 5	qt 4-1/8 qt		· Genuine "Nissan Motor Oil Ester 5W-30 SN" is recommended.· If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional information, fer to "Engine oil and oil filter recommendations" in this section.
	Without oil filter change	4.4 L 4	5/8 qt 3-7/8 qt
Engine coolant(with reservoir)		7.7 L 2	gal 1-3/4 gal		· Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) equivalent
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid - - -					· Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3· INFINITI recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (o equivalent) ONLY in INFINITI CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. ing fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid N may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other as recommended is not covered under the INFINITI's New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Differential gear oil		-- -			· Genuine NISSAN HYPOID FLUID-S1 GL-5 75W-80 or equivalent· The use of differential gear oil other than the specified may ca hicle malfunctions and result in non-warranty vehicle repairs.
Transfer oil		-- -			· Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil
Brake fluid		-- -			· Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or equivalent 3*2: Available in mainland USA through an INFINITI retailer.
Multi-purpose grease		-- -	· NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid type Capacity (approximate)	Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
	Metric Measure	US Measure	Imperial Measure
Air conditioning system refrigerant - - -				· HFC-134a (R-134a)· For additional information, refer to "Air conditioner system refrige and oil recommendations" in this section.
Air conditioning system oil - - -				· Genuine NISSAN A/C System oil ND-OIL8 or equivalent· For additional information, refer to "Air conditioner system refrige and oil recommendations" in this section.
Windshield-washer fluid - - -				· Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze fluid or equivalent

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91) may be temporarily used, but only under the following precautions:

- Have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with unleaded premium gasoline as soon as possible.

- Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration.

Use unleaded premium gasoline for maximum vehicle performance.

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

- Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

- Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol. Using a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not specifically designed for a fuel-containing more than 15% ethanol can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the INFINITI New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

• Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
• U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. INFINITI supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their

presence. INFINITI does not recommend the if any driveability problems such as engine use of fuels of which the oxygenate contentstalling and difficult hot-starting are experi- and the fuel compatibility for your INFINITIenced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, im- cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or your service station manager. a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in INFINITI vehicles.

Gasoline specifications

INFINITI recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gas line meets the WWFC specifications.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.

The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.

If an oxygenate-blend other than methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 15% oxygenate.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

E-15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.

E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

E-85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. INFINITI does not recommend the use of f containing MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT content, not

do, so you may have to consult your gasoline correct ignition timing may result in spark retailer for more details. knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms

INFINITI does not recommend the use of a gre encountered, have your vehicle checked. aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve retailer.

deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine. Octane rating tips. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause f concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for short time under heavy engine load.

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy "spark knock." ("Spark knock" is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have an INFINITI retailer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which INFINITI is not responsible.

API certification mark

AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE FOR GASOLINE ENGINES CERTIFIED

API service symbol

API SERVICE SN SAE 5W-30 RESOURCE CONSERVING

LTI2061

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. For additional information, refer to "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in this section. INFINITI recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.

International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of a container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as the could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.

Select only engine oils that meet the Ameri-Oil which may contain foreign matter or has can Petroleum Institute (API) certification or been previously used should not be used.

10-6 Technical and consumer information

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new INFINITI vehicle is equipped with a high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in "Change intervals".

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life.

CAUTION

Damage to engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the INFINITI New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality N engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes:

• repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures
• driving in dusty conditions
• extensive idling
• towing a trailer
• stop and go commuting

For additional information on maintenance schedules, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your INFINIT vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type ND-OIL8 or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your INFINITI vehicle does not harm the earth's ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth's atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. An INFINITI retailer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.

It is recommended that you visit an INFINITI retailer when servicing your air conditioner system.

SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

Model KR20DDET
Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline
Bore x Stroke
when compression ratio = 8 in (mm) 3.307 x 3.500 (84.0 x 88.9)
when compression ratio = 14 in (mm) 3.307 x 3.547 (84.0 x 90.1)
Displacement
when compression ratio = 8 cu in (cm	3) 121.86 (1,997)
when compression ratio = 14 cu in (cm	3) 120.22 (1,970)
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Idle speed No adjustment is necessary.
CVT in N (Neutral) position
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug DILKAR7N9HG
Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.035 (0.9)
Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

10-8 Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Offset in (mm) Size
Aluminum 1.54 (39) 19 x 7.5J
1.73 (44) 20 x 8.5J
Tire size P235/55RF19
	P255/45RF20
Spare tire Not equipped

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 184.8 (4,693)
Overall width in (mm) 74.9 (1,903)
Overall height in (mm) 66.1 (1,679)
Front track
19 inch wheel in (mm) 64.4 (1,635)
20 inch wheel	in (mm) 64.0 (1,625)
Rear track
19 inch wheel in (mm)	64.2 (1,630)
20 inch wheel	in (mm)	63.8 (1,620)
Wheelbase	in (mm)	110.2 (2,800)
Gross vehicle weight rating	Ibs. (kg)	Refer to the "F.M.V.S.S./C. M.V.S.S. certification label" on the center pillar between the driver's side front and rear doors.
Cross axle weight rating
Front	Ibs. (kg)
Rear	Ibs. (kg)

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to drive your INFINITI vehicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of this user. INFINITI is not responsible for any in convenience that may result.

nd the TI1050M

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE

Technical line drawing of a car engine bay with no visible text or symbols

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (chassis number)

The VIN plate is located as shown. This nu# the vehicle identification number is located ber is the identification for your vehicle and is shown. used in the vehicle registration.

Technical line drawing of an internal combustion engine assembly (no text or labels)

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

Line drawing of a car seatbelt with an arrow pointing to the seat area (no text or symbols)

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL

Simple line drawing of a curved surface with a black upward arrow and a white square at the center (no text or symbols)

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety The emission control information label is at-Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifica- tached to the underside of the hood as tion label is affixed as shown. This label coshown. tains valuable vehicle information, such as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of manu- facture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Diagram of a mechanical component with curved lines and a labeled arrow, no readable text or symbols present.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL

Simple line drawing of a curved object with an arrow pointing upward (no text or symbols)

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL

Diagram showing layered geological or sedimentary strata with a labeled point A pointing to a feature in the upper layer.

1. Find the centerline of the vehicle and measure down 1.06 in (27 mm). Mark the location on the fascia.

The cold tire pressure is shown on the TireThe air conditioner specification label is af- and Loading Information label. The label is fixed to the underside of the hood as shown: located as shown.

Drill a 0.47 in (12 mm) hole in the fascia.

10-12 Technical and consumer information

B LTI2329

LTI2340 LTI2341

Diagram of a car rear bumper with labeled parts D and E, showing structural details and mounting points.

1. Hold the license plate bracket to the fas5. Hold the license plate bracket to the fas7. Insert two screw grommet into the cia and mark two location⑧. cia and mark two location⑨. fascia.
2. Remove the license plate bracket and drill two 0.39 in (10 mm) holes in the locations marked in the previous step.
3. Remove the license plate bracket and drill two 0.79 in (20 mm) holes in the locations marked in the previous step.
4. Install the license plate bracket to the fascia with two screws.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:

- Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo.

• GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.
  GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
• GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
• GCWR (Gross Combined Weight rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.

- Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label.

- Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit.

10-14 Technical and consumer information

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as "The combined weight of occupants and cargo" on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as "Seating Capacity" on the Tire and Loading Information label.

To get "the combined weight of occupants and cargo", add the weight of a occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration.

Load limit 1,400 lbs. (640 kg) - {Occupants + Luggage + Trailer Tongue 150 lbs. x 2 = 300 lbs. (70 kg) (135 kg) 30 lbs. x 2 = 60 lbs. (14 kg) (27 kg) 300 lbs. Weight} = Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity = 740 lbs. (336 kg) Load limit 1,400 lbs. (640 kg) - {Occupants + Luggage} = Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity = 1,040 lbs. (472 kg) Load limit 1,400 lbs. (640 kg) - {Occupants + Luggage} = Remaining available cargo and luggage load capacity = 500 lbs. (227 kg) LTI2320

Example

Technical and consumer information 10-15

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs. or XXX kg" on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information label.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For ex-

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR for your vehicle. For additional information, refer to "Measurement of weights" in this section.

Top-down view of a car backrest with four directional arrows indicating airflow or movement (no text or symbols)

Cargo area luggage hooks SECURING THE LOAD

There are luggage hooks located in the cargo area as shown. The hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps.

When securing items using luggage hooks located on the side finisher do not apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a single hook.

The luggage hooks that are located on the floor should have loads less than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.

10-16 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

• Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
• The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.
• Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.

LOADING TIPS

- The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

- Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

WARNING

- Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or collision unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle break, tire damage could occur, it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss control and cause personal injury.

Overloading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle's warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.

TOWING A TRAILER

Technical line drawing of a mechanical linkage or support structure (no text or symbols)

Tow Hitch Receiver (with Tow Package)

CAUTION

• Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load for the first 500 miles (805 km). Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
• For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used primarily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember that towing a trailer places additional loads on your vehicle's engine, drive train, steering, braking and other systems.

ad you ull

Lifestyle Receiver (without Tow Package)

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a trail and its cargo can adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance and may lead to accidents.

An INFINITI Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available on the website at www.InfinitiUSA.com. This guide includes information on trailer towing capability and the special equipment required for proper towing.

WARNING

The Lifestyle Receiver cannot be used for towing a trailer. Only use the Lifestyle Receiver for receiver mounted accessories that meet the below requirements.

• The maximum allowable load is 300 lbs. (136 kg) including the weight of the installed accessory carrier.
• Do not exceed allowable cargo weight capacity of your vehicle.

Failure to use the Lifestyle Receiver as intended can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with the Lifest Receiver to avoid damage to your vehicle do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle with Lifestyle Receiver (if so equipped). The Lifestyle Receiver should be used for receiver-mounted accessories only. The Lifestyle Receiver is designed for carrying bikes, snow boards/skis, camping gear and various other bulky items.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the value specified in the following Towing Load/Specification Chart found in this section. The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its cargo weight.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the value specified in the following Towing Load/Specification Chart.

yle the LTI2030

The GCWR equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or using improper towing equipment could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking and performance.

- The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer not only related to the maximum trailer load but also the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appropriate for level highway driving may have to be reduced for low traction situations (for example, on slippery boat ramps).

Temperature conditions can also affect towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside temperatures on graded roads

can affect engine performance and cause overheating. The engine protection mode, which helps reduce the chance of engine damage, could activate and automatically decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced engine power and vehicle speed. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driving speed, pull to the side of the road in a sal area. Allow the engine to cool and return t normal operation. For additional information, refer to "If your vehicle overheats" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual.

CAUTION

gVehicle damage resulting from improper towing procedures is not covered by INFINITI warranties.

Total trailer load Tongue load x 100 = 10 to 15% Total trailer load WTIO160

Tongue load

Gross vehicle weight Gross axle weight LTI2031

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight (GAW)

When using a weight carrying or a weight distributing hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 - 15% of the total trailer load of the trailer tongue load specified by the trail manufacturer. The tongue load must be within the maximum tongue load limits shown in the following "Towing Load/Specification" chart. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for proper tongue load. the GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The GVW equals the com-2. bined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle's maximum towing capacity and trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured using platform type scales commonly found at truck stops, highway weigh stations, building supply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity for tongue/king pin load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. n-2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of the passengers and cargo that are normally in the vehicle when towing a trailer.

Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GVWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum tongue/king pin load.

To determine the available towing capacity, Example: use the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the "Towing Load/Specification" chart found in this section.
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the GCWR. The remaining amount is the available maximum towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh your trailer on a scale with all equipment and cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the trailer and is not more than the calculated available maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to be moved or removed to meet the specified ratings.

Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed on a scale - including passengers, cargo and hitch - 4,650 lbs. (2,109 kg).

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label - 4,916 lbs. (2,230 kg).

Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) from "Towing Load/Specification" chart - 7,320 lbs. (3,320 kg).

Maximum Trailer towing capacity from "Towing Load/Specification" chart - 3,000 lbs. (1,361 kg).

4,916 lbs. (2,230 kg) GVWR - 4,650 lbs. (2,109 kg) GVW

= 266 lbs. (121 kg) Available for tongue weight

7,320 lbs. (3,320 kg) GCWR - 4,650 lbs. (2,109 kg) GVW

ōē 2,670 lbs. (1,211 kg) Capacity available for towing

266 lbs. (121 kg) Available tongue weight = 2,670 lbs. (1,211 kg) Available capacity = 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less than the maximum towing capacity due to the passenger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight between 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or with the trailer tongue load specification recommended by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight specification shown in the "Towing Load/Specification" chart even if the calculated available tongue weight is greater than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less than 10%, reduce the total trailer weight to match the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are within the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

WARNING

The towing capacities provided in this manual are for general reference only. The safe towing capacity of your vehicle is affected by dealer and factory installed options and passenger and cargo loads. You must weigh the vehicle and trailer as described in this manual to determine the actual vehicle towing capacity. Do not exceed the published maximum towing capacity or the GCWR or the GVWR shown on the FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can result in an accident causing serious injury or property damage.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART
	With Tow Package Without Tow Package
Maximum Towing Capacity*1 3,000 lbs.	(1,361 kg)	Do not tow with your vehicle
Maximum Tongue Load 300 lbs.	(136 kg)	Do not tow with your vehicle
Maximum Gross Combined Weight7,320 lbs. Rating	(3,320 kg)	Do not tow with your vehicle

*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required achieve the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle's maximum towing capacity.

10-22 Technical and consumer information

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional trailer tow package. The trailer tow package includes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Cine INFINITI ball mounts and hitch balls are available from an INFINITI retailer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer. A Genuine INFINITI trailer hitch is available from an INFINITI retailer. Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property damage due to sway caused by crosswinds, rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specific weightratings. Your vehicle may be capable of towing a trailer heavier than the weight rating of the hitch components. Never exceed the weight rating of the hitch components. Doing so can cause serious person injury or property damage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight rating for your trailer:

The required hitch ball size is stamped most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also have the size printed on the top the ball.

Choose the proper class hitch ball based on the trailer weight.

The diameter of the threaded shank of the hitch ball must be matched to the mount hole diameter. The hitch ball should be no more than 1/16" smaller than the hole in the ball mount.

- The threaded shank of the hitch ball must vehicle, be long enough to be properly secured to the ball mount. There should be at least 2 threads showing beyond the lock washer and nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball mount based on the trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the ground.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or "dead weight" ball mount is one that is designed to carry the whole amount of tongue weight and gross weight directly on the ball mount and on the Receiver.

Weight distribution hitch

This type of hitch is also called a "load-leveling" or "equalizing" hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can't carry the full tongue weight of a given trailer, and need some of the tongue weight transferred through the frame and pushing down on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towing equipment manufacturers to determine if they recommend the use of a weight-distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may affect the operation of trailer surge brakes. you are considering use of a weight-distributing hitch system with a surge brake-equipped trailer, check with the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer to determine if and how this can be done.

Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing and using the weight-distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface With the ignition on and the doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adClass I hitch

just the hitch equalizers so that the fro bumper height is within 0-.5 inches (0 13 mm) of the reference height measured in step 2. The rear bumper should be no higher than the reference height measured in step 2.

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs. (907 kg).

Class II hitch

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributing which so the rear of the bumper is no higher than the measured reference height when the trailer is attached. If the rear bumper is higher than the measured reference height when loaded, the vehicle may handle unpredictably which could cause a loss of vehicle control and cause serious personal injury or property damage.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffet- ing caused by other vehicles can affect trailer handling. Sway control devices may be used to help control these affects. If you choose to use one, contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway control device will work with the vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer's brake system. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installing Always and using the sway control device.

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers of a maximum weight of 3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg).

Tire pressures

When towing a trailer, inflate the vehicle tires to the recommended cold tire pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and proper inflation pressure should be in accordance with the trailer and tire manufacturer's specifications.

Safety chains Always use suitable safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains

10-24 Technical and consumer information

should be crossed and should be attached to a 7-pin trailer harness have a professional supplier of towing the hitch, not to the vehicle bumper or axle connector. If your trailer is equipped with equipment make sure the trailer brakes are The safety chains can be attached to the flat 4-pin connector, an adapter will be properly installed and demonstrate proper bumper if the hitch ball is mounted to the needed to connect the trailer lights to the brake function testing.

bumper. Be sure to leave enough slack in the vehicle. Adapters are available at auto parts chains to permit turning corners. stores and hitch retailers.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical system, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used to provide power for all trailer lighting. This unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct power source for all trailer lights while using the vehicle tail light, stop light and to signal circuits as a signal source. The module/converter must draw no more than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp circuits. Using a module/converter that exceeds these power requirements may damage the vehicle's electrical system. See a reputable trailer retailer to obtain the proper equipment and to have it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or local regulations. For assistance in hooking up trailer lights, contact an INFINITE retailer or reputable trailer retailer. Vehicles equipped with the optional trailer tow pack

Trailer brakes

Most states require a separate braking system on trailers with a loaded weight above specific amount, make sure the trailer meets the local regulations and the regulations where you plan to tow.

Several types of braking systems are available.

Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line running to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes are activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch ball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge brakes are common on rental trailers and some boat trailers. In this type of system, there is no hydraulic or electric connection for brake operation between the tow vehicle and the trailer.

Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking sys-Items are activated by an electronic signal sent from a trailer brake controller (special-brake-sensing module).

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system directly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

Be certain your vehicle maintains a level position when a loaded and/or unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition; check for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other possible causes of either condition.

Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.
Keep the cargo load as low as possible in the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity low.
Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in the back half. Also make sure the load is balanced side to side.

• Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, vehicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.
• Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to all federal, state or local regulations. If not, install any mirrors required for towing before driving the vehicle.

• Determine the overall height of the vehicle and trailer so the required clearance is known.

• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.
  When backing up, hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Move you hand in the direction in which you want the trailer to go. Make small corrections and back up slowly. If possible, have someone guide you when you are backing up.
  Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not recommended; however, if you must do so: 6.

• Turn off the engine.
  To drive away:

• Start the vehicle.

• Apply and hold the brake pedal.

• Shift the transmission into gear.

• Release the parking brake.

• Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are clear from the blocks.

• Apply and hold the brake pedal.

• Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

While going downhill, the weight of the trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may decrease overall stability. Therefore, to maintain adequate control, reduce your speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes when descending a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness and could cause overheating. Shifting to a lower gear instead provides "engine braking" and reduces the need to brake as frequently.
- If the engine coolant temperature rises to a high temperature, refer to "If your vehicle overheats" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding the vehicle's behavior, you should practice turning, stopping and backing up in an area which is free from traffic. Steering stability and braking performance will be somewhat different than under normal driving conditions.

• Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.
• Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or lock to prevent the coupler from inadver-3. tently becoming unlatched.
• Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
• Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

of !CAUTION If you move the shift selector to the (Park) position before blocking the wheel and applying the parking brake, transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.
   After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly release the brake pedal until the blocks absorb the vehicle load.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

10-26 Technical and consumer information

• Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal circumstances.
• Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle's first 500 miles (805 km).
• For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do tow, do not drive over 50 mph 2 (80 km/h).
• Have your vehicle serviced more often than at intervals specified in the recommended maintenance schedule in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
• When making a turn, your trailer wheels will be closer to the inside of the turn your vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, make a larger than normal turning radius during the turn.
• Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly causing vehicle sway. When being passed by larger vehicles, be prepared for possible changes in crosswinds that could affect vehicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to allow the vehicle to coast and steer as

straight ahead as the road conditions allow. This combination will help stabilize the vehicle

- Do not correct trailer sway by steering or applying the brakes.

1. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the brakes and pull to the side of the road in a safe area.
2. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is balanced as described in this section.
3. Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing while towing a trailer requires considerably more distance than normal than passing. Remember, the length of the trailer must also pass the other vehicle before you can safely change lanes.
4. Downshift the transmission to a lower gear for engine braking when driving down steep or long hills. This will help slow the vehicle without applying the brakes.

Avoid holding the brake pedal down to long or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency.

- Increase your following distance to allow for greater stopping distances while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

INFINITI recommends that the cruise control not be used while towing a trailer

Some states or provinces have specific regulations and speed limits for vehicles that are towing trailers. Obey the local speed limits.

• Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.
• When launching a boat, don't allow the water level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or rear bumper.
  • Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights before backing the trailer into the water or the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil should be replaced and transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more frequently. For additional information, refer to the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR FRONT WHEEL DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

• Failure to follow these guidelines can suit in severe transmission damage.
• Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
• Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle with the front tires on the ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.
• DO NOT tow your front wheel drive continuously variable transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.

- For emergency towing procedures refer to "Towing recommended by INFINITI" in the "In case of emergency" section of the manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR ALL-WHEEL DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

• Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
  Never flat tow your All-wheel drive (AWD) vehicle.
  DO NOT tow your All-wheel drive (AWD) vehicle with any wheels on the ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.
  For emergency towing procedures refer to "Towing recommended by INFINITI" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual.

Continuously Variable Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qualityspecified government test surfaces of as-Grades: All passenger car tires must conformhalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have

to federal safety requirements in addition to poor traction performance.

these grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, than the minimum required by law.

are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, orexcessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY

Your INFINITI is covered by the following emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your INFINITI. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:

· INFINITI Division

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your INFINITI. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:

· Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying INFINITI.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your retailer, or INFINITI.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

You may notify INFINITI by contacting https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Secour Consumer Affairs Department, Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-toll-free, at 1-800-662-6200. cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying INFINITI.

If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect ex to notify INFINITI of any safety consists in a group of vehicles, it may reterns please contact our Consumer Inquest that INFINITI conduct a recall formation Centre toll free at 1-800-campaign. However, Transport 361-4792. Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your retailer, or INFINITI.

You may contact Transport Canada's Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safety defects online at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers) or

WARNING

A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive (AWD) should never be tested using a two wheel dynamometer (such as the dynamometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment. Make sure you inform the test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in transmission damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the "ready condition" for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the "ready condition" when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a "not ready" condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicle's inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the

Technical and consumer information 10-31

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on The ProPILOT™ Assist is equipped with an steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for Event Data Recording function.
10 seconds, the I/M test condition is "not
ready". If the MIL does not blink after 20 sec. The main purpose is to record, in certain crash safety performance.
onds, the I/M test condition is "ready". It is or near crash-like situations, such as an air recommended that you visit an INFINITI re-bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, NISSAN and third parties entrusted by tailer to set the "ready condition" or to pre-data that will assist in understanding how d vehicle's systems performed. The Data re- corded data to a third party except:
cording function is designed to record data . related to driver operation, vehicle dynamics and system status for a short period of time. The Data recording function in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
- Driver operational status of accelerator, brake, handle etc.
- Detection status of a vehicle ahead and lane markers
- Vehicle information such as vehicle speed
• Information on the operation of the Pro-PILOT Assist
- ProPILOT Assist malfunction diagnosis information
- Images from multi-sensing front camera (Available only when SRS air bag or IEB system is activated)
The ProPILOT Assist does not record conversations, sounds or images of the inside of the vehicle.
With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government office.
For use as part of NISSAN's defense of litigation
For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner

10-32 Technical and consumer information

OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

Genuine INFINITI Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine INFINITI Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at INFINITI retailers. Genuine INFINITI Owner's Manuals can also be purchased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genuine INFINITI Service Manuals, contact:

www.infiniti-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genuine INFINITI Owner's Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine INFINITI Service Manual or Owner's Manual, for this model year and prior, please contact your nearest INFINITI retailer. For the phone number and location of an INFINITI retailer in your area call the INFINITI Satisfaction Center at 1-800-361-4792 and a bilingual INFINITI representative will assist you.

MEMO

10-34 Technical and consumer information

11 Index

2nd row bench seat adjustment	1 Anti-lock brake warning light	2 - 1 2 Brake wear indicators	2-20, 8-18
	Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)	5 - 1 8 Self-adjusting brakes	8 - 1 8
	Armrests	B1e5 eassist
A	Around View® Monitor	4 - 1 Brake fluid	8
	Audible reminders	2 - 2 Brakes	8 - 1
Active noise cancellation	Autolight switch	2 - 4 Brake system	5-179
Active sound enhancement	5 - 1 Automatic	Break-in schedule	5 - 1 7 0
Aiming control, headlights	2 - 4 5 Automatic drive positioner	3-40, 3-42 Brightness control
Air bag (See supplemental restraint system)	Automatic power window switch	2-69 Instrument panel	2-46
	Automatic anti-glare inside mirror	3-36, 3-37 Bulb check/instrument panel	2 - 1 2
Air bag system	Automatic door locks	3 - 6 Bulb replacement	8 - 2 3
Front (See supplemental front impact air bagsystem)	Automatic drive positioner	3 - 4 0 , 3 - 4 2
	1 - 5 0
Air bag warning labels	1 - 6 2
Air bag warning light	1 - 6 2 , 2 - 1 B
Air bag warning light, supplemental	1 - 6 2 , 2 Backup Collision Intervention (BCI)	5 - 6 Capacities and recommended
Air cleaner	8 - 1 Battery	5 - 19L, u8e11/ lubricants
Air cleaner housing filter	8 - 1 4 Charge warning light	2 - 1 C3argo are a storage bin
Air conditioner	Battery replacement	8 - 2 Cargo (See Air conditioner operation	10-14
	4 - 3 6 INFINITI Intelligent Key	8 - 2 vehicle loading information)
	Key f o b.	8 C2 phone or CB radio	4 - 4 4
	Before starting the engine	5 - 1 C7assis control	5 - 1 8 4
	10 - 8lt (See drive belt)	8 - 1 Check tire pressure	2 - 2 8
	Blind Spot Intervention® (BSI)	5 - 5 C8ld restraints	1 - 1 9 , 1-20, 1-22, 1-24
	4 - 3 Bnd Spot Warning (BSW)	5 - 4 3 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
	4 - 36 Booster seats		far - Children) System
	4 - Brake		Precautions on child
Alarm system (See vehicle security system)	Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)	5-180 restraints	1 - 2 2 , 1 - 2 9 , 1 Top1 Other strap anchor point
	2 - 3 3 Brake fluid
Anchor point locations	1 - 2 6 Brakelight (Seestoplight)	loc.a.t.i.o 8 s.2 3
Antenna	4 - 4 3 Brake system	5 - 1 7 Child restraint with top tether strap	1 - 2 6
Antifreeze	5 - 1 9 1 Brakewarninglight	Child safety - 102 door lock	3 - 7

C

Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	2 - 2Drive positioner, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climate control seat switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cold weather driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Variable Transmission (CVT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control and drive (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9 Dual power moonroof. 2 - 6 9 , 2Extended storage switch. 2-55 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) 5 - 1 9
Controls
Heater and air conditioner controls. .4-36
Coolant
Capacities and recommended fuel / lubricants.	Economy - fuel. 5 - 1 7 dualers (See Emergency engine shutoff 5 - 1 6 , hazard warning flasher switch) 6 - 2 Emission control information label 1 0 - Flat tire 6 - 3
Changing engine coolant. 8 - Emission control system warranty 1 0 - Floor mat positioning aid. 7 - 6
Checking engine coolant level 8 - Engine Fluid
Engine coolant temperature gauge 2-8 Before starting the engine 5 - 1 7 Brake fluid 8
Corrosion protection 7 - 7 Block heater. 5 - 1 9 2 Capacities and recommended fuel / lubricants.
Cruise control 5 - Capacities and recommended fuel / lubricants.
Cup holders 2 USB / lubricants.
D
Daytime Running Light System 2 - 4 5 Checking engine oil level 8 - FEM.V.S.S. certification label 1 0 - 1 1
Defroster switch Engine compartment check locations 8-3 Fog light switch 2-47
Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch 2 - 4 0 Engine coolant temperature gauge 2-8 Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) with Engine cooling system 8 - Pedestrian Detection system 2 - 1 4 , 5 - 1 Engine oil 1 0 - 9 Engine cooling system 8 - Front air bag system (See Environmental restraint system) 1 - 5 0
Dimensions and weights 2 - 4 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation. 1 0 - Front and rear sonar system 5 - 1 8 Engine oil pressure warning light 2 - Front-door pocket 2 - 5 6
Distance Control Assist (DCA) system 5-138
Door locks 3 - 4 , 3 - Engine oil pressure warning light 2 - Front-door pocket 2 - 5 6
Drive belt 8 Engine oil viscosity 1 0 - Front power seat adjustment 1 - 3

Front seats	1 - 2	H	Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audible reminders)2 - 1 1 , 2 - 1 2 , INFINITI Drive Mode Selector.5 - 2 9
FuelCapacities and recommended fuel / lubricants	Hazard warning flasher switch	6 - 2	INFINITI Intelligent Key System.3-2, 3-7
Fuel economy	Headlight aiming control	2 - 4	Infiniti InTouchTM Owner's Manual.4 - 2
Fuel-filler door and cap	Headlight and turn signal switch	2 - 4	INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System.2 - 3 5 , 3 - 4 ,
Fuel gauge	Headlights	8 - 2	Inside automatic anti-glare mirror .3-36, 3-37
Fuel octanerating	Headlights, aiming control	2 - 4	Instrument brightness control.2-46
Fuel recommendation	Headlight switch	2 - 4	Instrument panel.0 - 6 , 2 -
Loose fuel cap warning	Head restraints	1 - 7	Instrument panel dimmer switch.2-46
Fuel efficient driving tips	Heated seats	2 - 4	Intelligent All-Wheel Drive (AWD).5 - 1 7
Fuel-filler door	Heater	4 - 3	Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC).5-83
Fuel gauge	Heater and air conditioner (automatic)(if so equipped)	4 - 3	Intelligent Key systemKey operating range.3 - 9
Fuses	Heater and air conditioner controls	4 - 3	Key operation
Fusible links	Heater operation	4 - 3	Mechanical key.3 - 3
Garage door opener, HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver	Heater and air conditioner (automatic)	4 - 3	Remote keyless entry operation.3 - 1
	Heater and Air Conditioner Settings	4 - 4	Troubleshooting guide.3 - 1 9
	Hill start assist system	5 - 1 8	Warnings signals
Gas cap	HomeLink® Universal Transceiver .2-74, 2-76,2 - 7 7, 2 - 78, 2-79, 2-80, 2-81, 2-82	3 - 2 4	Interior light
	Hood	3 - 2 4	ISOFIX child restraints.1-24
GaugeEngine coolant temperature gauge	Luggage hook	2 - 6 1
	Horn	2 - 4 7
Fuel gauge	2 - 9		J
Odometer	2 - 7
Speedometer	2 - 6 , 2 - 7	I	Jump starting.6-5, 8-12
Tachometer	2 - 8
Trip odometer	Ignition switch
General maintenance	Push-button ignition switch	5 - 1 3	K
Glovebox	Immobilizer system	5 - 1 7
Gloveboxlock	Important vehicle information label	1 0 - 1 1	Key fob battery replacement.8 - 2
Grocery hooks	In-cabin microfilter	8 - 1
	Increasing fuel economy	5 - 1 7 2

Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system)

L

Label

Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12

Labels

Air conditioner specification label . . .10-12

C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..... 1 0 -

Emission control information label . .10-11

Engine serial number ..... 1 O -

F.M.V.S.S. certification label ..... 1 0 -

Tire and Loading Information label . .10- 12

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate....10

Warning labels (for SRS) ..... 1 -

Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)

system....5-32,5

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)

system....5-32,5

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for Children) System

License plate

Installing the license plate. . . . . . . 1 0

Liftgate

Liftgaterlease

Light

Airbagwarninglight.....

Brakelight(Seestopligh

Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . 2 - 1 2

Bulb replacement 8 - 2

Charge warning light 2 - 1 3

Exterior and Interior lights....8-23

Foglights....8-23

Fog light switch 2 - 47 Maintenance

Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . 2 - 4 Inteance

Headlights 8 - 2 3 Geni e r a f i n d i n t e i n d i n t e .

Interior light..... inside the vehicle ..... 9 - 3

Lightbulbs 8-23 Maintenance precautions 8-2

Low tire pressure warning light 2 - 1 4 Outside the vehicle 9 - 2

Low, windshield-washer fluid Seat belt maintenance ..... 1 - 19

warning light Under the hood and vehicle 9 - 4

Passenger, air, bag, and status, light 1-53 Maintenance log 9-14

Passenger air bag and status light 1.2 OS Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Personal lights 2-7 Maintenance schedules. 9-7, 9-7

Trunklight Maintenance under severe operation

Warning/indicators lights and conditions.

L warning/indicator lights and audible reminders 2 1 1 2 1 Mal function indicator light.

double reminders ..... 2 - 1 1, 2 - 1 2 ... M' a p lights ..... 2

g h t s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 - 2.5 Memory Seat. 3-40, 3-42

Meters and gauges 2 - 6

1.0 Child safety rear door lock 3 - 7 Instrument brightness control ..... 2 - 4 6

Child safety rear door lock ..... 5 Mirgor Door locks 3 - 4 - 3

Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . 3-36,

7-5-40 x 100K....23-37. 28

Power door locks 3 6 Outside mirrors 3 - 3 9

Vanity mirror 3 - 3 5

with q 2^4 and f being light. Mirrors 2-15, 2-26. 3-36

w the pressure warning light .... 2 Moonroof. .... 7 - 5

2 Windshield-washer hold Moving Object Detection (MOD) ..... 4 - 2 9

2 14 Ping g h n c..... page books 2 - 6 1

gage rack (see roof rack) 2 - 6 2 , 2 - 6 3

page /See 2.1.7

(micle loading information) 1.0 - 1.4

. . . . . . . 5 8 - 2 3 , Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . .10-5

Odometer. 2 - 7

OilCapacities and recommended fuel / lubricantsChanging engine oilChanging engine oil filterChecking engine oil levelEngine oilEngine oil and oil filterrecommendation. Engine oil viscosityOutside mirrors OverheatIf your vehicle overheatsOwner's manual order formOwner's manual/service manual order information	On-pavement and off-road driving precautions.Precautions on booster seatsPrecautions on child restraintsPrecautions on supplemental restraint systemPrecautions when starting and drivingPredictive Forward Collision Warning (P3F CW)ProPILOTTM AssistPush starting	5 - 9 country Remote Engine Start Reporting safety defects (US only) Roadside assistance program R3of rank-39 Precautions on seatbelt usage SChild safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock Child safety rear door lock
P ParkingParking/parking on hills Parking/brakePersonal lights PowerPower door locks Power outlet Power rear windows Power steering system Power windows Rear power windows Power outlet Power steering Precautions Maintenance precautions	R RadioCar phone or CB radioRAIN sensorReadiness for inspection maintenance (I / M) testRear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)Rear power windowsRearview mirrorRearView MonitorRear window and outside mirror defroster switchRear window wiper and washer switchesRecommended FluidsRecordersEvent DataRefrigerant recommendation	4 - 4 4 infants and small children 2Injure8 Person Larger children 1OP-r3e1cautions on seatbelt us 3Pregnant women 1-14 Seat belt extenders 1-18 Seat belt maintenance 1-19 Seat belts Three-point type with retractor 1 - 1 1 ,7 Seat belt extenders 1-18 Seat belt warning light 1 - 1 4 ,2 Seat belts 2 - 3 9 Seats 10 - 2 2nd row bench seat adjustment Adjustment 1 - 4 2 2nd row bench seat adjustment Adjustment 1 - 2 2nd row bench seat adjustment Adjustment 1 - 2 2nd row bench seat adjustment Adjustment 1 - 2 2nd row bench seat adjustment Adjustment 1 - 2 2nd row bench seat adjustment Adjustment 1 - 2 2nd row bench seat adjustment Adjustment 1 - 2 2nd row bench seat adjustment Adjustment 1 - 2 2nd row bench seat adjustment Adjustment 1 - 2 2nd row bench seat adjusting 10 - 3 2Armrests 10 - 3 2Armrests 10 - 3 2Armrests 10 - 3 2Armrests 10 - 3 2Armrests 10 - 3 2Armrests 10 - 3 2Armrests 10 - 3 2Armrests 10 - 3 2Armrests 10 - 3 2Armrests

Front seats	Sunglasses holder	2 - 5	Theft
Heated seats	Sunroof	7 - 5	(INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system),
Seats/floor mats	Sun visors	3 - 3	5 engine start 2-35, 3-4, 5-17
Security indicator light	Supplemental air bag warning labels	1 - 6	3 three-way catalyst 5 - 4
Security system	Supplemental air bag warning light .1-62, 2-17	Tire
(INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system),engine start	Supplemental front impact	Flatt tire	6 - 3
	a lar bag system	Tire and Loading Information label .10-12
Security systems	Supplemental restraint system	Tire chains	1 - 6
Vehicle security system	Information and warning labe	Pire pressupe	8-34
Self-adjusting brakes	Precautions on supplementalrestraint system	1 - 4	2 Tire rotation
Service manual order form	Supplemental restraint system	Types of tires.	8 - 3
Servicing air conditioner	(Supplemental air bag system)	Uniform tire quality grading	10 - 2
Spark plug replacement	Switch	Wheels and tires	8 - 2
Spark plugs	Autolight switch	Wheel/tire size.	10 - 9
Specifications	Automatic power window switch.	2 - 4	4 Tire pressure
Speedometer	Fog light switch	Low tire pressure warning light	2 - 1
Speedometer and odometer	Hazard warning flasher switch	Tire Pressure Monitoring System
SRS warning label	Headlight aiming control	6 - (IPMS)	5 - 5
Stability control	Headlight and turn signal switch	Top tether strap child restraint	1 - 2
Standard maintenance	Instrument brightness control	Towing
Starting	Power door lock switch	3 - 6	4-wheel drive models 6 - 1
Before starting the engine	Rear window and outside mirrordefroster switch	Flattow ing	1
Jump starting	Rear window wiper and washerswitches.	Towing load/specification 10 - 2	2
Precautions when startingand driving	Turn signal switch	Tow trucktow ing
Push starting	Turn signal switch	Trailertow ing.	10 - 1
Starting the engine	Turn signal switch	Transceiver
Starting the engine	Turn signal switch	HomeLink® Universal Transceiver .2-74,2-76, 2-77, 2-78, 2-79, 2-80, 2-81, 2-82
Steering	T	Transmission
Power steering system	Tachometer	Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) fluid	8 - 9
Steering wheel	Temperature gauge	Driving with Continuously Variable
Stoplight	Engine coolant temperature gauge .2-8	Transmission (CVT)	5 - 1
Storage	Engine coolant temperature gauge .2-8	Travel (See registering a vehicle inanother country)	10 - 1
Storage bin	Engine coolant temperature gauge .2-8
Storage tray	Engine coolant temperature gauge .2-8
Sunglasses case	Engine coolant temperature gauge .2-8

Trip odometer	2 - 6 , 2 - 7	Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders.
Trunklight	2 - 7 3
Turn signal switch	2 - 4 6	Warning systems switch . 2 - 5 0 , 2 - Washer switch . 8 - 1 7
	Warning Air bag warning light . . . . Rear window wiper and washer
	Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . 2 - 1 2 switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .	Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
U
Uniform tire quality grading	1 0 - 2 9	Distance Control Assist (DCA) . . . . 5 - 1 1 8 Wheels and thes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USB/iPod® Charging Ports	4 - 4 3 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . 2 - 1 6 When traveling or registering in another Country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lane Departure Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V		Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lane Departure Warning Locking passengers' windows. 2 - 6 8
Vanity mirror	3 - 3 5	Light. 5 - 3 2 , 5 - 3 7 , 5 - 4 0 Power rear windows 2 - 6 8
Variable voltage control system	8 - 1 3	Loose fuel cap warning. 2 - 2 8 Power windows 2 - 6 7
Vehicle dimensions and weights	1 0 - 9	Low fuel warning light Wired power windows 2 - 6 8
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system	.5-181	Low tire pressure warning light 2 - Winds hield w asher fluid Winds hield wiper blades
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system	.5-181	Low windshield-washer fluid Wiper 2 8
Vehicle identification	1 0 - 1 0	w arning light Rear window wiper and washer
Vehicle identification number (VIN)	1 0 - 1	Passenger air bag and status light 1-53 switches. 2
Vehicle identification number (VIN)		Seat belt warning light. 1 - 1 4 , 2 - 1 Wiper blades
(Chassis number).	1 0 - 1 0	Supplemental air bag Wiper and washer switch 2-36
Vehicle identification number (VIN)		w arning light 1 - 6 2 , 2 - 1 7
plate	1 0 - 1 0	TRMS 2 - 6
Vehicle immobilizer system	5 - 1 7	Vehicle security system 2 - 3 3
Vehicle loading information	1 0 - 1 4	Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders 2 - 1 1 , 2 - 1 2 , 2 - 1 7
Vehicle recovery	6 - 1 1	Warning labels (for SRS) 1-62
Vehicle security system	2 - 3 3	Warning/indicator lights and audible (INFINITI vehicle immobilizer system), reminders 2 - 1 1 , 2 - 1 2 , 2 - 1 7
engine start	2 - 3 5 , 3 - 4 , 5 1 7 Audible reminders 2 - 1 1 , 2 - 1 2 , 2 - 1 7
Vents	4 - 3 4	Indicator lights 2 - 1 1 , 2 - 1 2 , 2 - 1 7
Visors	3 - 3 5	Warning lights 2 - 1 1 , 2 - 1 2 , 2 - 1 7
		Warning lights 2 - 1 1 , 2 - 1 2 , 2 - 1 7

MEMO

MEMO

MEMO

GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 96).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not available, unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI number (Research octane number 91) may be temporarily used, but only under the following precautions:

• Have the fuel tank filled only partially with unleaded regular gasoline, and fill up with unleaded premium gasoline as soon as possible.
• Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration.

Use unleaded premium gasoline for maximum vehicle performance.

CAUTION

Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.

Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

- Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol. Using a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not specifically designed for a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the INFINITI New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

- Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibittheuseofMMT in reformulated gasoline.

U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

For additional information, refer to "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

- Genuine "Nissan Motor Oil Ester 5W-30 SN" is recommended.

For additional information, refer to "Engine oil and oil filter recommendations" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label.

The label is typically located on the driver center pillar or on the driver's door. For a tional information, refer to "Wheels and tir in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manu

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, refer to "Break-in schedule" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.

Printing : October 2017

Publication No.: OM19E0 0J55U0

Printed in the U.S.A.

J55-D